Description
This detailed elucidation regarding hogeschool van amsterdam entrepreneurship.
1
Course book
Fall 2014
(SEMESTER 1: 2014-2015)
For Incoming Exchange Students
Hogeschool van Amsterdam
Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences
School of Economics and Management
2
Welcome to the School of Economics and Management of the Amsterdam University of Applied
Sciences (Hogeschool van Amsterdam / HvA). The School of Economics and Management offers
education to about 14,000 students. It is not only the largest school of the Amsterdam University of
Applied Sciences (AUAS) but also the largest faculty of business-students in the Netherlands.
We are proud to offer our incoming students a wide variety of business-related courses in for instance
Marketing, Finance, Economics, Human Resources, ICT, etc. Moreover, we hope that you will benefit
from the Dutch educational approach, our dedicated lecturing staff and your fellow students. All of
which is meant to enable you to successfully study and live in one of the vibrant hearts of Europe.
Enjoy your time with us!
Postal Address:
Hogeschool van Amsterdam
Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences
School of Economics and Management
International Centre, (Back office: room 4.109)
P.O. Box 22575
1100 DB Amsterdam Z.O.
The Netherlands
Visiting Address:
Fraijlemaborg 133
1102 CV Amsterdam Z.O.
Telephone : +31 (0)20 523 6960
Fax : +31 (0)20 620 6801
E-mail : [email protected]
Website : www.hva.nl/sem-exchange
3
Table Of Contents
Part Content Page
A Selecting Courses 5
1 Introduction 5
1.1 Requirements 5
1.2 Academic Calendar 5
2 Registration for Classes 6
3 Elements of the Course Description 8
3.1 Course Name and Module Code 8
3.2 ECTS credits 8
3.3 Examinations 9
B Minor descriptions (minor = fixed programme of 30 ECTS) 11
1 Business English 12
2 Business of Sports and Events 13
3 Business Process Integration Finance 16
4 Business Process Integration Management 16
5 City Marketing in Europe 18
6 Cross Cultural Business Skills (full time) 21
7 Cross Cultural Business Skills (part time) 23
8 Entrepreneurship 25
9 International Financial Management 37
10 International Marketing Management 39
11 Latin American Business Studies 46
C Sports for Exchange Students 48
D Modules (individual courses) 49
Name module ECTS Course code Study
Programme
Page
Business Ethics 5 5000BET_08 IBL 50
Business Information Systems 5 4000BIS_11 IFM 53
Business Process Simulation 10 6100BPSE13 Minor 56
Controlling and Accounting Project 5
6100CAPE13/
4000CAP_11 Minor/IFM
57
Contemporary Entrepreneurship 5 6400CEP_10 Minor 59
Current Issues in International Business 4 5000CIB_10 IBMS 60
Cases in Entrepreneurship 5 6400CIE_10 Minor 63
Current Issues in Finance 5 5000CIF_10 IBMS 64
Corporate Finance 2 5 5000CO2_06 IBMS 66
Consumer Behaviour 5 5000COB_14 IBMS 68
Demand Chain Management 5 5000DCM_07 IBMS 69
Debating in English 5 5000DEE_08 IBL 70
Development Economics in Asia 3 3000DVE_11 TMA 72
E-commerce 3 4000ECE_11 TMA 75
Economics of Emerging Markets 4 5000ECM_11 IBMS 77
Entrepreneurial Finance 5 6400EFI_10 Minor 80
Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship 5 6400ESP_10 Minor 81
Financial Accounting for Consolidation 5 4000FAC_11 IFM 82
Financial Risk Management 5 5000FRM_13 IBMS 84
4
Globalization and Latin America 3 5000GLA_10 IBMS 86
Human Resource Management 1 3 5000HR1_10 IBMS 98
Human Resource Management 5 6100HRME13 Minor 90
Intercultural Awareness 4 5000ICN_03 IBMS 91
International Financial Accounting 5 5000IFA_13 IBMS 94
International Financial Markets 5 3000IFM_10 IFM 96
International Business Law 5 5000ILW_06 IBMS 99
International Marketing 3 5000IMK_08 IBMS 103
International Money and Finance 3 5000INE_03 IBMS 105
Internet Marketing 5 5000INM_10 IBMS 108
International Trade 3 5000INT_03 IBMS 109
Latin American Business Culture 3 5000LAC_10 IBMS 113
Management Accounting 3 5 4000MA3_11 IFM 114
Management Accounting Techniques 5 5000MAT_06 IBMS 116
Managing Entrepreneurship and
Innovation 5 6400MEI_10 Minor
118
Multinational Business Foreign Exchange
Management 5 4000MFX_11 IFM
119
Modern History and Society in Latin
America 5 5000MHS_06 IBMS
122
Marketing in Action 5 5000MIA_10 IBMS 125
Marketing Communication 5 3000MKC_12 IBL/IBMS 126
Marketing in Latin America 5 6100MLA_13 Minor 129
Dutch for Exchange Students 1 3 5000N01_05 IBMS 130
Political Economy of Latin America 5 5000PEL_13 IBMS 132
Personal Leadership 3 5000PRL_12 IBMS 134
Sales Negotiation & Culture 5 5000SAN_09 IBMS 137
Supply Chain Management 5 6100SCME13 Minor 141
Strategic Enterprise Management 5 6100SEME13 Minor 142
Strategic Marketing/Strategic Market
Management 5
3000SMK_10/
5000STM_09
IBL/TMA/IBM
S
143
Stock Valuation (Investment Analysis) 5 5000STV_12 IBMS 146
Treasury Management Project 5
6100TMPE13/
4000TMP_11 Minor/IFM
148
5
Part A Selecting Courses
This course book provides general instructions on the course enrolment, the organisation of tests and
brief descriptions of all courses which are available for incoming students during the Fall semester of
the academic year 2014-2015. Please note that all the information in this course book may be
subject to change.
1. Introduction
1.1 Requirements
Before students start selecting courses, they should have checked all requirements set by their home
institute.
The selection of candidates is the responsibility of the home institution. The home institute ensures
that students are prepared appropriately for the study abroad programme (academic standard,
language proficiency, motivation etc.). However, the host institution reserves the right to reject any
student whom it considers not meeting its minimum standards, be it academic standards or language
ability.
1.2 Academic Calendar (under reservation!)
Fall 2014 = SEMESTER 1 (Aug. 2014-Jan. 2015)
Spring 2015 = SEMESTER 2 (Jan. 2015- July 2015)
Students are strongly advised to check the most actual schedule on intranet:https://dlwo.dem.hva.nl/en/study/time-tables/
Fall 2014 semester
Arrival days at Schiphol Airport (+ check in at
accommodation)
15 and 18 August 2014
Introduction at HvA (mandatory) 19 August (in the morning)
ISN – Amsterdam introduction 19 (in the afternoon)-22 August 2014
Start lectures 1 September 2014
Autumn Holiday (no lectures) 13-19 October 2014
Exam period (Central exams) 8-19 December 2014
Christmas Holiday 22 December 2014- 4 January 2015
Resit exams 19-25 January 2015
End semester 26 January 2015
Spring 2015 semester
Arrival day at Schiphol Airport (+ check in at
accommodation)
28 January 2015
Introduction at HvA (mandatory) 29 January 2015 in the morning
(under reservation)
ISN – Amsterdam introduction 29-31 January 2015
Start lectures 2 February 2015
Final exams 15-26 June 2015
Resit exams 6-10 July 2015
End semester 17 July 2015
Please bear in mind that it is NOT possible to start the exchange programme later than two weeks
after the start of the lectures. After these 2 weeks, the student has missed too many lectures, and
project groups have already been formed in the first week of the semester. When booking flights,
6
please keep the dates mentioned above in mind. Exam schedules cannot be adjusted to suit an
early departure! It is not possible to do an Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences exam
abroad.
Therefore, we strongly advise to our incoming exchange students to stay in Amsterdam until at
least 26 January 2015 (Semester 1) or 17 July (Semester 2) !
2. Registration for Classes
The School of Economics and Management generally offers education in small to medium-sized
classes. Some courses are offered more than once to give a larger number of students the opportunity
to attend the course. This means that students do not only register for a specific course, but at the
same time they also need to register for a specific day and time at which the concerned course is
offered.
Our School of Economics and Management uses an online registration method for the courses and
timetabling, the Time Table Assembly (TTA). After being accepted, you will receive a login name and
password which gives access to the enrolment site. Within a specified period of time you will register
for courses and thus make your own personal timetable.
In theory, it is possible to compose your own programme out of the courses described in the course
book. This course offering is under reservation, since slight changes and timetable clashes might
occur. However, as there are many alternatives, this should not constitute serious problems. In
principle, registration and timetabling are not open for changes after closing time.
As a rule, a total of 30 ECTS credits is regarded as an appropriate study load for one semester. The
maximum amount of ECTS credits is 33.
Apart from taking individual courses, it is possible to take a so-called minor. This is a one-semester (=
30 ECTS) study programme which consists of a number of fixed, pre-selected courses focusing on a
specific field of study. The minor consists of a number of courses, it is not necessary to pass the full
minor programme to obtain grades for the courses.
The courses you choose constitute your examination programme for the semester.
In the Time Table Assembly, you see different columns and rows. These are the lecture hours. Each
lecture hour takes 50 minutes. The lecture times (the numbers) (except for the part time modules;
these are in the early evening!) are as follows:
Hour Begin time End time
1 08.30 09.20
2 09.20 10.10
BREAK 10.10 10.20
3 10.20 11.10
4 11.10 12.00
5 12.00 12.50
6 12.50 13.40
7 13.40 14.30
8 14.30 15.20
9 15.20 16.10
10 16.10. 17.00
11 17.00 17.50
12 17.50 18.40
13 18.40 19.30
14 19.30 20.20
7
15 20.20 21.10
16 21.10 22.00
17 22.00 22.50
The other elements of the Time Table Assembly refer to the name of the course, the teacher who is
lecturing it and the class room. In addition, information is provided about the number of available
places of that specific class and the number of students that already have enrolled for that class.
We strongly advise you to make a printout of your selection after completion. Do not forget to bring a
printed version of your personal timetable to Amsterdam!
Further instructions on how to register for courses/classes will be emailed to students individually after
admission.
Example:
See for example Mon 3, 4, 5: OAM BDT 1001
(0/30)
The box runs from Mon 3 until Mon 5, this means that this course is lectured on Mondays from the 3rd hour until and
including the 5
th
hour (= 10.10 hrs.-12.40 hrs.)
OAM: abbreviation for course code OAMVH2ES01 (which is Organisation and Management);
BDT: code of the lecturer, in this case Mr. Bout;
1001: number of the classroom;1001 is on the first floor (1), classroom nr. 001
(0/30): there are 30 places in that class and – so far - no students have enrolled.
If all places are taken, you can put yourself in queue for one course, see for example:
Mon 7,8,9, MAB UNG 3029.
8
3. Elements of the Course Description
The course descriptions contain information about the key subjects of the course, prerequisites,
learning goals, assessment matters and the credits awarded on successful completion.
3.1 Course Name and Module Code
Course name and module codes can be found in the heading of the course descriptions. The three-
letter code relates to the name of the subject, which is followed by an exam code.
Please note that the names of the lecturers can change at the beginning of each semester. Therefore,
we always advise students to ask the lecturer for his/her name and e-mail address during the first
lecture.
Since last year, we no longer use the so-called ‘BOE-codes’ anymore (e.g. for the course
‘International Trade’ the BOE-code was INTVH2ES03). These BOE-codes have been adapted into
‘Course Codes’. However; the Course Codes still contain the main 3 letters of the course; for
International Trade (INT) the Course Code is 5000INT_03.
3.2 ECTS credits
Below the module code, you will find the number of ECTS credits which are assigned to the module.
ECTS stands for 'European Credit Transfer Systems', and was developed as part of European Union
(EU) programmes to promote student mobility. It functions as an internationally recognized standard
for describing and weighing courses, meant to facilitate exchanges of students (particularly between
EU member states). The ECTS-system is based on the complete workload of the average student,
including lecture attendance, practical work, personal study and reading for exams. In the ECTS-
system, one credit represents a twenty eight-hour working week, and the standard workload for one
semester is 30 credits.
Example: SMK V H2 EL 04
SMK = Strategic Marketing;
V = Regular fulltime study programme; (V= voltijd = fulltime)
H2, S2, S3 or S4 = 3
rd
/4
th
year of study;
EL = IBL department;
04 = internal code.
The courses offered are selected from several departments or relate to a minor:
ES = IBMS – International Business and Management Studies
EL = IBL – International Business and Languages
FA = IFM – International Financial Management
TA = TMA – Trade Management Asia
IM = IM – International Management
MN = Part of a minor
The basic principles of ECTS are summarised in the ECTS Key Features. More detailed
guidance, answers to frequently asked questions and examples of good practice can be found
in the ECTS Users' Guide published by the European Union.
9
Grading system in the Netherlands
The School of Economics and Management applies the Dutch grading system. Grades are awarded
on a scale from 1 to 10, in which 1 represents the worst possible result, and 10 a brilliant performance.
The minimum for a pass is 5.5.
On the final transcript with grades (= grade list) only round figures will feature. As an example, a grade
between 6.0-6.4 will be rounded down to a 6, a grade between 6.5-6.9 will be rounded up to a 7.
The Dutch grading system, uses from elementary to university education the 1 to 10 scale in the
following table, in which 10 is the highest grade, 6 the minimum pass and 1 the lowest grade. However
9’s are seldom given and 10’s are quite rare. 1-3’s are also not very often used.
Official Dutch grading system:
10 = Excellent
9 = Very good
8 = Good
7 = Satisfactory
6 = Sufficient
5 - 1 = Fail
Sometimes grades are not given but achievements are expressed in words. If that is the case a V is a
pass and a VR is an exemption. The level of achievement is not specified above the minimum level.
The grading table requires universities to keep track of their grading practice and culture, which is
good practice in many institutions across Europe. The ECTS grading table allows for simple,
transparent interpretation and conversion of grades from one system or context to another, and
therefore does justice to the level of academic performance of all learners. Used correctly, it bridges
different grading systems as well as different cultures in the European Higher Education Area and
beyond.
The grading table presents how many students (in percentages) receive a specific grade. This
provides all necessary information to convert the grade in any local grading system.
I.
* based on the total number of grades awarded in the degree programmes during four preceding
years.
Credit System:
A student's workload is measured in ECTS credits. According to Dutch law, one credit represents 28
hours of work and 60 credits represents one year of full-time study. One semester is 30 ECTS.
National / Amsterdam
University of Applied
Sciences Grades
Total number
awarded in reference
group
Grading percentages*
10 12,130 1%
9 62,417 5%
8 285,692 22%
7 509,989 40%
6 414,066 32%
Total 1,284,294 100%
10
3.3. Examinations
As a rule, the students' progress or final results are assessed by examinations held at the end of the
course. Some courses, however, contain or consist entirely of practical work. In those cases, students
performance is assessed per individual or per group (group work), or on the basis of continuous
assessment.
The (usually written) exams at the end of term are scheduled centrally for all groups together; many
practical tests are held in the course of the semester.
During the academic year there are four (central) exam periods for incoming study-abroad students:
Fall 2014 / semester 1: Final exam period in December 2014, centrally organized
Fall 2014 / semester 1: Resit exam period in January 2015, centrally organized
Spring 2015 / semester 2: Final exam period in end of May/June 2015, centrally organized
Spring 2015 / semester 2: Resit exam period in July 2015, centrally organized
A “central” type of exam (or resit) means that the exam is organised by the school, not by a lecturer
individually.
Resit Exams
Students are allowed to do resit exams, only if they have failed the first exam. Generally speaking,
there is a resit opportunity at the end of each semester. The resit exam period is part of the official
academic year. Please note: Our Fall semester ends officially on 26 January 2015. We strongly
advise all students to stay in Amsterdam until these end dates! We will not adjust exam
schedules nor organise any resit opportunities at distance for students who leave earlier.
Exam Clashes
Due to the fact that the courses we offer are part of different programmes and minors, exam clashes
may occur. If this is the case, please contact the International Centre: [email protected].
If you have any questions, please contact us at [email protected].
Let us conclude by wishing you - also on behalf of the programme managers, head of the international
department, International Centre and teaching staff - a very instructive, successful and pleasant period
at the School of Economics and Management.
With kind regards,
Hogeschool van Amsterdam
Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences
School of Economics and Management
International Centre
[email protected]
Ps:
Each semester, we (International Centre) organize a ‘meet and greet’ for the incoming exchange
students, approximately a month after the lectures have started.
This gives the students the opportunity to first get acclimatized in Amsterdam and to get to know their
new study environment. During this ‘meet and greet’, the International Centre will explain more about
the study system at the HvA and about the Dutch grading system. We strongly advise all student to be
present during this meeting. After the presentation, students can ask questions and will meet the staff
members of the International Centre and the Student Counsellor. And of course, we will invite the
students for a drink and some real Dutch ‘bitterballen’.
11
Part B Minor Descriptions (minor = fixed programme of 30 ECTS)
A minor is a one-semester (= 30 ECTS) study programme which consists of a number of pre-selected
courses focusing on a specific field of study. It is not necessary to pass the full minor programme to
obtain grades for the courses.
The following minors (fixed programmes of 30 ECTS) are available in Fall 2014:
To enroll in one of the minors, please contact the International Centre: [email protected] as
it is not possible to enroll for minors with the Time Table Assembly. In your e-mail, please give
your full name (first name and family name) and the name of your home university. And -of
course- give the name of the minor which you would like to follow in Fall 2014.
Full title PAGE
Business English (part time) 12
Business of Sports & Events 13
Business Process Integration Finance 16
Business Process Integration Management 16
City Marketing in Europe (location @ Wibautstraat!) 18
Cross Cultural Business Skills (full time) 21
Cross Cultural Business Skills (part time) 23
Entrepreneurship 25
International Financial Management 37
International Marketing Management (only 5 places available) 39
Latin American Business Studies 46
12
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Business English (Part time program)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Randy Bundel, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To
enroll, you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to
[email protected]. Please mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of
the minor and the International Centre will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the
minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor,
you are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
The Business English course is intended for those motivated Bachelor students who wish to
improve their practical language skills primarily within the field of Business English. The course
focuses on improving both fluency and listening skills in business situations, such as meetings
and telephone conversations, as well as in improving writing skills for business: letters, memos,
faxes and e-mail.
Students will prepare for Cambridge BEC Higher Certificate which will show that they have
learned English to an advanced level and that they can use it in a business context. The
Business English Certificates (BEC) are internationally recognized qualifications that show
employers your skills for using English in the workplace.
This minor relates to the international orientation of Amsterdam. More than ever, a good
knowledge of English is needed to succeed in international business and commerce. If students
can show they have relevant language skills, they'll have a greater advantage in the jobs
market and much greater flexibility if they want to work either abroad or in ICT, creative or
financial services industries in Amsterdam.
The minor consists of the following courses:
? BEC Higher Reading, 6 ects. Examination: written test
? BEC Higher Writing, 6 ects. Examination: written test
? BEC Higher Listening, 6 ects. Examination: written test
? BEC Higher Speaking, 6 ects. Examination: assessment
? English Language Portfolio, 6 ects. Examination: assessment
Minimum participants: 10 / Maximum participants: 60
Department who's offering this minor: Commerciële Economie (part-time)
Study guide number Tuesday and Thursday: 6000MBEN11
Study guide number Saturday: 6000MBEZ11
Semester: 1 (Fall 2014) and 2 (Spring 2015)
Open to: The Business English minor is meant for part-time students of all programmes, inside
and outside the HvA. The Business English course is intended for those students who already
have a reasonable grasp of English.
Requirements:
The entry level of the course is English at (upper) intermediate level (European B1 – B2 level).
The students' actual level of English will be determined by the Diagnostic Placement test at the
start of the course.
13
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Business of Sports and Events (BSE)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mrs. Tinie Denton-Beeker, e-mail: [email protected].
Enrollment
Eleven places in the minor Business of Sports and Events are reserved for incoming study-
abroad students. Students will be expected having followed a general marketing and/or business
study course for at least 2 years as part of their programme. We prefer native English speaking
students or near native.
If you are not native or near-native but very confident of your level of English feel welcome as
well. Last but not least we expect students to have a passion for sports and/or events.
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To
enroll, you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to
[email protected]. Please mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of
the minor and the International Centre will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the
minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor,
you are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
The focus of this minor is on sports- and entertainment events on a global scale. Students will be
offered more profound marketing- and business skills in the specialized industry of sports- and
entertainment. After successful completion of this minor students will have gained insight and
knowledge regarding current developments, the stakeholders and different business models.
Students will also have gained insight in the close relation between sport and entertainment. Last
but not least students will have gained some working experience related to marketing- and/or
business skills in the sport and/or entertainment market.
During the course of the minor students will be offered: lectures, guest-lectures, workshops, visits
to events and/or venues and the opportunity to work on ‘real’ assignments as junior consultants
in a team for ‘real’ clients. Some visits will be paid to ‘local’ events and/or venues as part of the
formal programme (compulsory to attend, costs will be very limited).
A three-day educational trip to London is organized with an exciting program
(at your expense but costs will be limited).
The lecturers involved in this minor use their professional network to secure challenging
assignments and interesting guest-lectures.
The minor Business of Sports and Events programme consists of:
70% : lectures guest-lectures, workshops, assignments (individual & group), work on
portfolios/papers.
30% : practical project activities as junior consultant in a team.
This minor represents 30 ECTS, contact-hours = 240, study-effort = 840 hours (30x28).
Modules
1. International Sport Events & Live Music & Dance Events (SEIVH2MN04) ----- 7 ECTS
International Sport Events (part I)
This subject focuses on large global sports events. First of all we will look into the impact and
14
large scale of these events which attract millions of dollars in sponsor-revenues, huge attention
from media but are also of great importance to society. Why do these cities or countries put
themselves forward as candidate, what is the process from bidding, preparation, execution to
leaving a ‘lasting legacy’? What is the economic and social importance for the upcoming markets
such as the BRIC countries?
Live Music & Dance Events (part II)
This subject demonstrates the characteristics and structure of the live music- as well as dance
sector. The lectures are structured around the following themes:
1. Why do we like events? Sociological and psychological background of the striking popularity and
commercial success of events.
2. Mapping the international scene. The industry, the role and position of agencies and artists,
changing business models and some traits of touring.
3. The business of Dance. This class offers a treaty of scope and depth of dance as a field of
enterprise in the Netherlands.
4. Branding, Identity & Event Marketing. Profiling some of the major Dutch events by alternately
switching from birds-eye-view to looking-glass-view.
Testing: 2 written tests (part I&II) & assessment of papers and portfolio (part I&II).
2. Sponsoring & Media (SPMVH2MN03) ----- 7 ECTS
This subject focuses on current developments in sport sponsoring and media and its
stakeholders. What are the revenue-shares of gate revenues, sponsorship, media rights and
merchandising? What are the differences between geographic markets? What is the impact of
regulators? We will have a closer look at the revenues of top football (soccer) clubs. How do
research agencies contribute to the accountability of investments in sponsorships? Furthermore
attention will be given to the close relation between technology, media and telecommunications.
What are the predictions for these sectors for the current year? What are the different cross-
media-types and different media-buying models used by broadcasters and specifically sport-
programming. What is the difference between the business model of a traditional broadcaster
and a broadcaster offering content business-to-business to distributors. Online search-, video-
and display-advertising are hot topics as well as mobile advertising. Finally, the elements of a
TV-format will be explained and applied in a practical group-assignment.
Testing: 2 written tests & assessment of assignments & portfolio.
3. Sustainability in Sport Events (SUSVH2MN01) ----- 3 ECTS
Sustainability is a topic of managerial interest. Companies have to be more and more aware and
act according to social responsibility. Respect for the environment, human rights and social
topics are part of strategic decisions. This development is also very much present at major
sports- and music events, ‘leaving a lasting legacy’. The main focus of this subject is giving an
insight in developments organizing sustainable events.
Testing: 1 written test & assessment of assignments & portfolio.
4. Project (PRCVS4MN01) ----- 10 ECTS
This subject of the minor allows students to gain experience as a junior consultant. The
knowledge and insights of the theoretical subjects that will be offered during the course of the
minor can be put into practice in the project. Involved lecturers use their international,
professional network to find relevant and challenging assignments for the project Studency
activity. Students will gain experience working in an international team. Each team will consist of
5/6 students and will be responsible for the whole process from brief to delivering a final advisory
report as well as presentation to the client.
Testing: assessment; delivery of final advisory report, final presentation to client, a group- and
individual assessment will all be part of establishing grade for this subject. The findings of the
client will also be taken into account.
15
.
5. Financial & Project Management (FPMVH2MN01) ----- 3 ECTS
This subject of the minor allows students to strengthen their financial- and project management
skills.
Topics in this course: financial aspects of a business plan of an international operating sport
organization, pricing and cost calculations of a sport consultancy agency, financing an
international sport event, project management of events. Students will be able to strengthen their
entrepreneurial skills and apply these skills straight away in their project activities (PRC).
Testing: 1 written test.
Back to minor overview
16
Minor (Fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Business Process Integration:
BPI Finance and BPI Management
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Maarten, e-mail: [email protected] and/or Mr. Dirk-Jan Schenk, e-mail:
[email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To
enroll, you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected].
Please mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the
International Centre will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
Business Process Simulation serves as a basis for the other modules of the minor. In Business
Process Simulation you become an employee of a virtual company with up to 75 employees. For
example, you become a purchasing officer, Personnel Manager, or marketing employee. You take
this function over from your predecessor, because the companies are continued each semester
with a personnel change of almost 100%. The Management, consisting of about three lecturers,
remains. Each semester new projects are set up, in response to the current situation at
comparable companies. The companies at present being simulated are a production company
(SME), a chemical company, a bank and insurance company, a packaging and distribution
company, and a sport consultancy. If there is sufficient student intake, new companies will be set
up, such as a health centre / private hospital, a building company, and/or an airline company. The
BPI minor gives students a deeper understanding of integrated business processes, making use of
an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. The emphasis is on the integration of logistical,
financial, and personnel processes. The course focuses on the analysis of business situations, the
thinking up of alternative solutions, and the making of well-founded choices, in which use must be
made of current information from practice, for example, from visits to comparable companies.
The minor contains a main course plus 2 Specialization courses:
(a student needs to select one of the two specializations: BPI Management or BPI Finance):
BPI Management
? Business Process Simulation, 10 ECTS/ Examination: report & presentation
? Human Resource Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Project Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Supply Chain Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
? Strategic Enterprise Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
BPI Finance
? Business Process Simulation, 10 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
? Human Resource Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Project Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Controlling and Accounting, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
? Treasury Management Project, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
17
Minimum participants: 25 / Maximum participants: 200
Department who's offering this minor: International Business and Management Studies (IBMS)
Study guide number: 6000BPME13 (management eng) en 6000BPFE13 (finance eng)
This minor is offered in semester 1 (Fall 2014) and semester 2 (Spring 2015)
Allowed for all students.
Requirements: students with a pass for their Propedeuse exam and with 40ECs in their post
propedeutic phase.
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
:
Back to minor overview
18
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
City Marketing in Europe (IVCF)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mrs. Núria Arbonés Aran, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll. To enroll, please contact
the International Centre: [email protected] and they will enroll you for all courses that are
part of the minor.
IMPORTANT!
? It is not possible to do individual courses from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
? The venue of this minor is the school building at the ‘Jan Bommerhuis’- Wibautstraat 80-86!
? Extra costs: Participants should keep in mind that they will need to make a personal
contribution of around 400 Euros for travel costs.
? Students should check themselves before enrollment for this minor, if they need a visa to
travel to Barcelona (Spain) and Paris (France). If they need a visa, the visa must be arranged
by the student him/herself!
Minor Title City Marketing in Europe IVCF
Faculty Urban Management Program Co-production Faculty Sociology &Law,
Economics &Management and Technology
Available Semester Semester 1 (Fall) 2014-2015
Open to: 3
rd
and 4
th
year students of any discipline (with interest in urban
environments, internationalization, and with Marketing & Communication
Casuistry):
-Marketing
-Communication
-MIM
-European Studies
-Business & Public
Administration
-Commercial Economics
-Interactive Media
- Entrepreneurship
-Sociology
-Psychology
-Urban Studies
What the minor has to offer: This minor is unique opportunity for students because it involves
cooperation with partner educational institutions and trendsetting
initiatives from today’s business world in Amsterdam, Barcelona and
Paris.
Location: The Minor takes place in various locations in the city of Amsterdam with
additional visits to Barcelona and Paris
Contact Information: Núria Arbonés Aran
Email: [email protected]
Minimum Required Students: 30
Maximum Required Students: 60
Overview and Learning Aims:
In the minor City Marketing in Europe (CME) you will gain insight and understanding of the various
methods cities take advantage of in order to advantageously position themselves. In today’s world the
city must compete to remain (or become) attractive to tourists, businesses and even its own
inhabitants. Just a few of the factors that are important for a city’s sustainability and popularity are:
fashion, architecture, culture, nightlife, sport and tourism. You can expect to come in contact with
19
topics like these when taking part in this minor. Part one of the minor is an introduction to city
marketing that not only takes place in the classroom, but in the city itself in the form of excursions and
visits to the businesses involved in making the city what it is. In part two you begin a project where;
together with an international team, lecturers, and business clients, you will learn how to successfully
setup and complete an international marketing & communication assignment.
What’s in it for You?
What you do makes a difference! You will be part of a marketing project from the problem definition in
the beginning, through to the analysis and design, to the presentation of your solution and the
evaluation at the end. This is one of the only programmes in Europe where you can get hands-on
experience with international collaboration, Educational expertise from three educational institutions
and come face to face with the business world when doing field work both here in Amsterdam and
abroad in Paris and Barcelona.
Successful completion of the CME Minor results in more than just a passing grade. Students who
complete the minor will also receive an internationally recognized certificate of completion. In addition
to this, at the end of the minor students also have the chance to apply for certification of English
proficiency through the Cambridge Certificate in Advanced English Programme.
In conclusion, you will receive experience in international collaboration, learn to overcome cultural
barriers, and you will build your own professional network though contact with leading experts in the
field of business and marketing.
Topics of Study:
Thorough intensive exchange and collaboration with the Universitat de Barcelona and L’Ecole de
Commerce et Gestion Internationale in Paris each year, new themes in the realm of city marketing are
selected. In the coming 2014-2015 study year you can expect to approach topics such as ‘urban
lifestyles’ and ‘place image and reputation’ and “connectivity. We also work together with businesses
and other institutions that have a direct influence on how the city is experienced. In previous editions
of the minor, city promoters such as Barcelona Activa and I Amsterdam have been involved.
Moreover, organisations that you might not immediately associate with city marketing have been able
to take advantage of the research, analysis and advice produced in the CME minor. Some examples
are: city developer, Bureau Zuidas, airline, Vueling, and online jukebox, 22Tracks.
Method of Study:
The CME course is designed to give students an up-close-and-personal look at City Marketing.
Students will literally take part in “the city” in order to develop insight and understanding of questions
central to the study, such as: What is city marketing? How does one brand a city? Is it possible to
brand a city? When does city marketing work and when does it not?
City Marketing is by nature a multidisciplinary study and the CME minor offers a variety of modules,
information, tools and mentoring to help you synthesize and construct successful marketing advice.
The CME minor offers:
? General knowledge and insight relating to the European City
? Knowledge of City Marketing, places Brand, Identity and Reputation
? Concrete and relevant knowledge of Amsterdam, Barcelona and Paris
? Various marketing perspectives (*every branch and each case requires a different approach)
? Concrete and relevant knowledge of participating organisations
? Research techniques and methods
? The use of visual media
? Language, inter-cultural communication and international collaboration
The minor begins with a general introduction to city marketing. During the introductory phase students
are lead on tours by city experts to discuss various initiatives and campaigns. The second phase
begins with the marketing kick-off. Here, all of the various organisations involved come together and
students form international teams.
20
In the following period students have seminars and workshops approximately three days per week to
bring student up to speed on the different tools and skills necessary to complete the project. Among
other thing students learn: How do you make a functional work-plan? How do you work at a
distance? What techniques and methods can be used and are required? How do you implement and
adapt interactive media to the project? And finally, language skills are practised and sharpened.
Halfway through the second phase there will be a midterm evaluation in Barcelona/Paris together with
your international team, the professional clients and the educative staff. We close the semester with
the final presentations for the clients with all parties, including those from Barcelona and Paris here, in
Amsterdam.
Instructional materials:
Project material and information will be published on the CME digital learning environment specially
developed for this course.
Assessment:
- Primary assessment: Marketing and publicity project: the international group assignment.
- Secondary assessment: Report: an individual assignment about city marketing.
- Tertiary assessments: Milestone evaluations & discussions, interim assignments to keep you
on course, English exam.
Educators:
Lecturers and guest speakers share their expertise in order to assist and lead you along the path
towards a successful final product.
Back to minor overview
21
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Cross Cultural Business Skills (CCBS) / Full time program
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Sander Schroevers, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
The skies nowadays are full of airplanes carrying professionals, travelling to do business abroad.
They need to be able to communicate effectively in cross-cultural settings or build trust with culturally
diverse partners. This minor aims to prepare participants for such practical business situations. We
offer weekly full evening classes on specific cultures (e.g. Korea, France, Brazil, China, Russia etc.
etc.). Often in the form of seminars at the Chamber of Commerce, or university symposia open to
externals. Frequently international guest-lecturers present their home cultures. Other weekly lessons
are around generic global skills, such as negotiating, corresponding, meeting, recruiting etc. During
this course all students will co-write (on their own names) a real management book in English (for
sale, ISBN number etc.). Specific writing classes are scheduled to help you write in native English.
There are also weekly fact-finding clinics to support your research. We also survey and interview
professionals from around the world. All further information can be obtained from the site
www.minorccbs.com, which offers a wealth of information, our own books, video's, podcasts, e-
books as well as flyers in many different languages. This site plays a pivotal role during the CCBS
elective course. Besides the work things, we also organize many social events and even country-
parties, which you will like for sure. We welcome exchange students and students from other Dutch
institutes.
The minor contains the following courses (total of 30 ECTS):
? International Survey 3 ECTS - Examination: international questionnaire, database proof
? Country Profile 6 ECTS - Examination: written country analysis
? Elective Assignment 1 ECTS - Examination: native feedback assignment
? Mid Term Exam 3 ECTS - Examination: written knowledge test
? Skill Focus 2 ECTS - Examination: digital report
? Stream Task 4 ECTS - Examination: assessment
? Theoretical Framework 5 ECTS - Examination: written web texts
? Final Exam 6 ECTS - Examination: written knowledge test
Minimum participants: 25
Maximum participants: 90
Department who's offering this minor: Commerciële Economie
Study guide number: 6000MCBS11 for the fulltime minor
Open to students of all programs.
22
Requirements: According to the study programme exam regulation: a student must have obtained
her/his propaedeutics, with a minimum of forty (40) credits (EC’s). There are no specific entry
requirements for this minor.
Back to minor overview
23
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Cross Cultural Business Skills (CCBS) / Part time program
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Sander Schroevers, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
The skies nowadays are full of airplanes carrying professionals, travelling to do business abroad.
They need to be able to communicate effectively in cross-cultural settings or build trust with culturally
diverse partners. This minor aims to prepare participants for such practical business situations. We
offer weekly full evening classes on specific cultures (e.g. Korea, France, Brazil, China, Russia etc.
etc.). Often in the form of seminars at the Chamber of Commerce, or university symposia open to
externals. Frequently international guest-lecturers present their home cultures. Other weekly lessons
are around generic global skills, such as negotiating, corresponding, meeting, recruiting etc. During
this course all students will co-write (on their own names) a real management book in English (for
sale, ISBN number etc.). Specific writing classes are scheduled to help you write in native English.
There are also weekly fact-finding clinics to support your research. We also survey and interview
professionals from around the world. All further information can be obtained from the site
www.minorccbs.com, which offers a wealth of information, our own books, video's, podcasts, e-
books as well as flyers in many different languages. This site plays a pivotal role during the CCBS
elective course. Besides the work things, we also organize many social events and even country-
parties, which you will like for sure. We welcome exchange students and students from other Dutch
institutes.
The minor contains the following courses:
International Survey 3 ECTS Examination: International questionnaire, database
proof
Country profile 6 ECTS Examination: written country analysis
Elective (feedback web article) 1 ECTS Examination: native feedback assignment
Mid term exam 3 ECTS Examination: written knowledge test
Written lab 2 ECTS Examination: digital report
Stream task 4 ECTS Examination: Assessment
Theoretical framework 5 ECTS Examination: written web texts
Final exam 6 ECTS Examination: written knowledge test
* Most stream tasks already
24
? Minimum participants: 10
Maximum participants: 60
? Department who's offering this minor; Commerciële Economie part-time
? Study guide number: 6000MCSD11
? The aimed for audiences have an international professional scope, and wish to develop
applied global skills.
The target group(s) of this minor are: HvA part-time and (allowed) HvA-duaal students.
We also focus on Kies-Op-Maat part-time students.
? Requirements: According to the study programme exam regulation: a student must have
obtained her/his propaedeutics, with a minimum of forty (40) credits (EC’s). There are no
specific entry requirements for this minor.
The intake-level is equal to European Qualifications Framework (EQF) level 5, Associate
Degree level as well as the specific Croho-final level of the core-phase of a course.
Back to minor overview
25
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Entrepreneurship
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible coordinator:
Mrs. Anoesjka Timmermans, e-mail: [email protected].
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll, you
need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please mention your
name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre will enroll you for all
modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you are
obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Part 1 – Minor description
1 Brief description of objectives and content of the minor.
The mission of the Minor Entrepreneurship is to inspire students to create, or identify, and exploit their
own chances and opportunities in business and (self)employment, by training, stimulating, facilitating
and appreciating Entrepreneurial knowledge, skills and behaviour.
Companies find themselves continually redefining their markets, restructuring their operations, and
modifying their business models as a result of the high rate of market dynamism that characterizes the
21
st
century. Whereas companies used to be able to rely on relatively sustainable competitive
advantages in the 20
th
century, the rules of the competitive game are changing so fast, that the
previously considered advantages are fleeting, with many consequences to going concern and
staffing. Risk averseness by means of short-term labour contracting leads to a higher demand for a
flexible work-force and hence demands more entrepreneurial skills, spotting or creating (self)
employment opportunities.
What keeps leading companies in the lead is constant innovation.
Innovation is a trait of creative, entrepreneurial people, in equally creative and entrepreneurial
companies, regardless whether start up enterprises or multinational corporations. Entrepreneurship
refers to daring to see beyond what others have seen, risking to invest in something that might look
ludicrous at the time of developing or could potentially disrupt the current business of the company or
even entire industry.
The minor Entrepreneurship centres around the concept of creating innovative business concepts with
various stakeholders, the so called co-creative business development methods, that provide
opportunities to start or grow a business.
You will discover what (corporate) entrepreneurship entails and what makes entrepreneurial
companies stand out in the competitive arena of today’s global business environment.
During the minor you will experiment with various methods to create a new business, from concept
development to business modelling and formal business planning, using traditional and new methods
for business creation and development, such as Design Thinking, Ideation, Effectuation and the
Business Model Generation Canvas.
26
The entrepreneurial process of generating and implementing new business ideas will be placed in the
contexts of small- and medium sized enterprises as well as international and multinational
corporations. All with an international scope.
As entrepreneurship, large or small scale, encompasses multiple disciplines, all are included in the
minor. From a Management & Organizational perspective you will be familiarized with the complexities
of human functioning in organizations and how to apply the toolkit that theory offers to deal with these
complex problems. Since starting a new venture, whether within an existing corporate structure or a
new business, requires and earns money, the module Financial Management will provide you with the
proper tools for financial planning and analysis of new business activities.
No business exists without customers, the most important stakeholders in any venture. To prepare you
for the toughest situations in the commercial process, you will gain real-time experience with preparing
and conducting commercial negotiations in the module Sales Negotiation.
Finally no new business can be created without understanding how innovation comes to being. The
modules contemporary entrepreneurship and entrepreneurial skills and behaviour will help you find
and develop your own personal creative and innovative competencies, identify means and
opportunities to make creation and innovation happen in small-, medium sized and large corporate
environments and implement methods to sustain innovation in corporate settings.
2 Description of the relation of the minor to the HvA-profile
The minor is connected with the HvA-profile in the three areas of:
(a) Industry and entrepreneurship in a metropolitan context: by preparing students for
entrepreneurship as a start-up entrepreneur or as a corporate entrepreneur.
(b) Entrepreneurship, innovation and the knowledge economy: The minor Entrepreneurship
centres around the concept of creating innovative business concepts with various stakeholders, the so
called co-creative business development methods, that provide opportunities to start or grow a
business.
3 Description of the relation of the minor to the Professional/Programme profile
The minor is both of a profound or broad nature and as well exceeds the final terms of the Programme
profile. The department of Commercial Economics of the School of Economics and Management, has
mentioned in her vision document six main themes, of which the minor CCBS covers two: (i)
international ambition and (ii) multicultural. This document also includes two vision paragraphs on (1)
International Orientation and (2) an integration of theory and practice. The first speaks for itself when
called Cross-Cultural Business Skills, but also the second concept is fully integrated in this minor
through the engaging concept of so-called self-regulating streams. In fact the European Association of
International Education has invited us to present our approach on her yearly conference. Also both the
educational magazine Transfer (Nuffic), as well as Folia Magazine has reported three times each on it.
For the rest the minor CCBS relates to the Dutch Higher Education end qualifications of the IBMS/IBL
programme. The subjects furthermore relate to the Dublin descriptors through the IBMS/IBL end
qualifications.
4 Minor learning plan scheme for block 1 and block 2
Below is an overview of the educational units of the minor, the followed teaching and testing method,
the number of
27
EC’s and the number of contact hours measured per individual course programme part (i.e.: not per
week).
But the total average number of contact hours per week is 16 hrs.
B L O C K - 1
Minor Course programme
parts
Teaching method Testing / assignment type EC
s
contact hours *
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Project
Written exam &
Project Report
1,8
Contemporary
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Workshops Assignments 1,8
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
1,8
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Assignments
Written exam
1.8
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment, Assignment &
Oral Exam
1,8
Financial Management Lecture
Paragraph in BP
Written exam
1,8
B L O C K - 2
Minor Course programme
parts
Teaching method Testing / assignment type EC
s
contact hours *
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Project
Written exam &
Project Report
5 1,8
Contemporary
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Workshops Assignments 5 1,8
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
5 1,8
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Assignments
Written exam
5 1.8
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment, Assignment &
Oral Exam
5 1,8
Financial Management Lecture Paragraph in BP
Written exam
5 1,8
* Contact hours are based on a 20 week lesson programme. Because this minor runs on a
semester basis, the actual contact hours per week are 1,8 = 3 on semester basis.
Teaching method
This minor uses a mix of several learning methods: (i) classic lecturing (due to large amount of
students necessary often), (ii) out-of-school activities: we try to put students into contact with the
outside (professional) world, we therefore have designed activities that urge students to take up
contact with professionals around the world, such interviewing stakeholders in various industries, by
28
organising in-school business contests for which students and representatives from the business
world will be invited, (iii) workshops and (iv) role-play.
Attendance is not so much compulsory, as the delivering of good results is. Students are obliged to
hand in peer-review forms on team and task performance for all other team students.
5 Target group
This minor is meant for: HvA (Hogeschool van Amsterdam) full-time students, KOM (Kies-Op-Maat)
full-time students, HvA-exchange students, self-registered (paying) students from foreign non-HvA
partner institutes.
6 Entry requirements
Specific entry requirements for this minor include successful completion of at least one module in the
subjects marketing, management and organization and financial management. According to the study
programme exam regulation, article 3.10 under 5: a student must have obtained her/his propaedeutic,
as well as a minimum of forty (40) credits (EC’s) from the main phase of the study. Therefore the
intake-level is equal to European Qualifications Framework (EQF) level 5, Associate Degree level.
Furthermore the intake-level is equal to the specific Croho-final level of the core-phase of a course.
7 Facilities and other conditions
Students need to be able to log-in to the course website, and be able to co-author the different
writings. For some elective assignments a Skype or VoIP recording connection is required. The course
itself needs a rather large class room (60 plus) for workshop and crowd-coaching purposes.
8 Results (see also attachment 1)
The final result of the minor is the weighted average of the results of all the separate educational units.
The tests described in the matrix above, are only passed when the result is 5.5 or higher.
When assignments are carried out by duo’s or groups, the result will be a group mark, for the
participating
individual students a peer-assessment needs to be filed by all team members.
Part 2 - Mini-OER
Minor Cross-Cultural Business Skills, Mini-OER 2014 – 2015
This Mini-OER contains essential basic information of the minor that is used for educational logistics
and internal and external communication. The information provided grants students educational rights
regarding this minor.
B L O C K - 1
SIS-code Educational unit Teaching Method Testing & assessment EC’s contact hrs
p/w*
6410ESP
_TS
6410ESP
_PJ
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture
Project
Written exam
Project Report
1,8
6410CEP
_AS
Contemporary Entrepreneurship Lecture & Workshops Assignments 1,8
6410CIE
_AS
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
1,8
6410MEI
_AS
6410MEI
_TS
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Papers 1,8
29
Written exam
6410ESB
_T1
6410ESB
_T2
6410ESB
_T3
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment
Assignments
Oral Exam
1,8
6410FIM
_AS
6410FIM
_TS
Financial Management Lecture
Paragraph in BP
Written exam
1,8
Total ECs and contact hours: 10,8
B L O C K - 2
SIS-code Educational unit Teaching Method Testing & assessment EC’s contact hrs
p/w*
6410ESP
_TS
6410ESP
_PJ
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture
Project
Written exam
Project Report
2
3
1,8
6410CEP
_AS
Contemporary Entrepreneurship Lecture & Workshops Assignments 5 1,8
6410CIE
_AS
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
1
4
1,8
6410MEI
_AS
6410MEI
_TS
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Papers
Written exam
3
2
1,8
6410ESB
_T1
6410ESB
_T2
6410ESB
_T3
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment
Assignments
Oral Exam
2
1,5
1,5
1,8
6410FIM
_AS
6410FIM
_TS
Financial Management Lecture
Paragraph in BP
Written exam
2
3
1,8
Total ECs and contact hours: 30 10,8
* Hours based on the 20 week system. Since the minor will be taught in a semester system, the hours
correspond to: 1,8=3 hrs/week during a full semester; 0,9= 3 hrs/week during half a semester
Part 3 – Set of educational units of the minor
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship
2 SIS code To be assigned (6410ESP)
3 Teacher(s) Fonkert/Song
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
30
7 Objective(s) to learn about the entrepreneurial process and to draw up -on
paper- a commercially viable and financially well documented
Business Plan with a variety of scenarios, for stakeholders such
as potential venture (seed) capital financiers (and/or bankers).
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Explain Entrepreneurship and discuss its importance
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Carry out a feasibility study
? Conduct an industry and market analysis
? Construct a variety of effective business scenarios
? Justify the proper ethical and legal foundation
? Justify a (new) venture’s financial needs, potential, strength and
viability
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Starting a company
• Recognizing Opportunities vs Creating Markets
• Blue Ocean Strategy
• Conducting a market & industry analysis
• Conducting a market feasibility analysis
• Marketing strategy & planning
• Constructing business scenarios
• Translating a business model into a business plan
• Preparing the proper ethical and legal foundation
• Assessing financial needs, potential, strength and viability
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Entrepreneurship; Successfully Launching new ventures by
Bruce R. Barringer & R. Duane Ireland, Pearson Education
Limited (2012), ISBN-13: 978-0-27-376140-2
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class assignments
• Project coaching
• Guest lectures & Company visits
12 Testing method(s)
? Business Concept Start document (5%)
? Feasibility Analysis report (15%)
? Business Plan including various Business Scenario’s (40%)
? Written exam (40%)
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Feasibility Study Report: 1 EC (incl. start doc)
Business Plan: 2 EC
Written Exam 2 EC
14 Specialties Theme specialists
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Contemporary Entrepreneurship
2 SIS code To be assigned (suggestion: 6410CEP)
3 Teacher(s) Vacant (Requested: Harriet Robijn)
31
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) Learning about Entrepreneurship through experimentation,
building upon the growing body of knowledge and insights in
successful entrepreneurship from the business and academic
world.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Create ideas, concepts and business models to exploit these
opportunities
? Explain how the various aspect of business models relate to one
another
? Generate novel, appropriate & viable business concepts
? Examine the influence and possibilities of the infinity of
computing, the rise of digital information and digital fabrication
on the entrepreneurship
? Develop web-based entrepreneurial activities (crowd-funding,
crowd-sourcing, open-sourcing, social media, etc) and
instruments to measure their success
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• The need for innovation – Trends & Developments
• Lean Start Up
• Idea Generation
• Design Thinking
• Effectuation
• Creating Value
• Business Model Canvas
• The Cloud, the Crowd and the Enterprise
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Digital syllabus provided by lecturer(s) on DLWO
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Field Assignments
• Guest lectures & Company visits
12 Testing method(s)
Professional products & Research paper
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
6 continuous assessment assignments: 1 EC
1 project assignment: 1EC
1 Research paper: 1EC
14 Specialties Guided Experience Based Learning
32
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Cases in Entrepreneurship
2 SIS code To be assigned – (Suggestion: 6410CIE)
3 Teacher(s) Vacant (requested: Anoesjka Timmermans – Timan)
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) Critically discussing the success and fail factors in
Entrepreneurship, using research papers, Harvard business
review articles and case studies
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Justify one’s opinion based on proper academic research
? Debate vision and viewpoint based on proper academic
research
? Discuss the concept of value creation and its essence for a
business to be successful
? Criticize the elements that make a successful entrepreneurial
manager)
? Criticize the elements in a corporate culture that increase
entrepreneurial & innovative success
? Explain what organizations require when adopting open
innovation
? Discuss the benefits and disadvantages of the various
innovation models
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Business Basics
• Market Entry
• Blue Ocean Strategies
• Failure
• Personal leadership & creativity in (corporate) entrepreneurship
• The entrepreneurial manager
• Culture & Leadership in entrepreneurial MNCs
• Innovation models (closed versus open) and their impact on
organizational structure, culture, systems and management style
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Digital syllabus provided by lecturer(s) on DLWO including
research papers, Harvard Business Review articles and Case
studies
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class debates
• Self study, research & writing
12 Testing method(s)
4 Debates (20%),
4 Research papers (80%)
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
4 Debates: 1 EC
4 Research papers: 4EC
14 Specialities Critically assessing and discussing research and business
publications and practices to broaden information acceptance
33
and appreciation and deepen understanding of themes covered.
Course in parallel with Cases in Entrepreneurship at UvA Minor
Entrepreneurship
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Managing Entrepreneurship and Innovation
2 SIS code 6400MEI_13
3 Teacher(s) J.A.A. Kloosterman, D.M. Bout
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) To create alignment between the organizational and managerial
building blocks of a company and its business strategy.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Assess the effectiveness of a business strategy in view of a
companies environment using contemporary theoretical
frameworks.
? Identify the necessary key resources and capabilities to execute
a business strategy
? Describe an organization structure with its departmentalization
approach, coordination mechanisms and job design principles.
? Align an organization structure with a companies’ strategy.
? Explain employee motivation based on contemporary motivation
theories.
? Identify leadership styles and leadership activities.
? Align leadership style with business strategy and employee
motivation.
? Create the right circumstances for effective teamwork.
? Align organizational culture with the organization’s strategy,
structure and leadership style
? Manage the process of change in an organization or department
based on contemporary insights.
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• The learning objectives are introduced through a combination of
lectures and self-study. Students write a number of papers that
show their mastery of the learning objectives.
•
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Study materials consist of presentations and hand-outs in addition
to articles used for the papers.
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Guest lectures?
12 Testing method(s)
papers and written central exam
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
4 papers and 1 written exam; 5 EC’s
34
14 Specialities
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Entrepreneurial Skills & Behaviour
2 SIS code To be assigned (Suggestion: 6410ESB)
3 Teacher(s) F. Zwarthoed & M. van Buschbach
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) train and develop students’ entrepreneurial, commercial and
negotiating skills, and adopt a flexible approach to cultural
differences.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Sum up and describe the basic strategies, tactics and concepts
of negotiation theory
? Recognize strategies and tactics used by himself and others
? Validate the effect of cultural variables on communication
? Identify and demonstrate various communication and
negotiation styles
? Construct a plan of approach for a sales, procurement or
negotiation session
? Demonstrate a professional approach during the negotiating
process
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Primary Research Skills
• Commercial Skills (Sales & Procurement)
• Networking
• Negotiating
• Cross Cultural negotiation
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Intercultural Business Communication
Chaney/Martin Prentice Hall 1995
ISBN 131860097
It’s a deal
Steele/Murphy Russill McGraw-Hill 1989
ISNB 007709229-5
Intercultural Sales Negotiations
various HES 2009
11 Teaching method(s)
Lecture and workshop with role-play sessions
35
12 Testing method(s)
Assessments (Role Play and participation)
Written Reports
Oral Exam
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Assessment:
(80% Attendance, 3-6 pop-quizzes, 3-6 preparation plans) 2EC
3 Written reports 1,5EC
1 Oral exam 1,5EC
14 Specialties Role Play
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Financial Management
2 SIS code 6410FIM
3 Teacher(s) S. Ackah
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) In the course, the student will learn the competencies needed to
develop the financial statements of a business plan and judge the
attractiveness of investing in a business. Furthermore, the student
will be able to make sound investment-, working capital
management-, cash management- and financing decisions based
on contemporary financial theories.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Prepare and analyse financial statements, including
the cash flow statement of a company and financial models
? Use ratio-analysis and financial modelling to optimize
the working capital and cash position of a company
? Calculate present values and future values of simple
and complex cash-flows such as annuities
? Calculate the return and present and future values of
an investment
? Calculate the risk and return of an investment portfolio
? Calculate an investment’s required return using the
capital asset-pricing model and the security market line.
? Describe the features of bonds, stocks and other
financing items, calculate their future and present value and their
expected return
? Prepare a financial plan for a company including
optimization of working capital, financing structure and liquidity
forecast.
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Besides a general introduction to financial
management this course will give students a profound knowledge
of financial statements (Historical and Pro Forma), including the
meaning and usefulness of cash flow. Financial forecasting and
modelling will be a major part of this course.
• Several aspects of shareholder value will be
discussed like, bond and stock valuation and the concept of time
value of money. An important issue in financial management is the
aspect of risk and its relationship with return. We will introduce
36
quantitative tools and methods to measure risk and return.
• Capital investments are analysed by using the net
present cash flow concept. A very important determinant of this
analysis is the cost of capital. Students will get an inside in how
the cost of capital is calculated and what its usage is in modern
financial management.
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Principles of Managerial Finance - Global Edition
L.J. Gitman, C.J. Zutter
Pearson, 13
th
edition
ISBN: 978-0-273-75428-2
11 Teaching method(s)
Lecture & self study
12 Testing method(s)
Financial Paragraph in Business Plan (MENT)
Written Exam
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Financial Paragraph in Business Plan (MENT only) 2EC
Written Exam (MENT only) 3 EC
Attachment 1 From main text HvA – Teaching and Examination Regulations (OER) 2013-2014
Article 5.3 Dates and frequency of examinations and tests
1. Two opportunities to take the foundation year examinations and tests will be offered every academic year,
with the first immediately following the conclusion of the unit of study concerned.
2. Two opportunities to take the post-foundation year examinations and tests will be offered every academic
year, with one of these immediately following the conclusion of the unit of study concerned.
3. etc …
Article 5.9 Standardisation of assessments
1. Examination or test assessment results are expressed as one of the following:
2. a grade on a scale of 1 to 10, with a maximum of one decimal point, in which grade 1 or 1.0 stands for ‘very
poor’, grade 2 for ‘poor’, grade 3 for ‘highly unsatisfactory/very unsatisfactory’, grade 4 for ‘unsatisfactory’,
grade 5 for ‘slightly unsatisfactory/fair/weak’, grade 6 for ‘satisfactory’, grade 7 for ‘quite satisfactory’,
grade 8 for ‘good’, grade 9 for ‘very good’ and grade 10 for ‘outstanding/excellent’.
3. The final assessment of a minor is expressed as a whole grade on a scale of 1 to 10, in which grade 1 or 1.0
stands for ‘very poor’, grade 2 for ‘poor’, grade 3 for ‘highly unsatisfactory/very unsatisfactory’, grade 4 for
‘unsatisfactory’, grade 5 for ‘slightly unsatisfactory/fair/weak’, grade 6 for ‘satisfactory’, grade 7 for ‘quite
satisfactory’, grade 8 for ‘good’, grade 9 for ‘very good’ and grade 10 for ‘outstanding/excellent’.
4. Rounding off to arrive at a whole number or a number with one decimal point must be performed in
accordance with the ordinary rules of calculation. Accordingly, decimals higher than 500 are rounded
upward and decimals lower than 500 are rounded downward.
5. A student’s assessment result is deemed satisfactory where the grade allocated is 5.5 or higher.
6. If a student resits a test, the highest of the grades obtained determines whether he/she has met
the requirements.
Back to minor overview
37
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
International Financial Management (MINFI)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Ralf Jacobs, e-mail: [email protected].
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
The mission of the international department is to provide the world of international business with
graduates who can recognize and manage the implications of global change; who are international
professionals with an interdisciplinary view on business problems, and who can analyze and solve
those problems successfully. More specifically, the IBMS-department concentrates on international
market development.
From the mission statement above it follows that, though important, students should not necessarily
focus exclusively on the marketing and management implications of international market
development. Different market entry strategies will also have a serious impact on the finance
function of a company.
The minor international financial management aims to provide students with an in-depth knowledge
into this field of international finance.
Students who have followed the minor international financial management should be well equipped
to enter as a junior international financial specialist, the professional field. Positions that can be
thought of are: assistant financial or management accountant, business analyst, investment analyst
or junior controller. This minor might further be useful for students who wish to enter a management
trainee program. As such this minor can also be recommended to students from other streams who
would like to specialize in international finance.
The minor contains the following subjects:
? Financial Risk Management = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam + assignment
? Investment analysis (Stock Valuation) = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam + investment report
? Corporate Finance 2 = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam
? International Financial Accounting = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam + assignment
? Management Accounting Techniques = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam
? Current Issues in Finance = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam, presentation
Department who's offering this minor: International Business and Management Studies (IBMS)
38
Minimum participants: not applicable / Maximum participants: 60
Catalogue number: 6000MINF14
This minor will be offered in: Semester 1 (Fall 2014) and Semester 2 (Spring 2015)
This minor is open to: IBS students, students from other HvA programmes, exchange students,
students from other institutes of higher education.
Requirements: the minimum requirements stated by OER-rules apply: the student must have
obtained his Propedeuse plus 40 ECs in his postpropedeutic phase.
For international exchange students: basic knowledge of finance and accounting.
Back to minor overview
39
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
International Marketing Management
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
manager Mr. R.J.W. Janssen ([email protected]) directly.
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you are
obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Part 1 – Minor description
1 Brief description of objectives and content of the minor.
The minor International Marketing (MINTM) is to further the students’ knowledge of the marketing
function. It is broadly based on the Marketing tool-kit, the four P’s. The module Strategic Marketing
focuses on the development of a market/marketing strategy for a give company/industry. Based on
analysis of both internal and external environment and identification of core competences and key
success factors. Marketing in Action focus on product, the introduction of a product in a new market,
and it’s positioning.
Consumer behaviour involves an understanding of the segments in the target market, an analysis of
customer motivations and an exploration of unmet needs. To understand consumer choice, it is
imperative to understand the motivations that drive consumer decision making. The more so, because
the global marketplace is continuously in motion, generating a tremendous amount of challenges. In this
dynamic world, consumer attitudes, values, or lifestyles are likely to be dynamic as well. A proper
understanding of consumers is needed to continuously meet their needs, wants, and, and to outperform
the competition in doing so. Demand chain managements focuses on creating a competitive advantage
through the management of the supply chain and distribution (Place). This is an area of business which
is becoming more and more important to businesses, as for many firms, products are standardized and
it is only through the service offering that a company can differentiate.
Marketing communication is concerned with the detailed construction of a communications platform in
traditional media. The module Internet marketing focuses wholly on the possibilities opened to
companies through the internet. This module offers students a step-by-step approach from online
strategy to highly interactive implementation.
2 Description of the relation of the minor to the HvA-profile
1
The programme centres on further developing marketing skills in an international business context. This ties in
with the HvA-profile “5.2 Industrie en ondernemerschap in grootstedelijke context “
3 Description of the relation of the minor to the Professional/Programme profile
1
Creating tomorrow
40
The rationale for the International Marketing Minor for 3rd year students is derived from the final
qualifications of IBMS (Framework Competencies IBMS). This is preceded by three marketing
management courses in the foundation and second year where focus lies on marketing in relationship to
other areas of business operations. The rationale for the minor is to provide the specialist tools
necessary to develop and execute a Marketing Plan to reach specific targets
4 Minor learning plan scheme for block 1 and block 2
See part 2: minor OER and part 3: set of educational units
5 Target group
(International) students in their 3rd year of studies
6 Entry requirements
Students will need to have passed their Propedeutic exam and will need to have at least 40 ECTS
from their second year as well as successful completion of the MM1, MM2 and MAP courses or the
equivalent of 9 ECTS in marketing. For some educational units of the minor additional prerequisites
apply (see following table) Prerequisites for entering the minor international marketing:
ECTS ECTS ECTS
Equivalent in basic marketing Management and
organisation
cross cultural management
Strategic Market
management
9
Marketing in Action 9 3
Consumer behaviour 9
Supply chain
management
9 3
Marketing
communication
9
3
Internet marketing 9
7 Facilities and other conditions
Lecture rooms with beamers, audio facilities and with sufficient seats to accommodate students for both
lectures and case studies.
8 Results (See also attachment 1)
Students will need to have passed all educational units with a sufficient grade in order to achieve the
30ects of the minor.
The final result of the minor is the weighted average of the results of all the separate educational units
with the provision that each educational unit needs to be passed with at least a 5.5
Part 2 - Minor-OER
Block 1 & 2
SIS code Educational unit teaching method Testing & assessment
Number of
ECs
number of contact
hours per week
6100STM_10 Strategic Marketing Lectures, case studies
Assignment & written
exam
5 3
6100MIA_10 Marketing in Action
Assignments, guest
lecture
Assignment(s) 5 2
6100COB_14 Consumer Behaviour Lectures, case studies Assignment & written 5 3
41
exam
6100DCM_10
Demand Chain
Management
Lectures, case studies Written exam 5
3
6100INM_10 Internet Marketing Lectures, workshop
Assignment & written
exam
5 3
6100MKC_10
Marketing
Communication
Lectures, assignments
Assignment & written
exam
5 3
Sum total 30 17
Part 3 – Set of educational units of the minor
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Strategic Market Management
2 SIS code 6100STM_10, STMVH2MN02
3 Teacher(s) R.J.W. Janssen
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3
7 Objective(s) Develop effective marketing strategies in order to stay relevant and at
the same time explore growth options
8 Learning goals
1 Define and recognize elements associated with internal /external
analysis
2 Point out relevant marketing strategies
3 Explain the strategic marketing planning process
4 Deduct outcomes of external and internal analysis in order to develop
strategic marketing options in an international context
5 Justify the choice for a particular marketing strategy
6 Design a strategic international marketing plan.
7 Participate in the group process of designing a strategic marketing
solution.
8 Present a comprehensive marketing strategy
9 Content
Students will focus on the core concepts of strategic market
management:
- Definition of a business strategy
- Role of strategic market management
- External analysis
- Customer analysis
- Competitor analysis
- Market/submarket analysis
- Environmental analysis and strategic uncertainty
Internal company analysis
Moving from analysis to strategy
- Searching for sustainable advantages
- Growth strategies
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
Strategic Market Management - Global Edition, D. Aaker, D.
McLoughlin, John Wiley & Sons, 2010, isbn 978-0-470-68975-2
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, cases studies, project group assignment and meetings
12 Testing method(s)
Knowledge test, project assignment
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 tests: project assignment (application of theory), written test (theory)
5 ects can be achieved only after successfully passing both test
14 Specialities None specific
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Marketing in Action
2 SIS code 6100MIA_10
3 Teacher(s) Max Kohnstamm
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
2
7 Objective(s) Learn to develop effective solutions to solve marketing problems by the
usage of online and offline marketing instruments.
8 Learning goals
Student is able:
? to apply the relevant theoretical concepts to solve a marketing related
‘real life’ problem
42
? to understand a marketing briefing
? to analyse the briefing in depth by studying the ‘reasons behind’ the
problem mentioned in the briefing
? propose creative solutions to solve the problem as described in the
briefing
? to present the solutions in a convincing way
9 Content
Students should use all the relevant theory from other (marketing)
courses
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
No extra literature. Usage of relevant marketing literature is needed to
solve the marketing problem mentioned above (under 8)
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, guest lectures, briefing by companies, working in teams to
solve a marketing problem. Coaching during group work.
12 Testing method(s)
Students receive a briefing from a company X: we have problem Y on
market Z. Goal is to solve the problem and present the solution to
company X.
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 project assignments: 2,5 EC’s per assignment
14 Specialities Each term two companies will brief the students about a specific
marketing problem the company is facing on a specific market.
Problems are always based on ‘real life situation’ in a specific market.
Representatives of the company will form the jury to judge the
proposed solutions of the best teams in a class.
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Demand Chain Management
2 SIS code 6100DCM_10
3 Teacher(s) Lucinda J. Unger
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5 ECTS
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
7 Objective(s)
8 Learning goals
? The student can construct a supply chain map to illustrate flaws and
critical paths
? The student can calculate lead times and the effect on total costs at
retail level
? The student can identify efficiency gains in manufacturing using various
supply chain models
? The student can forecast future sales using various forecasting models
? The student can estimate risk associated with various models
9 Content
? Measuring logistics and supply chain performance Lead time Supply
chain responsiveness
? Lead-time management
? Risk management
? The synchronous supply chain
? Replenishment models
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory Logistics and Supply Chain Management, 4
th
edition,
M. Christopher
ISBN-13: 978-0-273-68176-2
11 Teaching method(s)
The course is interactive; key points are elaborated on in a short
lecture followed with class discussions. Short case studies are
also prepared in class to give a more hands on learning
experience.
In addition to lectures student groups will prepare 3 case studies
of which two are presented in class. The third case is a written
report. Case presentations account for 20% of class time.
12 Testing method(s)
Open book exam testing application of theory and 3case presentations
to test understanding of theories
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 case presentations: 1 ECs
1 written case: 0.5ECs
1 written test: 3.5 ECs
14 Specialities None
43
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Internet Marketing
2 SIS code 6100INM_10
3 Teacher(s) Simeona Petkova
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3
7 Objective(s) The course Internet Marketing covers different aspects of how
organizations use internet for marketing, describing emerging models
for developing strategy, and using case studies of companies that use
internet marketing in their strategy.
Students will play an active role throughout the course. They are
encouraged to explore and experiment with digital marketing, by
working on a variety of assignments, and expected to present their
findings in pair and group presentations. The course will culminate with
group presentations of a creative and fully developed online presence
for a specific case study.
8 Learning goals
Explain the key differences between internet marketing and traditional
marketing.
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Consumer Behaviour
2 SIS code 6100COB_14
3 Teacher(s) Erik Kostelijk
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5 ECTS
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
7 Objective(s)
8 Learning goals
? Understand and analyze the social and psychological processes that drive
consumer behaviour
? apply theoretical models of consumer behaviour to create an insight in the
decision making processes of the target audience of an organization
? design a market study to measure the drivers behind consumer choice
? create an understanding of consumer behaviour based on real-life market
data
? use information about consumer behaviour to determine market
opportunities, and to use this information as input for strategic decision
making
? create and implement a marketing strategy that takes the consumer choice
behaviour of the target audience into account
? analyze and act on consumer behaviour in an international context
9 Content
During this semester module students will focus on the core concepts
of consumer behaviour:
? The psychology behind consumer decision making
? The influence of culture on consumer behaviour
? Consumer segmentation
? Benefits, and life-styles
? Perception and learning theory
? Values and motivations
? Attitudes
? Life-styles
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
M. Solomon,G. Bamossy, S. Askegaard, M. K. Hogg,
"Consumer behaviour: A European perspective" (2010),
Pearson Education, 5th ed, ISBN 978-0-273-77272-9
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, cases studies, project group assignment and meetings
12 Testing method(s)
Knowledge test, assignment
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 tests: assignment (application of theory), written test (theory)
5 ects can be achieved only after successfully passing both test
14 Specialities None
44
Demonstrate the significance of micro and macro-environment factors
in the internet marketing strategy of an organization.
Examine the opportunities and threats on a company level arising from
the internet.
Interpret the elements of the marketing mix in an online context.
Assess the difference in communications characteristics between
digital and traditional media.
Describe the main success factors in managing a digital campaign.
Develop the fundamentals of an internet marketing strategy for a
specific case study.
9 Content
Digital marketing fundamentals; Digital Strategy Development, Digital
Marketing implementation and practice; The internet and the marketing
mix, Relationship Marketing, Campaign planning and evaluation.
10
Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
Chaffey D., Ellis-Chadwick F. (2012) “Digital Marketing, Strategy,
Implementation and Practice”, Person Education Limited.
11
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, project work, blogging on ECRC.nl
12
Testing method(s)
De – central open book test, Digital Marketing Project and Presentation
13
Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
1 De-central test 2.5 ECs
2 Project and presentation 2.5ECs
14 Specialities
Blogging, guest lecturers; the projects are related to real world
problems that IBS, HvA, and companies face.
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Marketing Communication
2 SIS code 6100MKC_10
3 Teacher(s) S.I. Petkova
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3
7 Objective(s) In this course students will learn the essence of marketing
communications and its role within the marketing function for an
organization. They will also learn how to set up an international
marketing communications plan for an international product or service
in a country or region.
Special attention is given to cross cultural marketing communications
and international advertising specifically. National culture poses a
challenge for global marketing companies and agencies in the choice
between standardized and localized approach in marketing
communications, which would be examined in more detail throughout
the course.
8 Learning goals
Explain various aspects of integrated marketing communications such
as communication objectives, strategy and communication mix
Summarise different elements of successful branding and global
branding
Discuss the influence of culture on international communication
Put together a sound SWOT analysis of the company and decide which
outcomes of the SWOT give direction to a new Marketing
Communications Plan
Develop a Marketing Communications Plan
Review existing international advertising campaigns and programs
Produce a briefing for a marketing communications agency
Demonstrate ability to work well in a team on the assignments related
to the subject (deadlines, individual contribution and cooperation)
9 Content Integrated marketing communications, advertising tools, media tools,
45
promotional tools, ethics, regulation and evaluation
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
Book: Kenneth E. Clow, Donald E. Baack, Integrated Advertising,
Promotion and Marketing Communications Global Edition, 5/E, ISBN:
9780273753285
Lecture Slides and any in class material
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, group work
12 Testing method(s)
Test Central (50%); Marketing Communications Plan Report (35 %);
Presentations of the MKC plan for feedback (5 %); Advertising
Assignment (10%)
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
1 project
1 assignment
1 central test
14 Specialities Guest Lecture
Attachment 1 Testing and Assessment
As regards Testing and Assessment the following OER 2014-2015 rules apply to the minor
Article 3.11 Minor
1. A minor consists of 30 credits and forms part of the main phase. In order to take a minor, students must
successfully complete the foundation year examination and obtain at least 40 credits during the main
phase. In order to take part in the 3-year VWO track, students must successfully complete the
foundation year examination and obtain at least 30 credits during the main phase.
Article 5.3 Dates and frequency
1. At least two opportunities will be offered during each academic year on which to complete a unit of study of
the foundation year or the main phase.
Article 5.8 Standardisation of assessments
1. The assessment of an examination or partial examination for all units of study in the study programme will be
expressed in a grade on a scale from 1 through 10, with no more than one decimal point, whereby the grade 1 or
1.0 stands for ‘very poor’, grade 2 for ‘poor’, grade 3 for ‘highly unsatisfactory/very unsatisfactory’, grade 4 for
‘unsatisfactory’, grade 5 for ‘slightly unsatisfactory/fair/weak’, grade 6 for ‘satisfactory’, grade 7 for ‘quite
satisfactory’, grade 8 for ‘good’, grade 9 for ‘very good’ and grade 10 for ‘outstanding/excellent’.
2. A student’s assessment result is deemed satisfactory where the grade allocated is 5.5 or higher. Rounding off to
arrive at a whole number or a number with one decimal point must be performed in accordance with the
ordinary rules of calculation. Accordingly, decimals higher than 500… are rounded upward and decimals lower
than 500… are rounded downward.
3. As regards the completion of a unit of study, the highest awarded (rounded) grade will serve to determine whether
or not the student has met his/her obligations.
Article 5.10 Allocation of credits
4. A minor is deemed to have been passed and the corresponding 30 credits are allocated if the student has passed all
the units of study comprising the minor.
Back to minor overview
46
Minor (fixed program of 30 Ects)
Latin American Business Studies (LABS)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mrs. Rosa María Vila Roches; e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
Given the significant Latin American relevance in the new global developments, we offer this
comprehensive program combining economics, marketing, politics, (business) culture and
developments viewed within a historical perspective to complete the international vision of our
future graduates. Because of the orientation of the IBM-department towards international market
development, the future managers are offered a solid basis to understand, interpret and act upon
information related to this part of the world.
This minor enhances the students' business skills and personal performance, and it broadens their
horizon and knowledge of the world.
All subjects in this minor are in English.
The minor contains the following courses:
? Globalization and Latin America = 3 ECTS / Examination: final research paper
? Modern History & Society in Latin America = 5 ECTS / Examination: continuous assessment
? Political Economy of Latin America = 5 ECTS / Examination: research report, presentation and
written exam
? Sales Negotiations & Culture = 5 ECTS / Examination: continuous assessment, written
assignment, negotiation
? Economics of Emerging Markets = 4 ECTS / Examination: written exam + report/presentation
? Latin American Business Culture = 3 ECTS / Examination: continuous assessment
Choose one of these subjects:
? International Business Law = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam
? Marketing in Latin America = 5 ECTS / Examination: report work main case
Minimum participants: not applicable
47
Maximum participants: 30
Department who's offering this minor: International Business and Management Studies (IBMS)
Catalogue number: 6000LAB_13
This minor will be offered in Semester 1 and 2 (Fall 2014 and Spring 2015)
Open to students, from the IBMS programme, other HvA programmes, other (IBMS) programmes in
the Netherlands and exchange students from other countries.
Requirements:
The student needs to have passed his first year and additionally have obtained a minimum of 40
ECTS in his Second Year of studies. Required command of the English language should be at CEF
level B-2.
Back to minor overview
48
Part C Sports for Exchange Students
Students can find more relevant information on Intranet (intra.dem.hva.nl) on sport timetable and
www.hessport.nl andhttp://www.usc.uva.nl/algemeen/index_en.php
49
Part D Modules:
Please note that the modules offered in this course book for exchange students are from 7 different
study programmes / departments:
1. IBL : (International Business and Languages)
2. IBMS: (International Business and Management Studies)
3. IFM: (International Financial Management)
4. IM: (International Management)
5. TMA: (Trade Management for Asia)
6. ‘minor’: this module is part of a minor programme
7. LD: Language Department
We strongly recommend all our exchange students to make a selection of modules of one and
the same ‘department’ (IBMS /IBL / IFM/ IM /TMA /minor /LD), to prevent exam clashes and
other difficulties!!
Disclaimer
This Course book for Exchange students is designed to provide as much useful information as
possible for those participating in the exchange programme of the School of Economics and
Management. The International Centre (IC) makes every effort to keep this Course book as up to date
and as comprehensive as possible. However, the IC and the School of Economics and Management
disclaims all responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the Course book and disclaims all
responsibility for any consequences whatsoever resulting from the use of the Course book. Also, the
IC does not provide any assurance that use of this Course book will ensure that exchange students
answer the exams correctly or pass the exam.
50
Business Ethics
Course code 5000BET_08
Description Business Ethics
ECTS 5
Module area Intercultural awareness
Lecturer(s) Ms. Gunning ([email protected])
Language English
1st Ac. Year 2008-09
Applied Ac. Year 2014-15
Study year 3/4
EXAMINATION
# Descripti
on
Catalo
gue
Nbr.
Gradin
g basis
Minimu
m
Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weig
h
1 Group
presentat
ion
Decima
l 1
- presentat
ion
Decentr
al
Not T2-I,
T4
30 50
2 essay Decima
l 1
- Test
digital
Central
Central
T2-I,
H1-I,
T4,
H2
120 50
CONTENT AND TOPICS IN THE COURSE
The course covers ethical aspects of decision making in organizations. The subject will be approached from
philosophical, societal, managerial and marketing viewpoints. After a general introduction of ethics and morality,
several aspects of business ethics will be covered, such as: the role of stakeholders, ethical dilemmas in
international business, ethics as part of company culture and ethics in the seller-buyer relationship (power
positions, advertising business).
The course trains the student in approaching societal and organizational problems and individual decisions from
several stakeholder viewpoints and value systems.
Many ethical dilemmas have an international character; students are from many nationalities and discuss
differences in values as to the topics discussed.
COHERENCE WITH OTHER UNITS OF EDUCATION
Prerequisites
Before being admitted to BET all 60 study credits (EC) of the second year (semester 3 and 4 = H1) must have
been obtained.
Coherence of this course with other courses
51
Business Ethics, Intercultural Communication, Management and Organization, Law, Accounting, basically all
aspects of international business focus on human activities in the company in relationship to its environment,
society and the international community.
LEARNING GOALS
#
Learning goals
The student
Programme’s profile
competencies Level
1 is able to assess and apply ethical aspects of decision
making as citizen, stakeholder, manager or specialist
8.1-2
10.4-5
2
2 has a critical approach as to ethical positions and
behaviour of companies
10.1
11.1-4
final
3 is able to reflect on personal moral behaviour
11.1-2 final
4 approaches an ethical problem according to basic ethical
theories
11.3-4 2
5 implies viewpoints and value systems of stakeholders
before making decisions or giving advice.
11.3-4 2
6 applies ethical norms when selling, marketing, buying or
consuming goods or services.
5.1
6.1
final
METHODS OF WORK AND STUDY HOURS
Work methods
BET classes consist of introductory lectures and group discussions, analysing ethical problems in business life
and searching for solutions based on ethical theories. Basic ethics and various models for analysing will be
discussed.
Compulsory attendance
? The student must attend at least 70% of all classes
? Attendance is compulsory because of team assignments and test 1
? Students without a valid reason for their (over 3) absences will be expelled from further participation in this
course and have to re-do this course in the semester following.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study
? Time allocated per week for contact (classes and/or tests) : 2 hours per week
? Time allocated per week for self-study : 8 hours per week
? Total time = 10 x 14 weeks = 140 hours = 5 EC’s
LITERATURE
52
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Edition ISBN Require
d
Ethics & Business Jeurissen, R. Van Gorcum
2007
9789023243
519
Yes
TEST FORMS AND MATERIALS COVERED IN EACH TEST
Test # Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Group presentation
(report)
presentation 1,2,4,5 PPt’s, cases, notes students
Chapters 1-9
2 essay
Test digital 1-5 Cases, ppt’s, notes student
Chapters 1-9
Assessment criteria and distribution of points (optional*)
? Group presentation (report) (test 1): group mark for content (sufficient use of ethical theories and dept in
problem analysis, valid arguments, logical reasoning for solution).
? Written test (test 2): content (sufficient use of ethical theories and dept in problem analysis, valid arguments,
logical reasoning for solution).
Feedback
Students are given continuous feedback on assignments done either in class or at home. Feedback on the written
test is given on the centrally organised exam review day.
Back to course overview
53
Business Information Systems
Course code: 4000BIS_11
Course Description: Business Information Systems
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Breuer ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weigh
1
Business
Information
Systems
4011BIS_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central
S1T,
S1H
60 25
2
Presentation
4011BIS_T2
D NVT Presentation
Decentral
Not S1T 0 25
3
Project 4011BIS_T3
D NVT Project Decentral
Not S1T 0 25
4
Casus 4011BIS_T4
D NVT Project Decentral
Not S1T 0 25
Contents and topics in the course:
Information Systems and new technology are used to create value for companies and organizations. The
technical developments that affect the financial function are characterized by the continuing computerization of
financial and other business processes, as a result of which applications are increasingly being integrated into
computerized systems. The tracing, analysis and interpretation of the relevant information for decision making is
becoming increasingly important to businesses. International Financial Managers also need sufficient expertise in
the area of information and communication technology, so that they can co-operate with IT experts in arriving at
proposals to organize and improve the provision of information.
This module enables the student to broaden his view on the use of Business Information Systems, in particular for
performance management. How to assess the business value of both proven and state of the art information and
communication technology’s another topic. Change management and sourcing issues will also be studied. A case
to setup a Business Intelligence environment for a international company.
Topics in this course:
Use of Business Information Systems: Performance Management, Business Intelligence Management;
Change management;
Sourcing;
Investigating issues in adopting proven and state of the art information and communication technology;
Setup a Business Intelligence environment for a international company. From an old report and decision system
to a new BI system by creating new KPI’s and design a dashboard. Data warehouse and data marts is given.
Understanding how the process flow of the data will be manage.
54
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites: modules MS1, MS2, and MS3.
The module is part of the research training track as students have to formulate a research question and sub
questions and report on their findings.
Learning goals:
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals: Programme's profile
competencies
Level
1. Formulate and explain the use of modern business solutions
tools in a digital firm and/or large organizations.
PT1 Business functions
CD4 Social &
communicative performance
3
2. Formulate and explain the use of modern Management
Information Systems in a digital firm and/or large
organizations.
PT2 Management
information
PT8 Organizational and
policy
CD4 Social &
communicative performance
3
3. Explain the use of Business Intelligence and Performance
management
PT2 Management
information
CD1 Developmental
orientation
3
4. Create KPI's for a decision making. Research the data for the
design of a Business Intelligence system.
PT1 Business functions
PT2 Management
information
CD1 Developmental
orientation
3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 14
Project, cases and research 100
Self-study 12
Computer lab 14
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
55
Management Information
Systems
1)
Kenneth C. Laudon, Jane P.
Laudon
Prentice
Hall
11 9780136093688 No
1)
or later edition
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Test form Learning
goal#
Material
1 Business Information
Systems
written
exam
1,2 Business Information Systems, Reports written by
students
2 Presentation project 1,2 Project presentation
3 Project project 1,2 Written project report
4 Casus project 3,4 BI business case
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
56
Business Process Simulation
Name Educational unit of the minor Business Process Simulation
SIS code 6100BPSE13
Teacher(s) Mr. Schenk ([email protected]), Mr. Draijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 10
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
5
Objective(s) ERP and Business Processes
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? The student can execute process steps in a ERP system
? The student can carry out business process in a team
and understand the steps before and after his part in the
complete business processes over the departments
? The student can explore new processes and implement
these in a ERP system
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Working with SAP ERP
Execute business processes as a employee in a department
Implement new processes as member of a project group
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Hands-on With SAP ERP and IDES
Documents from the predecessors in the simulation company
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, IT- training, project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Hand in result of work with SAP, oral and written result of
department and project
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 project assignment: 2 * 3 ECs
1 personal result / presentation: 4 ECs
Specialities Business Simulation in ongoing companies with SAP ERP
Back to course overview
57
Controlling and Accounting Project
Course code: 4000CAP_11/6100CAPE13
Course Description: Controlling & Accounting project
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Draijer([email protected]), Mr Van Roosmalen ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Controlling and
Accounting
Project
4011CAP_PJ D NVT Project Decentral Not S1T,
S2T
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
In the Controlling and Accounting Project (CAP) module the student learns about the integration of, logistics,
financial accounting and controlling processes that are integrated and can be carried out within the ERP system
SAP ERp.
The exercises performed in SAP ERP are based on the logistic and financial transactions of a trading company.
The processes are extended with the use of projects, cost centres, profit centres and fixed asset management.
The exercises will give insight into
? Financial Accounting : how it is integrated within logistics and how integration with controlling can be
realized.
? Controlling: implementation of profit centres, cost centres, project, cost centre planning/budgeting,
allocations, actual allocations and variance analyses
? Reporting: operational and management information systems.
The financial results will be analyzed, documented and reported.
Students carry out exercises and answer questions that are given with the exercises.
Coherence with other units of education:
This unit of education is the practical and concluding part of the theory of controlling and accounting were
students can apply their competences in this subject in a ERP environment
Learning goals:
58
No. Learning objective
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1. Develop a cost centre planning PT5 (Management accounting) 3
2. Create and analyze cost and profit centre
reports
PT5 (Management accounting)
CD2 (Professional Performance)
3
3. Analyze fixed assets PT5 (Management accounting)
CD2 (Professional Performance)
3
4. Apply financial streams and reporting PT5 (Management accounting)
CD4 (Social & communicative performance)
3
5. Take initiative CD3 (Business Performance)
6. Work result oriented CD3 (Business Performance)
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 14
Computer lab 63
Assignment(s) 63
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Assignments for CAP
1)
Yes
1)
All assignments are available on-line
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Title Subject matter
1 Written report Controlling and Accounting
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
59
Contemporary Entrepreneurship
Name Educational unit of the minor Contemporary Entrepreneurship
SIS code 6400CEP_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Robijn ([email protected]), Ms. Timmermans
([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) Learning about Entrepreneurship through experimentation,
building upon the growing body of knowledge and insights in
successful entrepreneurship from the business and academic
world.
Learning goals
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various
elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Create, validate and justify ideas, concepts and business
models to exploit these opportunities
? Explain how the various aspect of business models relate
to one another
? Create and justify novel and appropriate business concepts
? Develop and justify an entrepreneurial development path
from starting-point to envisioned future
? Explain the role of corporate management and culture in
stimulating entrepreneurship
? Develop and justify a corporate structure to stimulate
entrepreneurial behaviour.
Content
• The need for innovation – Trends & Developments
• Lean Start Up
• Idea Generation
• Design Thinking
• Effectuation
• Creating Value
• Business Model Canvas
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
(to be ordered at Study Store, HvA FMB)
“Entrepreneurship, An Evidence Based Guide”
Robert A. Baron; 2012
Edward Elgar Publishing, UK
ISBN: 9781-7810-0039-7
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Field Assignments
• Guest lecture(s)
Testing method(s)
Assignments
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
2 team assignments: 1,5 EC
2 group assignments: 1 EC
2 individual research assignments: 2,5 EC
Specialties Guided Experience Based Learning
Pre requisites None
Back to course overview
60
Current Issues in International Business
Course code: 5000CIB_10
Course Description: Current Issues in International Business
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 4
Lecturer(s): Ms. Divito ([email protected]), Ms. Andela ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 CIB Project -
TS
5010CIB_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
Want to be prepared for the future? Have you wondered why theory translates into practice in unexpected ways?
Are you ready for a completely different view on current business issues? This course was created to challenge
your knowledge, to address the social responsibility of business, and to provide a helicopter view of the issues
businesses face. It is designed to open your eyes to the role and impact of international business in our daily
lives. We live in an increasingly global society and business practices in one part of the world have an impact on
the businesses, people and society in other parts of the world. Our global world is becoming more interconnected
and interdependent. Political, legal and social changes have far-reaching consequences, as do the behaviour,
actions and reactions from corporations, institutions, states and individuals. This course takes the theory that
students have learned and encourages them to criticize and debate it. Through assignments, interactive
discussions and lectures students will integrate, expand and reflect on their knowledge and how it relates to
current business events, practices and trends. Emphasis is placed on exploring, interpreting and evaluating
business issues primarily from managerial, environmental, ethical, legal, political and financial perspectives.
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites:
IBMS students are required to have passed all second year subjects and to have completed their placement.
Coherence of this course with other courses:
Current Issues in Business draws on material and theory from all courses within the IBMS curriculum. The course
is intended to integrate the acquired knowledge from previous courses and stimulate critical analysis, evaluation
and thought. The student should have knowledge of important recent events and issues in the (business) world
and should have the required skills to critically analyse these events and issues.
61
Learning goals:
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Summarize and interpret major international trends, events or
developments
I.1 International business
awareness
2
2 Interrelate the impact that international trends or events have on
businesses, the world economy and society
I.1 International business
awareness
3
3 Recognize different concepts used in business ethics VI.7 Ethical Responsibility 3
4 Interpret the implications of ethical and strategic issues on business
operations in international contexts (i.e. political, legal, or economic)
VI.7 Ethical Responsibility
I.1 International Business
Awareness
3
3
5 Distinguish between the ways firms adapt, innovate and compete in
international contexts
I.1 International Business
Awareness
II.3 International Strategic
Vision Development
3
2
6 Combine knowledge and information from various sources into logical
and persuasive arguments
V.4 Business Research
Methods
3
7 Present (in written and oral form) complex information from different
sources
IV.3 Business Communication 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods
Current Issues in Business is an interdisciplinary course in which current issues are viewed from different
perspectives: ethical, financial and managerial. Teaching methods include theory lectures, interactive discussions,
student presentations and documentaries, among others. The course is taught by two different lecturers.
The assignments require students to work in groups and to use various sources and multimedia (e.g. newspaper
and magazine articles, films, documentaries, YouTube) in order to gather information and construct arguments.
The teaching methods will enable students to develop their research, critical thinking, presentation and writing
skills. Students are encouraged to participate in discussions, to argue and defend their positions on issues and to
debate with other students.
Compulsory attendance
Due to the interactive nature of the lectures, discussions and student presentations, attendance and participation
is mandatory. Students may not miss more than the maximum amount of absences allowed by IBS (for 2012-
2013: 20%). Poor attendance and participation will result in a reduction of the final grade. Additionally, group
participation and contribution is also mandatory. Free riders are not tolerated. Students will evaluate their peers in
their group at the end of the semester. For students with low peer evaluation scores, a maximum of one (1) point
may be deducted from the final grade.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study:
- per week for contact (classes and/or tests): 3 hours per week
- per week for self study: 3 hours per week
- per week for group work and meetings: 2 hours per week
62
Literature:
Understanding Business Ethics
Stanwick & Stanwick
2009 Pearson Higher Education 2009
ISBN-13: 9780137129898
Other materials will be made available electronically
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
No
Description Form of
Test
Learning
Goal #
Material Covered
1 Presentations in class and/or assignment(s)
on the chosen topic/assigned topics
Project 1 to 7 As covered in lectures and
specified in assignment instructions
Assessment criteria and distribution of points:
This course is taught by different lecturers and each lecturer provides instructions and assessment criteria
separately. This is distributed to the students at the start of the semester.
Feedback
Feedback on assignments is provided during lectures.
Extra information:
This module will be given by 2 lecturers providing different perspectives on current business issues. For 2014-
2015 the lecturers are Lori DiVito (Management & Economics) and Anne-Sophie Andela (Law & Ethics).
Back to course overview
63
Cases in Entrepreneurship
Name Educational unit of the minor Cases in Entrepreneurship
SIS code 6400CIE_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Robijn ([email protected]), Ms. Timmermans
([email protected]), Ms. Andersen
([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 12 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) Critically discussing the success and fail factors in
Entrepreneurship, using research papers, Harvard business
review articles and case studies
Learning goals
? Justify one’s opinion based on proper academic research
? Debate vision and viewpoint based on proper academic
research
? Discuss the concept of value creation and its essence for a
business to be successful
? Criticize the elements that make a successful
entrepreneur(ial manager)
? Criticize the elements in a corporate culture that increase
entrepreneurial & innovative success
? Explain what organizations require when adopting open
innovation
? Discuss the benefits and disadvantages of the various
innovation models
Content
• What makes an Entrepreneurial Entrepreneur?
• Starting a venture in a global context
• Social Entrepreneurship
• The role of Failure in Success
• The entrepreneurial manager
• Culture & Leadership in entrepreneurial MNCs
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Digital syllabus provided by lecturer(s) on DLWO including
research papers, Harvard Business Review articles and
Case studies
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class debates
• Self study, research & writing
Testing method(s)
4 Debates (20%),
4 Research papers (80%)
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
4 Debates: 1 EC
4 Research papers: 4EC
Specialities Critically assessing and discussing research and business
publications and practices to broaden information acceptance
and appreciation and deepen understanding of themes
covered.
Course in parallel with Cases in Entrepreneurship at UvA
Minor Entrepreneurship
Pre requisites ? Fundamentals in Marketing, Marketing Management 1, or
equivalent
? Management & Organisation 1, or equivalent
Back to course overview
64
Current Issues in Finance
Name Educational unit of the minor Current Issues in Finance
SIS code 5000CIF_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Keijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2
Objective(s) This course offers a broader perspective on the world of finance
and it’s practices
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
Evaluate the ‘mechanics’ of a banks
balance sheet, off-balance sheet
transactions, Special Purpose
Vehicles, securitization.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
2
Evaluate the factual events that
took place before and during the
Subprime Mortgages crisis
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
2
Give arguments for the
risks/weaknesses within financial
regulation.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Give arguments for the strengths
and flaws within monetary- and
fiscal policies conducted by central
banks and governments before and
during Subprime Mortgages Crisis.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Break down of the financial
contagion during the crisis in to
specific elements of financial
innovation.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Give arguments for the changes in
risk aversion due to financial
innovation and the effects of
perverse incentives in run up to the
crisis.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Deduce the causes of some of the
financial events during the crisis to
the capitalistic paradigm and global
financial imbalances
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Give arguments for the academic
and 'popular' causes of the
Subprime Mortgages crisis.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
65
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
This course is about the Subprime Mortgages Crisis .
The financial crisis of 2007 till the present is a crisis triggered by
an insolvent United States banking system. It has resulted in the
collapse of large financial institutions, the bailout of banks by
national governments and downturns in stock markets around the
world. The US housing market has also suffered, resulting in
numerous evictions, foreclosures and prolonged vacancies. It is
considered by many economists to be the worst financial crisis
since the Great Depression of the 1930s. It contributed to the
failure of key businesses, the decline in consumer wealth
estimated in the trillions of U.S. dollars, substantial financial
commitments are incurred by governments, and a significant
decline in economic activity.
The “ second part of the crisis”; the Sovereign Debt Crisis in
Europe will be touched up on lightly. The course mainly focus on
the ‘mechanics’ of the subprime mortgages crisis in the US.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
The Meltdown Years : The Unfolding of the Global Economic
Crisis , Wolfgang Munchau
Teaching method(s)
Lectures
Testing method(s)
Written exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
66
Corporate Finance 2
Name Educational unit of the minor Corporate Finance 2
SIS code 5000CO2_06
Teacher(s) Mr. Keijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) This course mainly focuses on debt and equity issues, workings of
financial markets and a companies capital structure, instead of
working capital management issues of Corporate Finance 1
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
Describe and explain the Time
Value of Money. To identify that
Discounting of Cash Flows
(DCF) is the prime valuation
method within basic finance.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
2
Describe and explain the
working of debt and equity
issues. To identify the pro’s and
con’s of both ways of financing.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
2
Describe and explain stocks
information. To identify that
prices reflect information, not
only fundamentals; Efficient
Market Hypotheses
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
2
To calculate the bond- and stock
prices (via Gordon Growth
Model and Capital Asset Pricing
Model)
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
To identify different forms of risk
and manage this risk by
diversification.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
To calculate the risk and return
of stocks and stock portfolios,
using probability scenarios.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
To calculate the Weighted
Average Cost of Capital
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Corporate finance is the task of providing the funds for a
corporation's activities. The subject generally involves balancing
risk and profitability, while attempting to maximize an entity's
wealth and the value of its stock, and generically entails three
interrelated decisions. In the first, "the investment decision",
management must decide which "projects" (if any) to undertake.
The discipline of capital budgeting is devoted to this question, and
67
may employ standard business valuation techniques. The second,
"the financing decision" relates to how these investments are to be
funded: capital here is provided by shareholders, in the form of
equity (privately or via an initial public offering), creditors, often in
the form of bonds, and the firm's operations (cash flow). Short-
term funding or working capital is mostly provided by banks
extending a line of credit. The balance between these elements
forms the company's capital structure. The third, "the dividend
decision", requires management to determine whether any
inappropriate profit is to be retained for future investment /
operational requirements, or instead to be distributed to
shareholders, and if so in what form.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: European Edition , Hillier
and Clacher
Teaching method(s)
Lectures
Testing method(s)
Written exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
68
Consumer Behaviour
Back to course overview
Name Educational unit of the minor Consumer Behaviour
SIS code 5000COB_14
Teacher(s) Mr. Kostelijk ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5 ECTS
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
Objective(s)
Learning goals
? Understand and analyze the social and psychological
processes that drive consumer behaviour
? apply theoretical models of consumer behaviour to
create an insight in the decision making processes of
the target audience of an organization
? design a market study to measure the drivers behind
consumer choice
? create an understanding of consumer behaviour based
on real-life market data
? use information about consumer behaviour to
determine market opportunities, and to use this
information as input for strategic decision making
? create and implement a marketing strategy that takes
the consumer choice behaviour of the target audience
into account
? analyze and act on consumer behaviour in an
international context
Content
During this semester module students will focus on the core
concepts of consumer behaviour:
? The psychology behind consumer decision making
? The influence of culture on consumer behaviour
? Consumer segmentation
? Benefits, and life-styles
? Perception and learning theory
? Values and motivations
? Attitudes
? Life-styles
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory
M. Solomon,G. Bamossy, S. Askegaard, M. K. Hogg,
"Consumer behaviour: A European perspective" (2010),
Pearson Education, 5th ed, ISBN 978-0-273-77272-9
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, cases studies, project group assignment and meetings
Testing method(s)
Knowledge test, assignment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 tests: assignment (application of theory), written test (theory)
5 ects can be achieved only after successfully passing both test
Specialities None
69
Demand Chain Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Demand Chain Management
SIS code 5000DCM_07
Teacher(s) Ms. Unger ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
Objective(s)
Learning goals
? The student can construct a supply chain map to
illustrate flaws and critical paths
? The student can calculate lead times and the effect on
total costs at retail level
? The student can identify efficiency gains in manufacturing
using various supply chain models
? The student can forecast future sales using various
forecasting models
? The student can estimate risk associated with various
models
Content
? Measuring logistics and supply chain performance Lead
time Supply chain responsiveness
? Lead-time management
? Risk management
? The synchronous supply chain
? Replenishment models
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory
Logistics and Supply Chain Management, 4
th
edition,
M. Christopher
ISBN-13: 978-0-273-68176-2
Teaching method(s)
The course is interactive; key points are elaborated on in a short
lecture followed with class discussions. Short case studies are
also prepared in class to give a more hands on learning
experience.
In addition to lectures student groups will prepare 3 case studies
of which two are presented in class. The third case is a written
report. Case presentations account for 20% of class time.
Testing method(s)
Open book exam testing application of theory and 3case
presentations to test understanding of theories
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 case presentations: 1 ECs
1 written case: 0.5ECs
1 written test: 3.5 ECs
Specialities None
Back to course overview
70
Debating in English
Course code 5000DEE_08
Description Debating in English
ECTS 5
Module area International Communication
Lecturer(s) Ms. Gunning, [email protected]
Language English
1st Ac. Year 2008-09
Applied Ac. Year 2014-15
Study year 3/4
EXAMINATION
# Descripti
on
Catalo
gue
Nbr.
Gradin
g basis
Minimu
m
Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weig
h
1 Group
presentat
ion
Decima
l 1
- presentat
ion
Decentr
al
Not T2-I,
T4
30 100
CONTENT AND TOPICS IN THE COURSE
? Fundamental theory of critical argumentation
? Gathering and analysis of relevant background information (desk research)
? Presentation skills
? Debating: rules, skills
COHERENCE WITH OTHER UNITS OF EDUCATION
Before being admitted to DEE all 60 study credits (EC) of the second year (semester 3 and 4 = H1) must have
been obtained.
Debating skills are communication skills and therefore always part of more general (hbo) professional tasks and
competencies. IBL graduates must be able to do desk research on a specific topic and to analyse the
importance and relevance of the research results. IBL graduates also need to be able to build a correct, strong
argumentation in order to convince business partners of a necessary adjustment in Sales, Marketing, Business or
Communication strategies.
LEARNING GOALS
#
Learning goals
The student
Programme’s profile
competencies Level
1 knows the fundamentals of critical argumentation. 7.1 2
2 knows the principle rules of debating. 7.1 2
71
3 Is able to identify, analyse and evaluate arguments. 7.1 final
4 Is be able to gather and categorise relevant information. 2.1, 4, 7 final
5 Is able to debate according to specific rules. 7.1 (English B2)
8.1,5
9
2
6 Is able to provide an audience-centred and convincing
presentation.
I.3.4
7, 9
final
7 has attained an attitude of critical thinking, considering all
arguments for and against.
10.3.4, 5
11.1, 2, 3
final
METHODS OF WORK AND STUDY HOURS
Work Methods
Basics of critical argumentation will be discussed in introductory lectures. Students participate in debates in
various forms and roles.
Compulsory attendance
? The student must attend at least 70% of all classes
? Attendance is compulsory because of team assignments and test 1
? Students without a valid reason for their (over 3) absences will be expelled from further participation in this
course and have to re-do this course in the semester following.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study
? Time allocated per week for contact (classes and/or tests) : 2 hours per week
? Time allocated per week for self-study : 8 hours per week
LITERATURE
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Edition ISBN Require
d
Critical Thinking Skills Cottrell, S. Palgrave
MacMillan
2011
2nd 9780230285
293
No
TEST FORMS AND MATERIALS COVERED IN EACH TEST
Test # Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Group
presentation
presentation 1-7 PPt’s, cases, notes students
Assessment criteria and distribution of points (optional*)
Group presentation (test 1): group mark for content (sufficient dept in problem analysis, valid arguments, logical
reasoning for solution) = 60%; individual mark for presentation skills = 40%
Feedback
Students are given continuous feedback on oral assignments done in class and prepared at home. Feedback on
the test performance is provided immediately after the test is done.
Back to course overview
72
Development Economics in Asia
Course code: 3000DVE_11
Course Description: Development Economics Asia
Module area: EM-TMA-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Teutelink ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014-2015
Study year: 3
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Written exam 3011DVE_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
C C S1, S2,
S1H, S2H
120 60
2 Report +
presentation
3011DVE_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
D N S1, S2 0 40
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Content and topics in the course:
Development Economics investigates emerging economies. This term was first coined in the early 1980s.
Emerging economies are economies with low to middle per capita income. Such countries constitute
approximately 80% of the global population and represent about 20% of the world's economies. In the end it are
the developments and reforms that take place within countries that define them as being emerging. Next to the
well-known BRIC countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China), there are many small countries across the globe that
deserve this title. Many of the most promising ones can be found in Asia. This module will try to capture emerging
economies from both a theoretical as well as a more practical point of view.
Topics included into this module will include:
• definition of development;
• comparative economic development;
• theories and models underlying growth and development;
• poverty, inequality and development;
• population growth, urbanization and development;
• education, health and development;
• development policymaking;
• rural development;
• the environment and development
The course provides the theoretical backing and case studies that support managers to perform market
intelligence in order to identify opportunities and threats in Asian emerging economies. Subsequently, this market
intelligence can be used to plan and implement import and/or export policy.
73
Coherence with other units of education:
The course Development Economics builds upon the body of knowledge that has been addressed in Economics 1
and Trade Economics Asia. It deepens the students’ understanding of doing business with emerging economies,
which can have markedly different dynamics compared to business with developed nations.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Define how development is being measured both on a one-dimensional and
multi-dimensional basis
2,3, and 4* 3
2 Classify and categorize the development status of developing countries
based upon different measurements.
2,3, and 4 3
3 Link the development status of emerging economies to the various classical
and contemporary models of development.
2,3, and 4 3
4 Measure poverty and inequality as indicators of development. 2,3, and 4 3
5 Identify and describe the common features of financial institutions within
developing countries.
2,3, and 4 3
6 Explain the impact of population growth on development and vice versa. 2,3, and 4 3
7 Recognize and understand migration patterns, national as well as
international, that take place within and between developing and developed
nations.
2,3, and 4 3
8 Point out the impact of development on the environment. 2,3, and 4 3
9 Define the components of human development, and measure the level of
human development within a country.
2,3, and 4 3
10 Formulate a research question and outline a methodology for a research
paper related to development economics.
2,3, and 4 3
11 Report and present the main finding of the research paper. 2,3, and 4 3
*Programme’s profile competency 2: Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
Programme’s profile competency 3: Import and purchase management in Asian countries
Programme’s profile competency 4: Export and outsourcing (management) in Asian countries
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods
Total workload of the course is app. 84 hours. During the semester 2-hour classes will be weekly scheduled. At
the beginning of the semester students will receive a semester planning specifying the contents and homework on
a weekly basis. In discussing the various topics, the lecturer will make use of PowerPoint slides that will be made
available to all students through the T-drive/DLWO. In addition, students will work in teams on a research paper.
During the last 2 or 3 classes of the semester, students will present the main findings of these research papers.
74
Compulsory attendance
Compulsory attendance (>80%) is required since active participation during classes is necessary. Students not
meeting the attendance requirement will be delisted from the course.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study
Weekly lecturer hours: 2.0 hours per week or 28 hours in total
Preparation of a research report: 2.5 hours per week or 35 hours in total
Self-study and regular homework: 1.5 hours per week or 21 hours in total
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Economic
Development
Michael P. Todaro, Stephen C.
Smith
Addison
Wesley
2011 latest 9781408284476 Yes
Testing:
Test forms and materials covered in each test
Test Description Form of Test Learning
goal #
Material covered
1 Written exam Written exam 1 through 9 Book Todaro/Smith chapters 1 through 10 + 15. In addition,
students should study all information on the T-drive/DLWO
as posted under code DVE.
2 Research
paper
Research paper +
presentation
10 and 11 Application of materials under test 1 + additional sources
based on the research topic.
Assessment criteria and distribution of points (optional*)
Both tests will be graded on a scale 1 through 10. In grading the research paper, specific attention will be paid to
the originality of the topic chosen and whether students are capable of specifying a clear research
question/hypothesis and ditto methodology. The presentation will count for 10% of test 2 grade.
Feedback
In an early stage, students get a chance to hand in their research proposal and will receive feedback upon this.
After doing their presentation students will receive extensive feedback on both their paper and presentation.
Students will receive the exam and solutions to their written exam. The lecturer will provide all students with the
opportunity to review their exam work individually.
Extra information:
Exchange students should not follow DVE and ECM (from the IBMS programme) together as they are largely
identical.
Back to course overview
75
E-commerce
Course code: 4000ECE_11
Course Description: E-commerce
Module area: EM-TMA-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Van den Thillart ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014-2015
Study year: 4
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Assignment 4011ECE_AS D NVT Assessment D N S1, S2 0 100
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Contents and topics in the course:
This course focuses on the recent developments in the e-commerce field. Students will learn about the following: -
e-commerce - social media - online marketing, SEO - web analytics - multichannel strategy
Literature: variety of readings relevant for the discussed topics. References will be provided during the course.
E-commerce is highly relevant for modern marketer/business person. The course will be helpful for the
professional life of IBS graduates. It is critical to know and understand how companies can use online medium for
business, sales, promotion, networking, success measurement. Also, students should apply this knowledge in the
final thesis.
Coherence with other units of education:
E-commerce is linked to the subject Sales in developing an online marketing strategy. Also, it is relevant for
writing Bachelor thesis.
Prerequisites:
Completed marketing courses
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1 Compare the use of social media for business
purposes in the Netherlands and other
countries
PC 2. Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
PC 3. Import & purchase management in Asian
countries
PC 4. Export & outsourcing (management) in Asian
3
76
countries
PC 8. Consultancy
2 Discuss the recent developments in e-
commerce field
PC 2. Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
PC 3. Import & purchase management in Asian
countries
PC 4. Export & outsourcing (management) in Asian
countries
3
3 Develop an online marketing strategy for a
given company
PC 2. Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
PC 3. Import & purchase management in Asian
countries
PC 4. Export & outsourcing (management) in Asian
countries
2, 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Teaching method: Tutorial.
The workload of this module is 3 credits. The course will be held only in the first block of the semester.
Time allocated per week for tutorial: 3 hours per week (21 hours in total)
Time allocated per week for self-study: 3 hours per week(21 hours in total)
Time allocated for assignments: 42 hours per semester
Open assessment:
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Form of test Learning
goal #
Material Covered
1 Compare the use of social media
for business purposes in the
Netherlands and other countries
Assignment:
The students will present their findings.
The product is a presentations of the
research findings. 40% of the final
grade
1 Literature on
Social Media
(articles)
2 Discuss the recent developments
in e-commerce field
Presentation:
E-commerce business news
presentation. 20% of the final grade.
2 Business press
3 Develop an online marketing
strategy for a given company
Assignment:
The product is: an online marketing
strategy. 40% of the final grade
3 Literature on
online marketing
tools (articles)
Back to course overview
77
Economics of Emerging Markets
Course code: 5000ECM_11
Course Description: Econ. of Emerging Markets/development
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 4
Lecturer(s): Mr. Resing ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 written exam 5011ECM_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 60
2 Report +
presentation
5011ECM_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 40
Contents and topics in the course:
The term emerging markets was first coined in the early 1980s. Emerging economies are economies with low to
middle per capita income. Such countries constitute approximately 80% of the global population and represent
about 20% of the world's economies. In the end it are the developments and reforms that take place within
countries that define them as being emerging. Next to the well-known BRIC (Brazil, Russia, India, China), there
are many small countries across the globe that deserve this title. This module will try to capture emerging
economies from both a theoretical as well as a more practical point of view. Topics included into this module will
include:
ng.
In addition, during case analysis, the above-mentioned topics will be elaborated. In a number of case studies
specific attention will be paid to the development of Latin American countries. The module is linked to l.1
(international business awareness) of the national framework IBMS competencies.
Coherence with other units of education:
Economics of Emerging Markets is a 4 EC course, part of the Latin American Business Studies minor. The
module can further be selected as an elective within the major. Next to a firm body of knowledge in the field of
development economics, students will work on several case studies, some of them with an explicit focus on the
development status of Latin American countries. Next to a coherence with the other modules within this minor,
78
economics of emerging markets has a link to the second year IBMS modules international economics & business,
and international money & business.
Learning goals:
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Define how development is being measured both on a one-dimensional
and multi-dimensional basis
l.1 International Business
awareness
1,2
2 Classify and categorize the development status of developing countries
based upon different measurements.
l.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
1,2
1,2
3 Link the development status of emerging economies to the various
classical and contemporary models of development.
l.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
1,2
1,2
4 Measure poverty and inequality as indicators of development. l.1International Business
awareness
1,2
5 Identify and describe the common features of financial institutions within
developing countries.
l.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
1,2
1,2
6 Explain the impact of population growth on development and vice versa. l.1International Business
awareness
1,2
7 Recognize and understand migration patterns, national as well as
international, that take place within and between developing and
developed nations.
l.1International Business
awareness
2,3
8 Point out the impact of development on environment. l.1International Business
awareness
2
9 Define the components of human development, and measure the level of
human development within a country.
I.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
2
1,2,3
10 Formulate a research question and outline a methodology for a research
paper related to development economics.
l.1 International Business
Awareness
IV.2 Cooperation
V.4 Business research
methods
3
1,2,3
2
11 Report and present the main finding of the research paper. I.1 International Business
Awareness
IV.2 Cooperation
V.4 Business research
methods
II. 2 Intercultural
competence
1,2,3
2,3
3
1,2,3
Methods of work and study hours:
79
Total workload of the course is app. 112 hours. During the semester3 hour classes will be weekly scheduled. At
the beginning of the semester students will receive a semester planning specifying the contents and homework on
a weekly basis. More specifically, each week students will be required to prepare a case study linked to the topic
at hand. In discussing the various topics, the lecturer will make use of power points that will be made available to
all students through the T-drive. In addition, students will work in teams on a research paper. During the last 3
classes of the semester, students will present their main findings of these research papers.
Compulsory attendance (> 80%) is required since active participation during classes is necessary. Students not
meeting the attendance requirement will be delisted from the course.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Economic
Development
Michael P. Todaro & Stephen C.
Smith
Addison
Wesley
2011 11th 978-1-4082-
8447-6
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Form of Test Learning
goal #
Material covered
1 Written exam Written exam 1 through 9 Book Todaro/Smith chapters 1 through 10 + 15. In addition,
students should study all information on the T-drive as
posted under code ECM.
2 Research
paper
Research paper +
presentation
10 and 11 Application of materials under test 1 + additional sources
based on the research topic.
Both tests will be graded on a scale 1 through 10. In grading the research paper, specific attention will be paid to
the originality of the topic chosen and whether students are capable of specifying a clear research
question/hypothesis and ditto methodology. In an early stage, students get a chance to hand in their research
paper and will receive feedback upon this. After doing their presentation students will receive extensive feedback
on both their paper and presentation. The presentation will count for 20% of test 2 grade.
Students will receive the exam and solutions to their written exam. The lecturer will provide all students with the
opportunity to review their exam work individually.
Extra information:
This module should not be chosen together with the module DVE from the TMA/IM programme, since there are
significant overlaps. It is compulsory to bring the book of Todaro/Smith to class.
Back to course overview
80
Entrepreneurial Finance
Please note that this course may appear as FIM (5000FIM_10) in the course selection online as
the name of this course changed only recently.
Name Educational unit of the minor Entrepreneurial Finance
SIS code 6400EFI_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Ackah ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8*
Objective(s) By the end of this course students can write a financial plan
specifically for start-up ventures and for new ventures within
existing organizations
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-
do’-statements
? Prepare and analyze financial statements, including the
cash flow statement of a company and financial models
? Use ratio-analysis and financial modelling to optimize the
working capital and cash position of a company
? Evaluate the risk and return of investment business
opportunities
? Evaluate the features of financing instruments
? Prepare a financial plan for a company including
optimization of working capital, financing structure and
liquidity forecast.
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Besides a general introduction to financial management
this course will give students a profound knowledge of
financial statements (Historical and Pro Forma), including
the meaning and usefulness of cash flow. Financial
forecasting and modelling will be a major part of this
course.
• Several aspects of shareholder value will be discussed like,
bond and stock valuation and the concept of time value of
money. An important issue in financial management is the
aspect of risk and its relationship with return. We will
introduce quantitative tools and methods to measure risk
and return.
• Capital investments are analysed by using the net present
cash flow concept. A very important determinant of this
analysis is the cost of capital. Students will get an inside in
how the cost of capital is calculated and what its usage is
in modern financial management.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Entrepreneurial Finance: Strategy, Valuation and Deal
Structure
Kiholm Smith, Smith and Bliss; Stanford University Press
ISBN: 978-0-8047-7091-0
Teaching method(s)
Case Based Lectures & self study
Testing method(s)
Assignments
Written Exam
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Assignments 1,5 EC
Written Exam 3,5 EC
Specialties:
Prerequisites
The course requires the concepts and skills developed in
Financial Accounting 1, Financial Management 1 and
Corporate Finance 1, or equivalent. This is a pre-requisite for
participating in this course.
Back to course overview
81
Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship
Name Educational unit of the minor Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship
SIS code 6400ESP_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Timmermans ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 12 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) to learn about the entrepreneurial process and to draw up -on paper-
a commercially viable and financially well documented Business Plan
with a variety of scenarios, for stakeholders such as potential venture
(seed) capital financiers (and/or bankers).
Learning goals
? Explain Entrepreneurship and discuss its importance
? Identify and explain push- and pull factors to entrepreneurship in a
global context
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Carry out a feasibility study
? Conduct an industry and market analysis
? Construct a variety of effective business scenarios
? Justify the proper ethical and legal foundation
? Justify a (new) venture’s financial needs, potential, strength and
viability
Content
? Entrepreneurship and its various forms
? Entrepreneurship in a global context
? Opportunities & Barriers to starting a venture in various
parts of the world
? Cognitive Foundations of Entrepreneurship, current and trends +
differences across cultures and countries
? Vocabulary of Entrepreneurship – from idea to vision to necessities
for success
? Feasibility validation
? Transforming Ideas Into Reality - Effectuation
? Assembling Key Resources
? Legal Aspects of New Ventures
? Building the New Venture
? Exit - How to leave the founded company, various scenarios
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
(to be ordered at Study Store, HvA
FMB)
Essentials of Entrepreneurship,
Robert A. Baron
EdwardElgar Publishing Ltd UK (2012)
ISBN 9781783471782
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class assignments
• Project coaching
• Guest lectures
Testing method(s)
? Enterprise Portfolio (60%)
? Written exam (40%)
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Feasibility Study Report: 1 EC (incl. start doc)
Business Plan: 2 EC
Written Exam 2 EC
Specialties Theme specialists
Pre requisites ? Fundamentals in Marketing, Marketing Management 1, or
equivalent
? Management & Organisation 1, or equivalent
Back to course overview
82
Financial Accounting for Consolidation
Course code: 4000FAC_11
Course Description: Financial Accounting for Consolidation
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Verboom ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Financial
Accounting 1
4011FAC_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1T,
S1H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
This module focuses on the knowledge and professional attitude necessary for an international financial
accountant. The module builds on the first and second year accounting modules with more emphasis on the
international financial environment of corporations. The topic of this module is consolidation.
Topics in relation to the profession/programme profile:
In this course in the knowledge and skills learning track, the following professional tasks and
activities are the main focus:
Professional tasks
2. Design and use of a management information system (provision of management information)
3. Design and operation of a complex financial business administration
4. Compilation of the annual accounts and tax returns (financial accounting)
Professional activities see Educational profile IFM
2.8,9
3.10-12
4.6-11
Coherence with other units of education:
83
Prerequisite for this forth year module are the first and 2nd year Accounting modules. Students must have passed
the second year accounting exams.
Learning goals:
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals Progamme’s profile
competencies
Level
1. Prepare consolidated financial statements PT4 Financial accounting 2
2. Prepare translation and re-measurement of foreign-entity
financial statements, one line consolidations of equity
investments, consolidation of foreign subsidiaries for external
reporting purposes
PT4 Financial accounting 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 40
Self-study 100
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Advanced Accounting Beams Prentice Hall 2012 11th 9780132830362 Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Title Testing material
1 Financial Accounting 1, written test Beams, Chapters 1 - 5, 14
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
84
Financial Risk Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Financial Risk Management
SIS code 5000FRM_13
Teacher(s) Mr. Mrabti ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) The FRM-course covers financial risks in trading, investment and
companies (banks!) and risk management in international financial
markets. The core of the course is the properties and applications
of financial instruments and derivatives, as tools for trading,
speculation and hedging financial risks. Also their role in the
current global financial crisis is discussed.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
The following learning goals are key in the course:
The
student
can:
Programme’s
profile IBMS
competencies
1. Recognize and identify different
types of financial markets,
instruments and derivatives
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
2
2. Recognize and identify different
types of financial market analysis
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
2
3. Assess financial risk of projects,
instruments, companies caused
by changes in interest rates,
currency rates, financial market
conditions
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
3
4. Use financial derivatives
(forwards, futures, options,
swaps) for trading purposes
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
3
5. Use financial derivatives
(forwards, futures, options,
swaps) for hedging purposes
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
3
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Subjects:
- What is financial risk, how is it measured: basis point value,
duration, volatility, VAR, leverage
- Overview of money and capital markets; types of market analysis
- Type of derivatives: futures, forwards, options, swaps, structured
instruments
- Short and long term interest rate instruments and derivatives
- Application of derivatives in commodity, interest rate and forex
trading
- Application of derivatives for hedging financial risks of projects
and companies
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Syllabus
Teaching method(s)
Lectures
Testing method(s)
Written exam
85
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
86
Globalization and Latin America
Name Educational unit of the minor Globalization and Latin America
SIS code 5000GLA_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Alderete
Language English
Number of ECTS 3
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 10 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) There are clear indications that the globalization process in Latin
America requires a new institutional framework in which a more
efficient management of global interdependence can be combined
with the introduction of firm, clearly defined principles of
international solidarity.
The module will provide the required platform for inquisitive and
insightful students of international business to understand,
comprehend, and analyse the great transformations that are
shaping the Latin American landscape.
Learning goals
The process that has come to be known as globalization- i.e., the
progressively greater influence being exerted by worldwide
economic, social and cultural processes over national or regional
ones- is clearly leaving its mark on the world of today. This is not
a new process. Its historical roots run deep. Yet the dramatic
changes in terms of space and time being brought about by the
communications and information revolution represent a qualitative
break with the past. Globalization clearly opens up opportunities
for development. National strategies should be designed to take
advantage of the potential and meet the requirements associated
with greater integration into the world economy. This process
also, however, entails risks: risk generated by new sources of
instability in trade flows and, especially, finance; the risk that
countries unprepared for the formidable demands of
competitiveness in today’s world may be excluded from the
process; and the risk of an exacerbation of the structural
heterogeneity existing among social sectors and regions within
countries whose linkages with the world economy are segmented
and marginal in nature. An important dimension of the
globalization process is the gradual spread of ideas and values
with regard to civil and political rights, on the one hand, and
economic, social and cultural rights, on the other.
Content
The first part of the module analyses globalization from
an integral standpoint. The second part of the study
focuses on specific issues: external vulnerability and
macroeconomic policy, the integration of Latin America
and the Caribbean in global trade and production circuits,
strengthening innovation systems and technological
development, international migration, environmental
sustainability and social development.
Literature and other Globalization and
Development
UN CEPAL
(various
authors)
UN
CEPAL
2002 No
Globalization and
Latin America
C.H. Alderete Yes
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class participation, project groups, assignments, group’s
discussions, presentations
87
Testing method(s)
Final research paper
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
3 ECs
Specialities Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the
entire minor
Back to course overview
88
Human Resource Management 1
Course code: 5000HR1_10
Course Description: Human Resources Management 1
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Ms. Kuijper ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Written
exam
5010HR1_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 70
2 Presentation 5010HR1_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 30
Contents and topics in the course:
Managing people effectively is vital to success in today’s highly competitive marketplace. The task of managing
human resources effectively include all the activities that organizations use to influence the competencies,
behaviours and motivations of all the people who work for them. These in turn influence profitability, customer
satisfaction and a variety of other important measures of organizational effectiveness. Meeting the challenge of
managing people effectively requires the involvement of everyone in the organization. HR activities include both
the formal policies of the organizations and the actual daily practices that people experience.
In this course we address and incorporate those facts and competencies with which modern managers need to be
knowledgeable. Many of the traditional functions of Human Resources (HR) are today incorporated into the job
descriptions of line managers and teams as a result of restructuring and employee empowerment. So this course
is not just for future HR managers, but also primarily for future managers and team members who must now know
HR.
Topics include international HRM, recruitment and selection, training and development, motivation, generation Y.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Cognitive skills
Taxonomy level
Interpersonal
skills
Framework
Competencies IBMS
and level
89
1 To identify the role of HRM in modern
organizations
2 9, Level 1
2 To relate new job analysis and design
approaches to motivation, retention, and
performance
3 9, Level 1
3 To relate effective recruitment, selection and
retention strategies
3 9, Level 1
4 To explain training and developing activities 2 9, Level 1
5 To explain HR in an international context 2 9, Level 1
6 To identify the importance of motivation and
to discriminate between various ways of
motivating employees
2 9, Level 1
7 To illustrate the impact of a certain
generation in the workforce
2 9, Level 1
Methods of work and study hours:
During the lectures we will go over the reading material and illustrate the topics discussed with the help of video's,
exercises, cases and class discussion.
In addition, as of week 4 there will be a group presentation in every class on the topic discussed.
Classes are 2 hours per week
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Human Resource
Management
1)
compiled by A. van
Woudenberg
Pearson
Education
latest 9781849591690 Yes
1)
custom made for HvA
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test # Description Form of test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Exam written test 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 Reader, power points from presentations
2 Group presentation presentation 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 Reader, own research
The written exam will be 70% of the final grade
The presentation will be 30% of the final grade
Back to course overview
90
Human Resource Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Human Resource Management
SIS code 6100HRME13
Teacher(s) Ms. Kuijper ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2,5
Objective(s) Student learns theory on (strategic) HRM and its implementation
in SAP ERP
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Knowledge of (strategic) HRM-processes
? Know that strategic HRM plays an integral part in
company policies and the formulation of company
strategies
? Can use SAP ERP for HRM in general
? Can use SAP ERP for recruitment and selection and
hiring
? Can use SAP ERP for performance appraisal
? Can use SAP ERP for succession management
? Can use SAP ERP for training and development
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
? Organisational structure
? Job analysis
? Recruitment
? Selection
? Performance management
? Succession management
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Teaching method(s)
Lecture
IT-training
Assignments
Testing method(s)
Portfolio
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
1. 5 ECs
Specialities
Back to course overview
91
Intercultural Awareness
(Please note that this is last year’s description, minor changes may have been made to this
course description, an updated version will be available as soon as possible)
Course code: 5000ICN_03
Lecturer Ms. Mai Nguyen ([email protected])
Study Program IBMS
ECTS: 4
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1
project 5003ICN_T1
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 50
2
written
exam
5003ICN_T2
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
Contents and topics in the course:
Intercultural Awareness is essential for building productive relationships and operating effectively in an
environment of globalization and international business.
Business students must define, recognize, and relate to different cultures in order to plan effectively and to carry
out strategies for coping with the challenges posed by inter-cultural operating environments and situations.
The main focus of this course is to elucidate the essence of culture in terms of values and beliefs that lie behind
customs, habits, and symbols. The course helps students to prepare corresponding arguments and strategies for
addressing and coping with various intercultural situations.
The course is presented in three parts. The first part focuses on the concept of culture and theories of culture
developed by Hofstede, Hall and Trompenaars. Students are expected to develop an in-depth ability to use these
theories and to break down, distinguish and compare situations by employing the respective dimensions. They
are also expected to present practical illustrations and applications of the theories taken from their own
experience and research.
The second part of the course looks at various models of how to cope with different sets of values as presented in
the first parts. These include Earley’s Cultural Intelligence, cultural shock, stereotypes, Development of Cultural
Sensitivity (DCIM); Hofstede’s Onion and pyramid model., DAE model of analyzing, Cultural Relativism. Similar to
the first part, students are required to research, cooperate, present and discuss case studies while demonstrating
and developing the links between the studied theories and reality.
In the third part of the course, students are required to work in groups and do in-depth research on a chosen
topic that is related to the course content. After discussing the research questions carefully with the lecturer(s),
they move on to conduct qualitative/ quantitative research that can prove their hypothesis. Examples of such a
project is: “In what way culture has influenced the economic development of East Asia?”. One of the most crucial
requirement of the project is that students have to deliver some new knowledge as the result of their research.
The theories presented in the first and second parts of the course are used as theoretical framework for their
work.
Subjects & Keywords
1. Cultural dimensions: Power Distance, Collectivism, Individualism, Masculinity, Femininity, Uncertainty
Avoidance, Short-Long term time orientation, Particularism, Universalism, Diffuse, Specific, Neutral, Affective,
Human and Nature, High-Low context, Mono-polychronic, Kinaesthetic.
2. Defining Culture: anthropological definition of culture; working definition of culture; types of culture: national
culture, organizational culture, sub-cultures; models of culture; role of values in
culture
92
3. Cultural Awareness models: Cultural Intelligence, Stereotype, DCIM (Development of Cultural Sensitivity),
Three levels of Cultural Understanding, Onion, Cultural Shock, DAE (model of Analyzing), Cultural relativism.
4. Application of Cultural Theories: Research methodology, application, critique
5. Intercultural themes: These subjects are situational as they depend on the topics chosen by students. Based
on their research themes, the presentations and the content of the lessons will focus on the main issue
accordingly. Examples of these themes are: The influence of Culture in North American Fooding Advertisement;
How Indian culture persists in its Bollywood film industry.
6. Intercultural Teams: intercultural communication; working in intercultural teams; project
Coherence with other units of education:
Intercultural Awareness is an elective course. It is especially relevant for students who are currently studying
abroad as they can readily apply the knowledge gained from class to their daily lives.
Learning goals:
Upon completion of the Intercultural Awareness course, students should be able to anticipate situations and
suggest solutions to culture-based misunderstandings. Students will be able to identify the relationship between
values and culture. They will demonstrate their ability to work in an intercultural environment by completing an
international group project. Using the knowledge gained in this course, students should be able to develop
strategies to avoid culture-related misunderstandings.
At the end of this course, students will be able to identify the relationship between values and culture and be able
to relate to specific situations. They will be able to use competency independently to develop and identify effective
solutions in a relatively clearly arranged intercultural situations
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1. Define and explain relevant terms Inter-cultural L3
2. Describe the acculturation process Inter-cultural L2
3. Explain and identify cultural dimensions with accurate examples Inter-cultural L3
4. Determine whether cultural dimensions are relevant to the analysis
of a situation.
Inter-cultural L2
5. Distinguish personal and cultural traits and between nationality and
cultural
background
Inter-cultural L3
6. Practice cultural relativism in intercultural discussions
Inter-cultural L2
7. Work and communicate effectively as part of a multicultural group
Inter-cultural L2
8. Develop strategies for working effectively with a multicultural group
Inter-cultural L2
9. Adapt behaviour to different cultural situations
Inter-cultural L2
10 Demonstrate curiosity about other cultures
Inter-cultural L2
Methods of work and study hours:
Work Method Total study hours per semester
Seminars 21
Self-Study 60
Assignment(s) 31
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 112
93
Feedback
Much of the class consists of discussions to develop and check understanding of reading materials and lecture
concepts. Students will receive direct feedback to their comments in class.
For the group project, students will receive oral and written feedback during the project development phase. The
instructor will be available by email, during office hours, and by special appointment for further comment or
guidance on the presentation. Students will receive written and oral feedback after completing the presentation.
Attendance
Discussion with classmates and the instructor are vital for increasing intercultural awareness and passing the
exam. Therefore, attendance is required. Students are allowed three absences per semester. Students who miss
more than three classes risk consequences that may include a reduced exam score or exam ineligibility.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Trompenaars’ Seven Dimensions.
Understanding Cross-Cultural
Management.
1)
Trompenaars, F.,
Hampden-Turner, C.
Riding the Waves of
Culture
Prentice Hall. 2008 No
Cultures and organizations : software
of the mind.
2)
Geert H Hofstede; Gert
Jan Hofstede; Michael
Minkov
Maidenhead :
McGraw-Hill
2010 Yes
Cues of Culture: The Basis of
Intercultural Differences in Nonverbal
Communication
3)
Anderson, P Wadsworth
Publishing Co
2000 Yes
Monochronic and Polychronic Time.
Intercultural Communication: A
Reader
4)
Hall, E. T Wadsworth
Publishing Co
Yes
The Seven Dimensions of Culture.
5)
Trompenaars Hampden-
Turner Consulting.
2009 Yes
The man_nature relationship and
environmental ethics. Journal of
Environmental Radioactivity
6)
Bourdeau, Ph. 2004 Yes
The man_nature relationship and
environmental ethics. Journal of
Environmental Radioactivity (72)
7)
Bourdeau, Ph. 2004 Yes
Cultural Intelligence. Harvard
Business Review. October 2004
8)
Earley, P. C; Mosakowski,
E.
Yes
1)
pages 82-87.
2)
3rd Edition
3)
Larry A. Samovar and Richard E. Porter pages 258-269.
4)
Larry A. Samovar and Richard E. Porter pages 280-286
5)
URL:http://www.7d-culture.nl/Content/cont042.htm. Accessed 8 July 2009.
6)
(pages) 9–15
7)
(pages) 9–15
8)
pages 139-146.
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test no. Test form Material
1 Project Weekly lesson topic: assigned readings plus extensive additional research
2 Written exam Intercultural Awareness reader and in-class discussions.
Back to course overview
94
International Financial Accounting
Name Educational unit of the minor International Financial Accounting
SIS code 5000IFA_13
Teacher(s) Mr. Mrabti ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) The purpose of this course is to make students aware of the
international dimensions of financial reporting
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
1
Student is able to classify different
international accounting systems
using theoretical approaches
discussed in contemporary
accounting journals (NF III.8, Level 1)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
2
Student is able to explain possible
differences between financial
statements taking into account the
use of different accounting standards
(NF III.8, Level 1)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
3
Student is able to journalize
international business transactions,
keeping in mind the broader
international business context (NF
III.8, Level 2)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
4
Student is able to prepare a set of
financial statements in accordance
with IFRS (NF III.8, Level 2)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
5
Student is able to analyze a
company’s profitability, liquidity, and
solvency by applying various
measurement metrics and interpreting
the results (NF III.8, Level 3).
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
3
6
Student is able to make inferences
about a given firm’s degree of
internationalization and preferred
mode(s) of internationalization with a
careful analysis of the firm’s financial
statements (NF III.8, Level 3).
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
3
95
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
A solid knowledge of Financial Accounting, i.e. the ability to read,
asses and evaluate a company's Annual Report. Students should
be familiar with the interrelationship between the Balance Sheet,
Income Statement and the Cash Flow Statement.
The course is a continuation of the subject matters of Corporate
Finance, and addresses issues that must be dealt with in the
thesis.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Financial accounting, an international introduction: Alexander &
Nobes
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class, , project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Written exam, assignments, continuous assessment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
96
International Financial Markets
Course code: 3000IFM_10
Course Description: International Financial Markets
Module area: EM-IBL-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Rensen ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014 - 2015
Study year: 3
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Test 3010IFM_TS D NA Test
(written)
C C S1, S2, S1H,
S2H
120 100
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Contents and topics in the course:
The IBL graduate is intended to become a 'human interface', providing the links between his or her company and
its international environment. To perform this function adequately, it is essential to understand the importance of
monetary policy (fluctuations in interest and exchange rates) and the functioning of international financial markets
for the company and for the economy of the relevant region and country.
The course International Financial Markets focuses on current topics related to international financial markets.
Partly students are confronted with underlying theories like Purchasing Power Parity and other exchange rate
theories and with the theoretical foundation of monetary and fiscal policy. The course focuses on recent
publications in the most influential newspapers (The Financial Times) and magazines (The Economist) and
publications of leading institutions such as the IMF, European Central Bank and the U.S. Federal Reserve. Topics
may vary depending on recent developments in world finance, but topics that surely will be covered are:
· the financial crisis in Europe;
· the influence of monetary economy on the real economy;
· the global imbalance between debtor countries (U.S.) and creditor countries (China)
· the role of the major currencies (U.S. Dollar, euro) in international financial market
· the functioning of the euro zone: monetary union, the Stability Pact / fiscal compact;
· financial development in BRIC countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China) and Japan
· Central banks (and its policies). International character of the course
The course contributes to the international character of IBL. Not only because of the topics it includes, but also
because of the fact that the student are taught and tested in English in classes with other students from different
nationalities.
Coherence with other units of education:
The student needs to be familiar with the content of the economics courses taught in year 1 and 2, students will
97
learn about the connection with International Marketing Management and Sales & Account Management
Learning goals:
No Learning goals, the student can: IBL programme profile
competencies
Level
1 Make an analysis of economic developments in a country,
especially with respect to international financial matters.
1.1, 1.2, 3.4 3
2 Advocate opposite points of view with respect to matters of
international financial matters.
1.2, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 28
Self-study 84
Individual discussion 28
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Feedback
Mainly in class. Students pose questions about articles (or theories) they prepared. Articles that are studied
during class are discussed. Students also have the possibility to pose their questions by email. Feedback will take
about 14 hours of the time spent in class.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
The economics of money, banking
and financial markets
Documents from several central
banks: ECB, Fed etc
Frederic S.
Miskin
Pearson Global
edition
available on
internet
10
th
13:9780312649362 Yes
yes
Articles from The Economist available on
internet
Yes
Documents from several international
organizations: IMF, OECD etc .
available on
internet
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
The material covered consists of all the documents and newspaper articles distributed in class and referred to on
relevant websites. The documents relate to recent developments in the international financial markets and
students are tested on their knowledge about the causes and consequences of these developments.
The exam consists of open-ended questions focusing on the understanding of the recent developments in
98
international financial markets, covered with the distributed Articles.
Back to course overview
99
International Business Law
Course code: 5000ILW_06
Course Description: International Business Law
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Ms. Andela ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2006
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Written open
book
examination
5006ILW_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
# Description Catalogue
Nbr.
Grading
basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Exam 6100ILW_10 Decimal 5.5 Test
(written)
centrally centrally B2, H1,
B4, H2
120
minutes
100%
Rationale
Law is an indispensable instrument in a business manager's toolkit. It deals with risk management.
How to comply with regulations, how to conclude international sales contracts, how to avoid conflicts and how to
deal with them if they do occur? Questions that you will be able to answer!
The course focuses on the hands-on use of law in international business and transnational commercial
transactions. You will be equipped with the legal insight and knowledge to make sound business decisions.
Learn the do's and don'ts from the perspective of a legal advisor to major trade houses, banks, insurers and
transporters. Acquire a strong(er) legal position in negotiations. Be able to use the opportunities the law affords
and avoid the pitfalls. Understand how business and law, as well as politics and economics interconnect.
At the end of this course you will be aware of the important role of law in international business. You will be able
to distinguish the different legal systems, know which business form to use and the level of risk and control
involved. With regard to international trade you are aware of NAFTA and EU.
In case a dispute arises, you can estimate which court should be involved.
In the field of EU competition law, you can make a preventive assessment whether contracts and practices
comply with the rules of competition. In the field of international contract law, you can evaluate and negotiate
100
contracts with customers, distributors, agents, carriers, insurance companies and banks. You can analyse the
terms of delivery according to the INCOTERMS 2010 and terms of payment in a sales contract on a case to
case basis. You will know when it is opportune to use documentary credit. You will be in a position to give advice
on when particular clauses such as Free On Board or Cost Insurance Freight are favourable or unfavourable and
which clauses can easily be negotiated upon. You will be aware of the legal implications of business decisions
and the ethical responsibility involved.
In the course we will start with an introduction on the role of law in general and in international business followed
by an overview of the different legal systems. Thereafter the focus will be on international business law, in
particular on multinational corporations, EU competition and US antitrust law, the conclusion of contracts for the
export transaction, uniform rules such as international trade terms as the INCOTERMS 2010, dispute settlement
mechanisms, litigation and legal procedure, methods of payment and the carriage of goods by sea, by air and
over land. Special attention is given to the development of free trade and economic integration in Europe and
Latin America by taking a closer look at the EU, MERCOSUR and NAFTA and its effects. Legal aspects of
topical issues, such as the credit crisis and groundbreaking mergers and take overs are dealt with as and when
they develop.
Needless to say, part of this course will be dedicated to case law of international and national courts, in order to
understand where it went wrong and how this can be avoided in the future. The cases serve to illustrate the
theory.
The knowledge and skills gained in this course are categorized under the areas of international business
awareness and ethical responsibility. They are an absolute necessity for anyone operating in the international
business arena in the professional role of advisor for which IBMS prepares its students.
Subjects and Keywords
The topics covered are:
1) ) Overview of the following aspects of international business law:
a) history, distinction public/private law; b) main sources; c) main subjects; d) comparison of Common Law, Civil
law and Islamic Law systems;
2) Dispute settlement (choice of law/choice of forum/arbitration/legal procedure);
3) Different business forms and their characteristics: (sole proprietorship, partnership, Ltd., GmbH, PLC, SA de
CV), multinational corporations, product liability, US anti-trust and EU competition law;
4) International Trade Law: special emphasis on EU (European Union), NAFTA (North American Free Trade
Agreement) and MERCOSUR (Mercado Comun del Sur);
5) Legal framework of the Export Trade: International Sales Contract: conclusion of a valid contract according to
the United Nations Convention on the International Sale of Goods (CISG);
6) Transport law: Use of INCOTERMS 2010, the carriage of goods by sea (Bill of Lading, liability of the carrier
under the Hague (Visby) Rules/Rotterdam Rules), the role of insurance;
7) Finance: methods of payment (Bill of Exchange, Letter of Credit);
8) Legal aspects of topical issues (financial crisis, mergers and acquisitions, globalization, ethical responsibility,
compulsory licences)
Coherence of this course with other courses
International Business Law is related to Marketing, Corporate Finance, Sales Negotiations, Macroeconomics &
Finance in International Trade, European Law, Entrepreneurship, Management and Organisation, Critical
Thinking and the Business Cases Project as well as Current Issues in International Business and the Foreign
Direct Investment Project. It also ties in with Modern History and Society in Latin America and Political Economy
of Latin America.
Learning goals:
101
Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 distinguish between the major legal systems in the world (common law, civil
law, Islamic law)
I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
2 explain the difference between various legal entities in the international
business arena (partnership, Ltd., GmbH, PLC, SA de CV);
I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
3 differentiate between MERCOSUR, NAFTA and EU; I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
4 judge EU competition and US anti trust issues (cartel, monopoly/abuse of a
dominant position) and take business decisions accordingly
I.1 International Business
Awareness
3
5 identify the applicable law of a particular contract and which court to involve I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
6 use the United Nations Convention on the International Sale of Goods
(CISG)for the practical evaluation of international sales contracts;
I.1 International Business
Awareness
3
7 justify which INCOTERMS and /or financial instruments to use in practical
situations;
I.1 International
Business Awareness
3
8 interpret the legal impact of current issues in international politics and
economics on business
I.1 International
Business Awareness
3
9 interrelate legal implications of business decisions with current ethical issues
and ethical responsibility
VI.7 Ethical
responsibility
3
Methods of work and study hours:
Teaching methods:
* We meet three lecture hours a week (block) for one semester of approximately fourteen weeks. Furthermore
self-study and preparation for case presentations are required.
* The interactive lectures are split between Theory and Cases. Your personal input, with your national
background, influences the content of the lectures. Legal aspects of topical issues will be dealt with as and when
appropriate.
* Starting from a quick scan over International Law, we jump to the practice of (preventive) legal thinking. During
the last weeks the pieces of the jigsaw will fall together and you will then be able to evaluate and negotiate
commercial contracts for different situations successfully.
* A visit to an international institution, such as the European Parliament or the European Commission in Brussels
or the International Court of Justice in The Hague might be included, as well as a guest lecture on a topical issue.
Time allocated for contact: 42 hours
Self-study: 98 hours
102
Attendance and active class participation serve as an important asset for the exam and are highly recommended.
The court cases dealt with, explained, discussed and/or presented in class by both the lecturer and students are
mandatory for the exam. In addition, the lectures will clarify the legal theory of the topics mentioned above. All
information on the course, study materials such as Power points and International Legislation, (links to) treaties
and conventions and examination information are made available for students on the intranet. The main course
book is International Business Law 6th/latest ed. by Ray August et al.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Understanding European Union
Law
Karen Davies Routledge
Cavendish
2007 latest No
International Business Law August, R. et
al.
Prentice Hall 2013 latest 0-13-014377-
4
Yes
Syllabus on international
legislation
1)
n.a. Yes
1)
e-syllabus available on the intranet
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Form of
Test
Learning
goal #
Material covered
1 Exam Written 1-9 Chapters 1,4,10,11,12, Power points on Comparison of Legal
systems, Transnational Commercial Law, EU and Treaty of Lisbon,
EU Competition Law and Merger Control, assigned cases and
readings.
Extra information:
Whether compulsory:
For students taking the Minor Latin American Business Studies (LABS) it is an elective within the minor. Elective
course for 3rd and 4th year and Exchange students.
Back to course overview
103
International Marketing
(Please note that this is last year’s description, minor changes may have been made to this
course description, an updated version will be available as soon as possible)
Course code: 5000IMK_08
Lecturer Ruya Kocer ([email protected])
Study Program IBMS
ECTS: 3
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1
Analysis 5008IMK_T1
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 35
2
Implementatio
n through
cases
5008IMK_T2
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 30
3
Written
Exam
5008IMK_T3
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 35
Contents and topics in the course:
The course International Marketing (IMK) concentrates on the international aspects of marketing mix and the
business environment of global companies. This module focuses on how business environment differs from
country to country and takes the perspective of marketing decisions made by global companies. On completion of
this module student should be able to: • explain the differences between international marketing and domestic
marketing; • apply international marketing theory and concepts in a range of areas including product, promotion,
pricing, and distribution (marketing mix); • relate international marketing theory to a given scenario in order to
solve practical problems, like performing market selection process and choosing appropriate market entry
strategy.
Coherence with other units of education:
This course is related to other courses within Minor International Marketing.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1 Analyze the marketing mix used in
international business.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management
3
2 Explain the recent developments
in international business.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management; IV.3 Business Communication
3
3 Recognize the ways/models to
select international markets.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management; V.4 Business Research Methods
3
4 Identify the possible market entry
strategies.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management; V.4 Business Research Methods
3
Methods of work and study hours:
104
Lessons 28
Assignments 56
Total study hours 3 ECT (1 credit = 28 study hours) 84 hrs
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Global marketing. A decision-oriented approach Svend Hollensen Prentice Hall 2011 latest No
Test forms and material covered in each test:
The form of testing is open assessment (decentral testing).
Students receive 3 assignments:
- International business news presentation 30% of final grade
- Written assignment and presentation 35% of final grade
- Written case analysis and presentation 35% of final grade
One assignment is individual; the other two are group assignments. However each student is responsible for the
quality of his/her contribution on all parts of the assignment and can be graded individually.
Back to course overview
105
International Money and Finance
Course code: 5000INE_03
Course Description: International Money and Finance
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Huijg ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2003
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Written 5003INE_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
The course International Money and Finance (INE) explains -at intermediate level-
1) how Foreign Exchange (FX) markets function,
2) where these FX markets are located (physically and in cyberspace),
3) why exchange rates fluctuate and which economic and social factors impact their volatility,
4) how financial managers can mitigate the inherent risks of varying exchange rates, in the short and long term,
and
5) which specific financial instruments are used to hedge against FX volatility, consisting mainly of derivatives
(options, futures, forwards and swaps).
General international economic concepts and current problems are also explained:
a) Balance of Payments,
b) the role of Central Banks in monetary economics,
c) the emergence of the Euro,
d) the credit crisis,
and specific International Finance are also addressed:
e) the Interest Rate Parity Theory,
f) the Purchasing Power Parity theory and
g) the theory of Arbitrage.
Coherence with other units of education:
Students should be familiar with the basic concepts of supply and demand, the balance of payments, interest rate
calculations (present values etc.), the basic underlying economic forces in determining exchange rates and basic
role of Central Banks in the overall economy, i.e. determination of the discount rates, open market transactions
106
and so called quantitative easing.
This course will elaborate on these concepts up unto the level that students can implement methods to mitigate
foreign exchange (FX) risk and to reduce FX exposure.
This course mainly takes the position of students working later for financial or industrial companies as (junior)
financial managers, whereby they get involved in the financial decision making process.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals. The student can: Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 identify how Foreign Exchange (FX) markets function. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
2 assess where these FX markets are located (physically and in cyberspace. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
3 classify the various elements of the Balance of Payment. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
4 illustrate why exchange rates fluctuate and which economic and social
factors impact their volatility
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
5 identify the control instruments for the Central Banks to conduct monetary
economic policy.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
6 predict whether exchange rates will move up or depreciate. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
7 appreciate the emergence of the Euro as a common currency and the
associated problems.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
8 interpret how financial managers can mitigate the inherent risks of varying
exchange rates, in the short and long term.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
9 choose which specific financial instruments can be used to hedge against
FX volatility, consisting mainly of derivatives (options, futures, forwards and
swaps).
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
10 interpret the Interest Rate Parity Theory, the Purchasing Power Parity theory
and the theory of Arbitrage.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
Methods of work and study hours:
The instructor will give weekly lectures covering all the material.
Given the political nature of the material, discussion in class is encouraged.
Supporting material consists of handouts; DVDs are shown.
Suggested daily/weekly reading of: Financial Times, The Economist, Wall Street Journal, Fortune etc. or
equivalent websites.
Literature:
107
Book: Foundations of Multinational Financial Management, by: A.C. Shapiro, Publisher: Wiley, 6th edition, ISBN:
0-471-66117-1 (book is not compulsory, it provides supporting material; the contents of the course are
summarized in the PPT's by the lecturer).
Test forms and material covered in each test:
One final written exam with 40 multiple choice questions covering all the topics of the course.
Extra information:
Prerequisites: Students should have had introductory courses in micro- and macroeconomics.
Back to course overview
108
Internet Marketing
Name Educational unit of the minor Internet Marketing
SIS code 5000INM_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Petkova ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECs 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) The course Internet Marketing covers different aspects of how
organizations use internet for marketing, describing emerging
models for developing strategy, and using case studies of
companies that use internet marketing in their strategy.
Students will play an active role throughout the course. They are
encouraged to explore and experiment with digital marketing, by
working on a variety of assignments, and expected to present their
findings in pair and group presentations. The course will culminate
with group presentations of a creative and fully developed online
presence for a specific case study.
Learning goals
Explain the key differences between internet marketing and
traditional marketing.
Demonstrate the significance of micro and macro-environment
factors in the internet marketing strategy of an organization.
Examine the opportunities and threats on a company level arising
from the internet.
Interpret the elements of the marketing mix in an online context.
Assess the difference in communications characteristics between
digital and traditional media.
Describe the main success factors in managing a digital
campaign.
Develop the fundamentals of an internet marketing strategy for a
specific case study.
Content
Digital marketing fundamentals; Digital Strategy Development,
Digital Marketing implementation and practice; The internet and
the marketing mix, Relationship Marketing, Campaign planning
and evaluation.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Chaffey D., Ellis-Chadwick F. (2012) “Digital Marketing, Strategy,
Implementation and Practice”, Person Education Limited.
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, project work, blogging on ECRC.nl
Testing method(s)
De – central open book test, Digital Marketing Project and
Presentation
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
1 De-central test 2.5 ECs
2 Project and presentation 2.5ECs
Specialities
Blogging, guest lecturers; the projects are related to real world
problems that IBS, HvA, and companies face.
Back to course overview
109
International Trade
Course code: 5000INT_03
Course Description: International Trade
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Van Amerom ([email protected]), Ms. Khan ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2003
Applied Ac.Year: 2014 - 2015
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 INT
International
Trade - TS
5003INT_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
International Trade is a "Risk Management" course.
The module is based upon the concept that international enterprises require management's full knowledge and
understanding of the major considerations supplementing the marketing effort, the risks involved, and the
practical steps in which the corporation must engage prior to, during, and subsequent to the consummation of the
sales contract.
Maintaining an overview perspective and acceptance of the philosophy that corporations should not be in the
business of knowingly taking risks over which they have no control, this module has been designed to help the
student to understand the nature of the major risks inherent in conducting business on an international level:
shipment modes and packaging, payment types and related issues, and the cause of and solution to foreign
exchange risk exposure.
This module, presented in twelve interactive classes throughout each semester, provides a primer on the terms
and conditions of the international transaction, major related risks and coverage, transportation, insurance,
documentation, and payment methods.
The following material is covered over the period of one full semester. With the exception of the course
introduction, the risk topics listed below are not in any particular order. Notification will be given during class
concerning the order to be followed.
1 Course Introduction
2 The Contract & Trade Terms
3 Packaging & Transport
4 Means of Payment
5 Short-Term Payments
6 Long-Term Payments
7 Foreign Currency
110
8 Risk Insurance
9 Logistics
10 Price Calculations
11 Price Calculations
12 Open
Topics in relation to the profession/programme profile:
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisite courses include a solid knowledge and understanding of the precepts of marketing theory and
finance. All candidates are expected to have completed, or concurrently be following an International Marketing
module.
A common sense approach to business would also help...as would a willingness to prepare for and participate in
classroom discussions.
Learning goals:
Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Recognize, Understand, and deal with everyday risks associated with
international trade in the areas of shipping, payment vehicles, foreign
exchange, insurance, and product/service pricing.
I.1 International business
awareness
II.4Business process and
change management
II.5 Entrepreneurial
management
III.7 Int. Supply Chain
management
3
3
2 Differentiate between risk-taking which is a normal part of a business'
competencies and those risks which lie outside of management's normal
core competencies and/or control, and be able to advise management how
to avoid or cover these risks.
II.4 Business process and
change management
II.4 Entrepreneurial
management
IV 2 Cooperation
IV.3 Business
communication
V.4 Business Research
methods
V.5 Planning and
organising
3
Methods of work and study hours:
The International Trade module is presented in the form of 12 interactive 3-period lectures. It is important that
in preparation for this students should read the materials(reports and book) given to them on the intranet.
Familiarizing themselves before each class with the assigned reading material aids significantly to the
understanding of the lectures.
111
Major media includes in-house created materials developed from practical international corporate and consulting
experience.
Interactive classroom discussions designed to enhance the knowledge, understanding and flexibility necessary for
corporate risk survival in the global marketplace.
Each Lecture consist of :
- Brief presentation and discussion on latest news items related to the subject(what’s up)
- presentation of relevant theory by the lecturer
- Group presentations of a brief analysis (max 5 sheets ) regarding a specific report or essay .
- Discussion and presentation of questions related with a case.
Key to this module will be theory to practice interpretation through introduction and discussion of current/past
affairs based on international business developments.
The rationale behind this course is that there is a very meaningful relationship between the export/import of goods
with other modules presented in the IBMS programme. Import and export are merely opposite sides of the same
trading coin - both of which touch upon areas of International Law and International Marketing, as well as
logistics, banking and finance, and others. A simple business calculation model is used as a platform to
demonstrate the place of pricing risk/consequence in the import/export business.
The International Trade module is a very practical down-to-earth "How To" module which seeks to consolidate in
the mind of the student all of the above seemingly disparate parts into a coherent business whole. When the
proposed import/export transaction is examined, the student is instead encouraged to ask practical "What if...?"
or, "What then..?" types of questions in a proactive stance designed to pre-empt problems/risks prior to making
the deal.
Study Load in percentage: Classroom study 50%; self-study 50%
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
no.
Type of test Subject matter
1 written 120
minutes
Value: 100%
The test examines all material covered during the semester. All material in the book
will be tested, as well as all material presented and discussed in classes.
All presentation sheets from lectures (both from students as well as (guest)
lecturer(s)
Case text if given by the lecturer
Course Book : Practices of International trade , Author : O.van Geuns, ISBN number 90-802115-3-2
The regular end-of-term exam is comprised of semi-open essay and/or multiple choice type questions requiring
students to demonstrate their understanding of/solution to the scenario based problems presented. The test is
112
designed to test the student's knowledge and understanding of the material, as well as to test the student's
application of the tools and techniques used to cover various situation based risk scenarios.
Exam and Resits
There is the normal possibility to retake the INT exam during the resit period. All exams and resits are closed-
book exams. Better to pass the regular end-of-term exam.
Format of the exam : 50% multiple choice and 50% open questions.
Back to course overview
113
Latin American Business Culture
Name Educational unit of the minor Latin America Business Culture
SIS code 5000LAC_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Meiller ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 3
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 10 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) 1. To provide students with useful knowledge about social
and business practices of trade and commerce in Latin
America;
2. To help students reflect about skills, attitudes and
behaviours needed to achieve success while
working/living in Latin America.
Learning goals
The student can:
? Sum up general intercultural differences dealt with in
each session;
? Describe general behaviour/business patterns/practices
observed in a particular geographical region and/or
country;
? Identify specific behaviour/business patterns/practices
observed in different groups within a particular country;
? Compare different behaviour/business patterns/practices
of similar groups in different countries in the area;
? Deduce aspects influencing behaviour/business
patterns/practices of different countries than his/her own;
? Generalize common management and leadership
patterns from different countries/geographical region;
and,
? Predict and justify behaviour/business patterns/practices
of Latin American countries not discussed during lecture
Content
1. General introduction.
2. The Changing Role of the Enterprise in Latin America.
3. The Role of Women in Latin American Societies.
4. Division of Classes in Latin America.
5. The Informal Economy.
6. Doing Business in Latin America – A collection of
anecdotes and practicalities.
7. A Short Comparative Study of Latin American
Economies.
Literature and other The study material will be provided by the lecturer during the
course.
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class participation, project groups, assignments, group’s
discussions, presentations
Testing method(s)
Continuous assessment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
3 ECs
Specialities Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the
entire minor
Back to course overview
114
Management Accounting 3
Course code: 4000MA3_11
Course Description: Management Accounting 3
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Ms. Ming ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
# Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Wei
gh
1 MA3 exam 4011MA3_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1T,
S1H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
An international financial manager or controller is a decision maker or member of a decision making team, using
cost accounting as a managerial tool for allocation corporate costs to divisions and products. The allocation of a
company's internal support costs and allocation of joint costs among departments and projects can have a big
impact on their respective profitability.
This module focuses on accounting related tot decision making and the concepts of relevant and opportunity
costs, and pricing decisions.
Emphasis lies on more complex cost allocation systems, cost management. Finally there is the topic of process
costing and just-in-time inventory systems.
Topics:
1. Decision making
2. Cost allocation
3. Inventory management (FIFO process costing and JIT)
Coherence with other units of education:
This unit of education is a core subject of the exam program of the main phase. It is a continuation and application
of the 2nd year cost accounting and management accounting course.
Successful completion of the 2nd year cost accounting module (MA2) is necessary for starting this MA3 module.
Learning goals:
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
115
1. Distinguish relevant from irrelevant data and explain the opportunity-
cost concept in decision making. Explain why conflicts can arise between
the decision model used by the manager, and the performance evaluation
of this manager. Discuss how companies can make short-run and long
run pricing decisions.
PT5 Management
accounting
3
2. Discuss the purposes for cost allocation and be able to allocate
(corporate, division, and support department cost) costs to cost objects.
Discuss the concept of common costs, and revenues and be able to
compute joint costs to products, and by-products.
PT5 Management
accounting
3
3. Discuss the concepts of process costing and back-flush costing.
Outline the principles of lean accounting. Implement the process costing
system in a manufacturing environment using transferred-in- costs. Carry
out different ways in which back-flush costing can simplify
traditional inventory costing systems.
PT3 Financial
administration
PT5 Management
accounting
3/2
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 40
Self-study 100
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Cost Accounting Horngren, Datar and Rajan Prentice Hall 2011 14th 9780273753971 Yes
Handout MA3 Ming 2011 Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test # Description Form of test Learning goal # Material covered
1 MA3 exam written test 1-3 Chapters 11, 12,14, 15, 16, 17, 20 and handouts
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
116
Management Accounting Techniques
Name Educational unit of the minor Management Accounting Techniques
SIS code 5000MAT_06
Teacher(s) Mr. Van Roosmalen ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) In the first year course Management Accounting1 the basic
concepts and techniques were discussed. In the course
Management Accounting Techniques the techniques are
elaborated further focusing on:
-how to apply these techniques in a international corporate
environment;
-how to integrate the use of these techniques with management
and organization theory.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
1 identify relevant cost information in
order to support decision making by
management.
III.8 Int. Fin.Acc 2
2 relate the outcome of cost calculations
for decision making to management
control aspects like performance
evaluation.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc. 3
3 construct both financial and non
financial measures for management
control purposes.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 3
4 calculate the contribution of strategy
implementation to changes in
operating income.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 3
5 identify both the purposes of indirect
cost allocation and the criteria used to
allocate indirect costs.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 2
6 decide how to set up an effective
management control system that fits
the organization’s structure of a
multinational.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 3
7 develop measures for evaluating both
business unit and management
performance as an integrated part of a
management control system in a
multinational setting.
III.8 Int. Fin.Acc 3
Content In this course some of the techniques already covered by basic
117
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
management accounting courses will be elaborated further.
Special attention will be paid to the way these techniques can be
applied in an international environment. Next to this, the course
focuses on the integration between management accounting and
management and organization theory.
The course will develop the student’s ability to perform managerial
cost calculations but also the ability to identify the way the
outcome of these calculations can support the management
function. Furthermore, the course helps the student to develop an
integrated approach to management control in a multinational
organization.
Topics of the course include accounting for decision making
purposes, allocation of indirect (corporate) costs, measures for
general management control purposes, strategic operating income
analysis, aspects of effective management control systems in a
multinational environment and measures for both business unit
and managerial performance.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Cost Accounting, a managerial emphasis , Horngren, Datar &
Rajan
Teaching method(s)
Lecturers
Testing method(s)
Written exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
118
Managing Entrepreneurship and Innovation
Name Educational unit of the minor Managing Entrepreneurship and Innovation
SIS code 6400MEI_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Hagen ([email protected]), Mr. Bout ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
Objective(s) To create alignment between the organizational and managerial
building blocks of a company and its business strategy.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Assess the effectiveness of a business strategy in view of a
companies environment using contemporary theoretical
frameworks.
? Identify the necessary key resources and capabilities to execute
a business strategy
? Describe an organization structure with its departmentalization
approach, coordination mechanisms and job design principles.
? Align an organization structure with a companies’ strategy.
? Explain employee motivation based on contemporary
motivation theories.
? Identify leadership styles and leadership activities.
? Align leadership style with business strategy and employee
motivation.
? Create the right circumstances for effective teamwork.
? Align organizational culture with the organization’s strategy,
structure and leadership style
? Manage the process of change in an organization or
department based on contemporary insights.
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
• The learning objectives are introduced through a combination of
lectures and self-study. Students write a number of papers that
show their mastery of the learning objectives.
•
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Study materials consist of presentations and hand-outs in
addition to articles used for the papers.
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Guest lectures?
Testing method(s)
papers and written central exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
4 papers and 1 written exam; 5 EC’s
Specialities
Back to course overview
119
Multinational Business Foreign Exchange Management
Course code: 4000MFX_11
Course Description: Multinational Bus. Foreign Exchange Man.
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Boumans ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
# Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Multinational
Forex
Management
4011MFX_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1T,
S1H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
This unit of education, foreign exchange management by multinational companies, is a core subject of the IFM
exam program of the main phase H2. It builds on and is an application of the more theoretical 2nd year
introduction to corporate finance (COFVS2), with emphasis on the international financial environment, especially
foreign exchange exposure, of corporations. It is the twin module of MFIVS4FA
Literature used:
J.Madura & R Fox, International Financial Management 2nd ed. Ch 1-11
Subjects :
oreign exchange markets and foreign exchange determination
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisite: 2nd year module Corporate Finance COF (EM-IF-I 2000COF_09) .
MFX is mandatory for IFM students.
MFX is the twin module of MFI, also mandatory for IFM students. The combination MFI+MFX is a full course in
multinational finance: financial markets, economics, foreign exchange analysis and fx-management, investing and
funding, interest and liquidity management.
120
It is an optional module for IBMS students and exchange students from partner schools if they have a thorough
fundamental knowledge of corporate finance and quantitative methods.
Following one of or both the 3rd year courses Bank Management (BMA) and Financial Risk Management (FRM)
is advisable.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1. have the knowledge and the professional attitude necessary for functioning
as an international financial manager working in globally integrated financial
markets
CD2 Professional
competence
3
2. argue ForEx exposure and hedging problems PT7 Financial
management
3
3. use scenario analysis to decisions on the use of ForEx derivatives PT7 Financial
management
3
4. do ForEx forward rate calculations PT7 Financial
management
2
5. use international capital market analysis, cross currency arbitrage, PPP,
IRP, IFE and current/capital account analysis for financial management
decisions.
PT7 Financial
management
2
Methods of work and study hours:
A 3 hours lecture each week. Lecturer hands out and discusses in class a number of mini finance cases relevant
to the topics studied from the book
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lectures/discussions 38
Supervision/Q&A hour 4
Self-study 98
Guest lectures 2
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
International Financial Management J. Madura & R. Fox Thomson 2011 2 9781408032299 Yes
121
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Title Testing material
1 Multinational Foreign Exchange Management exam (written test, 120
min.)
J. Madura & R. Fox 2nd ed. CH 1-
11
and hand-outs by lecturer
Assessed is knowledge of the subjects taught and foremost the ability to apply this knowledge to problems
concerning forex markets and multinational foreign exchange management
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
122
Modern History and Society in Latin America
Course code: 5000MHS_06
Course Description: Modern History and Society in Latin America
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Ms. Vila Roches ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2006
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Modern History
&Society in
Latin America
5006MHS_AS D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
A graduate of International Business and Management interested in doing business in Latin America should know
and be aware of a number of aspects, f.i., history, culture, tradition, politics, economy and development,
influencing not only the attitudes but also the identity of varied groups of population in different Latin American
countries.
This course relates to the professional area International Business Environment and contributes to the personal
development of the professional role of manager because:
1. it is essential for the graduate to be knowledgeable about the historical facts that are at the basis of the present
situation in relevant countries in which he/she would be interested in conducting business.
2. it is important to have developed a social orientation conducive to a responsible, professional ethical behaviour.
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites
For IBMS-students and for interested students of the other IBS-programs: two years of business studies (at least
40 ECTS in the second year). The course is available for exchange students.
Coherence of this course with other courses
This topic is clearly related to the subjects of the Minor Latin America Business Studies:
Latin American Business Culture
Sales Negotiation
Political Economy of Latin America
International Business Law and
Economics of Emerging Countries
Learning goals:
123
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1. Summarize and classify historical facts VI.6: Learning and self-development 2
2. Understand developments in Latin America in a broad
context
V.5: Planning and organising 2
3. Relate contemporary situations to historical facts II.3: International strategic vision
development
3
4. Interpret consequences of historical facts in present times I.1: International business awareness 3
5. Summarize and understand cultural factors influencing
behaviour
VI.6:Learning and self-development 3
6 Justify developments to the proper cultural context from
the past
V.4: Business research methods 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Methods of work: Every week the student will read previous to class prescribed material and write a summary or
prepare a presentation about the topic assigned. In class, he/she will either give a presentation or participate
actively in the question-and-answer round, in which the topics will be analyzed, related to different historic or
current situations and put in the right context.
The student will prepare all reading assignments or presentations, hand in at the requested time all writing
assignments, and contribute to the weekly exchange of information.
Every summary will be graded and participation in class will be assessed individually.
The written assignments need to be handed in at the requested time; the average of the assignments will provide
the course grade.
Time allocated: This module will be offered every semester during 14 weeks, with weekly lectures of 3 hours, 42
hours in total. In addition to this, assignments, self study and weekly tasks amount to roughly 100 hours.
Compulsory attendance: participating in class is necessary to put in perspective, analyze and complete the
information acquired through homework tasks. Students can miss a maximum of two sessions, but will still need
to hand in the work corresponding to the missed sessions. If they miss more without a valid, demonstrable
reason, they will be expelled from the course and will need to re-do it in a next semester.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Understanding
Contemporary Latin
America
Richard S. Hillman /
Thomas J. D'Agostino
Lynne Rienner
Publishers, Inc.
2011 last 978-1-
58826-341-
4
Yes
124
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Description form of test Learning goals Material covered
1 continuous assessment reports (written and/or presentation) 1,2,3,4,5,6 prescribed book
If an assignment is delivered late, the maximum grade will be 5.5
Active participation: relevant contributions to information or interpretation (or lack of them) can improve or reduce
the grade from 0.5 to 1.0 point in the final grade.
Extra information:
This topic is open to exchange students and interested students of the IBS programs.
Back to course overview
125
Marketing in Action
Name Educational unit of the minor Marketing in Action
SIS code 5000MIA_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Kohnstamm ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2
Objective(s) Learn to develop effective solutions to solve marketing problems
by the usage of online and offline marketing instruments.
Learning goals
Student is able:
? to apply the relevant theoretical concepts to solve a
marketing related ‘real life’ problem
? to understand a marketing briefing
? to analyse the briefing in depth by studying the ‘reasons
behind’ the problem mentioned in the briefing
? propose creative solutions to solve the problem as
described in the briefing
? to present the solutions in a convincing way
Content
Students should use all the relevant theory from other (marketing)
courses
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
No extra literature. Usage of relevant marketing literature is
needed to solve the marketing problem mentioned above (under
8)
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, guest lectures, briefing by companies, working in teams
to solve a marketing problem. Coaching during group work.
Testing method(s)
Students receive a briefing from a company X: we have problem Y
on market Z. Goal is to solve the problem and present the solution
to company X.
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 project assignments: 2,5 EC’s per assignment
Specialities Each term two companies will brief the students about a specific
marketing problem the company is facing on a specific market.
Problems are always based on ‘real life situation’ in a specific
market. Representatives of the company will form the jury to judge
the proposed solutions of the best teams in a class.
Back to course overview
126
Marketing Communication
Course code: 3000MKC_12
Course
Description:
Marketing Communication
Module area: EM-IBS – I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s):
Ms. Rusthoven ([email protected]), Ms. Petkova ([email protected]), Mr. Cabral
([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2012
Applied Ac.Year: 2014 - 2015
Study year: 3
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Written test 3012MKC_TS D NA Test
(written)
C C S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
2 Marketing
Communications
Plan
3012MKC_PJ D NA Project D D S1, S2 0 40
3 Assignments
International
Advertising
3012MKC_OP D NA Assignment D D S1, S2 0 10
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Contents and topics in the course:
In this course students will learn the essence of marketing communications and its role within the marketing
function for an organization. They will also learn how to set up an international marketing communications plan for
an international product or service in a country or region.
Special attention is given to cross cultural marketing communications and international advertising specifically.
National culture poses a challenge for global marketing companies and agencies in the choice between
standardized and localized approach in marketing communications, which would be examined in more detail
throughout the course.
Coherence with other units of education:
Marketing Communications is a follow up of the courses attended in year 1 and 2 Marketing Management and
127
Market Research. In international advertising part, there is a big relevance to Cross Cultural Analysis course that
students completed in year 1. There is also a direct relationship between Strategic Marketing course that students
also follow in year 3, as the company’s marketing communications reflect and support the company’s overall
marketing strategy.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals IBL Competencies Level
1. Explain various aspects of integrated marketing communications such as
communication objectives, strategy and communication mix
1.1, 1.2,6.1, 9.1, 11.3 1
2. Summarise different elements of successful branding and global branding 1.1, 1.2, 6.1, 6.2, 11.3 1
3. Discuss the influence of culture on international communication 10.1, 10.4, 10.5, 11.3 1
4. Put together a sound SWOT analysis of the company and decide which
outcomes of the SWOT give direction to a new Marketing Communications
Plan
1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1,
4.2, 6.1
3
5. Develop a Marketing Communications Plan 1.2, 4.3,4.4, 5.2, 5.4,
6.1
3
6. Review existing international advertising campaigns and programs 5.1, 5.4, 9.2, 10.1 3
7. Produce a briefing for a marketing communications agency 1.2, 4.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.6 3
8. Demonstrate ability to work well in a team on the assignments related to the
subject (deadlines, individual contribution and cooperation)
8.1-8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 10.5,
11.1, 11.2
3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 56
Project 33
Self-study 28
Guest lectures/working visits 2
Assignment(s) 7
Presentations 7
Exams 2
Feedback sessions 5
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
128
Yes
Integrated Advertising, Promotion and
Marketing Communications Global
Edition, 6/E
Kenneth Clow and
Donald Baack
Pearson
Education
2013 6 9780273786986 Yes
Lecture slides, relevant articles provided by the
teacher
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
1. Written exam covering theory of both Marketing Communications and International Advertising. The test
will consist of multiple choice and case questions.
2. A practical MKC part (test 2 Decentral) Setting up a marketing communication plan in a project group
of min.3 and max 5 people as well as a presentation of the plan for feedback.
3. International advertising assignment (test 3 Decentral) to be made in project groups of min. 3 max 5
people
Test Test format Weight Description
1 Test (Central) 50 % 1) Kenneth E. Clow, Donald E. Baack, Integrated Advertising, Promotion and
Marketing Communications Global Edition, 6/E, ISBN: ISBN-10: 0273786989
2) Lecture Slides and any in class material
2. MKC Plan 40% Marketing Communications Plan (report) (35%)+ Presentation of the MKC plan
during the semester for feedback prior to the MKC plan deadline (5%)
3. Advertising
Assignment
10 % An assignment on the comparison of two advertisements
Rules:
The written exam can be retaken during B2, B4 and H1 and H2 while project part (Test 2 and 3) can only be
retaken during the following (new) semester. Therefore, cannot be resit during the same semester.
If a student failed the MKC plan, he/she may not choose the same company to write an MKC plan about in the
new semester. The list of the companies that are not allowed for the MKC plan will be provided by the lecturer.
The subject of the MKC plan has to be approved by the lecturer prior to commencing the MKC plan.
Students, who previously failed separate exams of IAD or MKC, have to take one written test instead which
combines theory of both.
Students who fail to show up to class within the first two weeks of the course start date will not be allowed to be
placed into groups and complete the MKC plan and the International Advertising Assignment.
Students who failed an MKC plan or the International Advertising assignment previously must contact the teacher
within 2 weeks of the course start date in order to make arrangement of re-sitting those assignments and in
order to be placed in groups. Failure to do so would mean that it will not be possible to resit the assignments that
semester.
Students with less than 80% attendance will be not be allowed to submit the MKC plan, do the presentation or
submit the International Advertising Assignment.
Attendance of the presentation is mandatory for all group members. Failure to attend the presentation will result in
no grade for the presentation.
In order to pass the course, students have to achieve a 5,5 average of the central and decentral exams, given
that the written test grade has a minimum of a 5,0
Back to course overview
129
Marketing in Latin America
Name Educational unit of the minor Project Marketing in Latin America
SIS code 6100MLA_13
Teacher(s) Ms. Andersen ([email protected]
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s)
Learning goals
This is a marketing course intended for students, interested in a
project approach to marketing which will address urban Latin
American areas. The course aims at showing students
the marketing approach of companies operating in the region.
Students will be given opportunities to confront with real
challenges of Latin America companies to selling their goods and
services within the region.
Content
The course focuses on a project approach and uses analytical
tools to understand how Latin American companies market their
goods and services within Latin America. Industries that are of
particular interest include, but are not restricted to: Retail,
Consumer Goods, Services, Technology, Financial services, Oil
and Gas, Agriculture, Travel, and Life Sciences – companies will
be selected within these industries.
Due to the size of the region, a restricted number of Latin
American countries will be used as case studies.
Literature and other The study material will be provided by the lecturer during the
course.
Teaching method(s)
The class approach includes cases that require analysis and
group discussions. Due to the fact that in many Latin American
countries, culture and social class divisions affect consumer
demand for products and services, the informal economy is one of
the areas of attention of the course, from a marketing mix
standpoint. The use of social media and other are technological
advances is also implemented in the cases.
Testing method(s)
Continuous assessment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 ECs
Specialities Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the
entire minor
Back to course overview
130
Dutch for Exchange Students 1
Course code: 5000N01_05
Study Program IBMS
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Ms. Schuitemaker ([email protected])
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1
writing and
reading
5005N01_T1
D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
90 50
2
listening and
speaking
5005N01_T2
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
15 50
Contents and topics in the course:
To interact with somebody is crucial to understand what he or she is saying. This course will help to communicate
in practical, everyday situations. It covers different themes spread over 9 lessons, with examples over everyday
language use, mainly in the form of dialogues, notes on language use, vocabulary lists and brief grammar notes.
Two CD's are included with exercises to train listening comprehension and pronunciation.
Topics in the course are
1. How are you?/ A party /Three years ago
2. Making a call and writing an e-mail/ Letters and sounds/Home/ Fill in a form
3. Which tram?/At the Central station/One more question/Time
4. In de trein/ Met de fiets/Een fiets huren
5. In het café/In de supermarkt/op de borrel
6. In de keuken/In een restaurant/Aan tafel
7. Een concert/Een quiz/Televisie kijken
8. Wat doe jij aan?/Een interview/ Naar de bioscoop
Coherence with other units of education:
This module makes a contribution towards learning the communication skills required for international work. The
student learns how to establish and maintain international business relationships. This skill is especially geared to
a Dutch-speaking environment and culture.
Learning goals:
The student can: Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of
most immediate personal relevance, catch the main point in short, clear, simple
messages and announcements.
Understanding -
listening
A1
2 Understand familiar names, words and very simple sentences, for example on
notices and posters
Understanding-
reading
A1
3 Interact in a simple way provided the other person is prepared to repeat or
rephrase things at a slower rate of speech.
Speaking - interaction A1
4 Can ask and answer simple questions in areas of immediate need or on very
familiar topics
Speaking - spoken
interaction
A1
5 Use simple phrases and sentences to describe where he lives and people he Speaking - spoken A1
131
knows. production
6 Fill in forms with personal details. Understanding- writing A1
Methods of work and study hours:
The method follows the communicative approach.
Students must train their listening comprehension and pronunciation by individual self-study and class activities
like listening exercises, reading practices, role-plays, interviews and working in pairs.
On the 84 hours that the student should spent on this subject, the distribution is as follows: 2 contact hours a
week with active participation in listening, reading, writing and speaking activities. The classes will involve active
participation of students and preparation at home of exercises.
The language of instruction will be Dutch. English will only be used if needed for explanation
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test no. Type of test Subject matter
1 knowledge /skills test, written test chapter 1 - 8 at maximum
2 knowledge/skills test, oral test chapter 1 - 8 at maximum
Furthermore students can only sit an oral or written test of the N01 program if and only if, in addition to the above
condition, they actively participated in 80% of the given classes during the semester. They must participate in 3
out of 4 preparatory tests. If this requirements is not met, then the first possibility to sit the above mentioned
exams is in the resit period.
Back to course overview
132
Political Economy of Latin America
Name
Education
al unit of
the minor
Political Economy of Latin America
SIS code 5000PEL_13
Teacher(
s)
Mr. Chavez Miños ([email protected])
Language English
Number
of ECTS
5
Number
of contact
hours per
week
distribute
d over 20
teaching
weeks
3
Objective
(s)
To provide students with useful knowledge about social and business practices of trade
and commerce in Latin America;
To help students reflect about skills, attitudes and behaviours needed to achieve success
while working/living in Latin America.
Learning
goals
# The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1
Recognize the trajectories and drivers of economic, social and
political development in Latin America
I.1. International business
awareness
1
2
Recognize the relationship between region-wide processes
and trends and specific national public policies.
I.1. International business
awareness
2
3
Identify Latin America's development strategies and modes of
insertion into the world economy.
I.1. International business
awareness
2
4
Explain Latin America's responses to current economic
challenges for economic growth and democratic governance.
I.1. International business
awareness
2
5
Participate in the implementation of a collective research
project, reasoning and negotiating individual perspectives and
cooperating with other team members
IV.2. Cooperation
IV.3. Business
communication
V. Business research
methods
6
Debate research findings, being able to give and receive
feedbacks
IV.3. Business
communication
Contents
This course focuses on the interaction between markets, state, and society in the context of Latin
America. In the past three decades, the region has experienced a double transition: (1) from
authoritarian to democratic rule, and (2) from a state-led and inward-focused development strategy to
an outward-oriented and market-led model of insertion into the world economy. These parallel trends
have resulted in diverse outcomes throughout the region, including the expansion of left-of-centre
governments in recent years.
The course addresses the core social, economic and political transformations that have taken place
in contemporary Latin America. It discusses the main policy changes and development challenges
faced by the countries of the region, focusing on the patterns of dissemination of market-oriented
policies, the transition to democratic governance, the reactions to change from diverse social and
economic groups, the impacts of reforms implemented since the mid-1980s, and the “post-reform”
policy agenda.
The course provides a platform for students of international business to understand and analyse the
great transformations that have reshaped the region, including the historical background and
133
theoretical rationale of national policies. By means of specific case-studies, similarities and
differences between and within countries are placed into a comparative perspective. As such, the
course intends to give a more critical counterweight to the dominant analytical approach, by drawing
attention to social and political factors and impacts beyond pure economics and the current search
for alternatives.
Literature
and other
There is no textbook that covers all the subjects of this course. The lecturer will assemble a reader
that will supplement what will be taught in class. The contents of the reader will be updated at the
beginning of each semester.
Teaching
method(s
)
The course begins with a review of the development strategies implemented in Latin America
between the 1950s and the 1980s, followed by a deeper analysis of the politics of market-led reforms
of the 1990s and 2000s. The course then moves to a more focused examination of the diversity of
governance models and economic and social policies currently evolving in the region.
During the second part of the course, students will engage in team research projects. Course
participants will be divided into groups to work on a common research project focused on a specific
Latin American country and a relevant research problem involving economic, political and social
variables. The group research findings will be the focus of both written and oral presentations at the
end of the course.
Attending classes is compulsory. The course relies on ample use of audiovisual resources, and
active student participation is expected in class discussions; therefore attendance is critical. Students
with excessive unjustified absences may be asked to leave the course.
Testing
method(s
)
Test
#
Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Research report Report
1,2,3,4,5 Chapters 1 – 5
2 Research presentation Presentation
1,2,3,4,5,6 -------
3 Written exam Test (written)
1,2,3,4,6 Chapters 1 – 5
Number
of tests
and the
connecte
d number
of ECs
5 ECs
Specialiti
es
Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the entire minor
Back to course overview
134
Personal Leadership
Course code: 5000PRL_12
Course Description: Personal Leadership
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Ms. Van Woudenberg-Swicegood ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2012
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1 Personal
Leadership -
Essay
5012PRL_PA D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 50
2 Personal
Leadership -
Portfolio
5012PRL_PO D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 50
Contents and topics in the course:
The Personal Leadership course consists of seven training sessions and a feedback session.
The objective of the course is that students learn how to develop themselves into leaders. A natural first step for
that to happen is through personal leadership.
Each training session focuses on a particular topic that embraces different aspects of personal leadership. These
topics are introduced by the lecturer, and are expected to be further researched and analyzed by the student.
The basis for this course in Covey's book "The 7 habits of highly effective people".
“Every human has four endowments- self awareness, conscience, independent will and creative imagination.
These give us the ultimate human freedom... The power to choose, to respond, to change.” Stephen R.Covey
This course focuses on developing inter- and intra-personal competencies, fundamental in the development of an
effective and ethically responsible professional.
Coherence with other units of education:
There is a close link to the modules of Personal Development that are taught in year 1.
135
Learning goals:
Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1 Explain how taking responsibility can affect
his/her ability to handle personal and
professional challenges in an effective manner.
Understand pro-activity and the circle of
influence.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
1,2
2 Develop a personal vision of the professional
he/she aspires to be, and articulates it by
means of an action plan.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
3
3 Become aware of new time management
techniques and how to incorporate those into
daily life.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
3
4 Learn more about his/her personality
preferences and how they influence behaviour
and choices.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
3
5 Explain the importance of self-discipline and
how it impacts his/her overall success.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
2,3
6 Understand the importance of listening and
win/win situations.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
2,3
Methods of work and study hours:
Credit load and study burden
Total study load comprising: 84 hours
Seven training sessions and a final feedback session 16 hours
Independent study (reading and homework assignments) 50 hours
Individual vision paper on the business professional 20 hours
Course overview
Week Sessions Topics and assignments
136
1 Session 1 Introduction, overview of the programme
2
Session 2 Responsibility and pro-activity
3 Session 3 Personality preferences
4
Session 4 Ambition, personal mission statement
Workbook assignments
5 Session 5 Time management
Workbook assignments
6
Session 6 Interpersonal leadership and communication
Workbook assignments
7 Session 7 Interpersonal leadership and communication
Workbook assignments
8
Session 8 Final presentations, Wrap up.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective
People
Stephen R.
Covey
Free
Press
latest 0-7432-6951-
9
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
This course comprises five portfolio assignments, each worth 10% of the final grade as well as one final
assignment worth 50% of the final grade. Students are expected to work individually on the assignments
throughout the semester and hand them in on time.
Students are expected to come to class prepared by reading “The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People”.
Students need to read between 50-100 pages per week.
This is an interactive class so class attendance is mandatory. Missing more than two lessons leads to failure of
the course.
The student passes the course if the average of the graded assignments is 5.5 or higher.
Back to course overview
137
Sales Negotiation & Culture
Course code: 5000SAN_09
Course Description: Sales Negotiation & Culture
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Zwarthoed ([email protected]), Ms. Van Buschbach ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2009
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 continuous
assessment
5009SAN_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 40
2 assignments 5009SAN_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Decentral S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 30
3 negotiation
exam
5009SAN_T3 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Decentral S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 30
Contents and topics in the course:
In business life one frequently faces situations that require negotiating. To do business successfully the
professional business man or woman must possess communication skills inherent to negotiation processes; they
must also have acquired the ability to deal with cultural differences. A professional business education must
provide students with the knowledge of, and especially tools for, cross-cultural negotiations. This is true,
regardless of whether one starts a company of his own, or chooses employ in an other company.
This training module enables the student to train and develop their negotiating skills, and adopt a flexible
approach to cultural differences.
During the first part of the course the emphasis is on basic techniques and skills for negotiators. Students receive
negotiation roles for each week, which they have to prepare for in writing, describing the outcomes they wish to
achieve. In class these negotiations are acted out by students, and the trainer comments on their negotiating style
and approach.
In the second part of the course the intercultural aspects become part of the negotiating simulations students
must do. Negotiating students now see themselves confronted by communications styles they were not expecting.
Dealing with them adequately, and incorporating a so-called "culture-neutral" attitude in one's negotiating style,
are the main objectives of the second part of the training course.
Besides the training activities students must complete several assignments. They hand in preparations for
negotiations; they must observe other students while negotiating and write an observation report -including advice
for improvement-; and they must analyse and discuss an intercultural negotiation case study.
During the various parts of the course links will be made, when possible, with activities students need to perform
for other parts of the minor Entrepreneurship and LABS. Mainly, these links will be found in the negotiating
138
simulations.
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites
This course is mandatory course in the minors Entrepreneurship and Latin American Business Studies. To
participate students need to have completed 40 credits or more in the second year of the IBMS programme.
Coherence of this course with other courses
In the course theories discussed in Cross cultural awareness (CCA) are applied to negotiating situations and
topics.
The negotiation exercises present business situations and problems related to financial and general management
areas, as well as situations that young entrepreneurs may face. In the second part of the course cultural
influences on negotiating processes and styles are included, and attention is paid to specific features of Latin
American cultures.
The skills that students develop during the course may be to their advantage when looking for a placement.
As far as applicable, the criteria for the various reports that students write during the course are similar to those
for the thesis.
All study activities are also assessed on the quality of business English.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Sum up the basic concepts of negotiation
theory;
Business Communication 1
2 Describe the strategies and tactics for
negotiations.
Business Communication 1,2
3 Recognise strategies and tactics used by himself and
others;
Learning and self development 3
4 Point out the effect of cultural variables on
communication
Intercultural competency 2,3
5 Identify common ground in a conflict
situation;
Ethical responsibility 3
6 Discriminate between process and result focussed
negotiations
Leadership 3
7 Identify negotiating styles
Business communication 3
8 Discriminate between wants and needs
Planning and organising 2
9 Construct a plan to negotiate;
Planning and Organising 3
10 Use various styles and tactics in a negotiation;
Business communication 3
11 Demonstrate a professional approach during the negotiating
process
Learning and self development 3
12 Use fluent and correct business English (oral and written)
Business communication 3
139
13 Give arguments for specific strategic choices;
Business research 2
14 Compare negotiating styles in different
settings;
Business communication 2
15 Paraphrase arguments, opinions and feelings Business communication 3
16 Interrelate cultural determinators and negotiation approach
Intercultural competency;
Business communication
3
17 Interpret the effectives of negotiating
styles
Learning and self development 2
Methods of work and study hours:
During the first part of the course the emphasis is on basic techniques and skills for negotiators. Students receive
negotiation roles for each week, which they have to prepare for in writing, describing the outcomes they wish to
achieve. In class these negotiations are acted out by students, and the trainer comments on their negotiating style
and approach.
In the second part of the course the intercultural aspects become part of the negotiating simulations students
must do. Negotiating students now see themselves confronted by communications styles they were not expecting.
Dealing with them adequately, and incorporating a so-called "culture-neutral" attitude in one's negotiating style,
are the main objectives of the second part of the training course.
Besides the training activities students must complete several assignments. They hand in preparations for
negotiations; they must observe other students while negotiating and write an observation report -including advice
for improvement-; and they must analyse and discuss an intercultural negotiation case study.
Compulsory attendance
Each class is devoted to the training and development of specific skills. Attendance is mandatory for 80 %.
Attending classes:36 hours
Preparing for class:5 hours per class* 12=60 (reading and preparing negotiation case)
Assignments: research and writing: 42 hours
Exam: 2 hours
Total workload=140 hours.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Edition ISBN Required
Intercultural Sales Negotiations Various HvA 2012 n.a. Reader number 073 Yes
Hand-outs Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
140
#
1 cont.
assessment
assessment 1,2,4,5,8,12,13 Reader Intercultural sales Negotiations: all
chapters
2. Assignments written
reports
3,4,6,7,8,9,12,14,16,17 Chapters 1,2,3 Reader Intercultural
Negotiations
3. Oral exam oral 5,10,11,15 Exam Case
# Description Catalogue
Nbr.
Grading
basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 continuous
assessment
D n.a. assessment decentral n.a. B2;B4 n.a. 40%
2 Assignments D n.a. Assignment decentral decentral B2;B4;H1;H2 n.a 30%
3 oral
negotiation
exam
D n.a. Oral decentral decentral B2;B4;H1;H2 2 hour 30%
1. Continuous assessment
a. attendance: 80%=6
b. scores pop quizzes: 3 positive scores=6. The quizzes assess the degree to which the student has read the
literature.
c. adequate preparation plans : 3=6. preparations are based on negotiation role plays.
The average of a,b,c is the grade for test 1.
2. Assignments
a. Observation report
b. Intercultural case study
c. Exam preparation
The average of a,b,c is the grade for test 2
3. Oral exam
Students are given the negotiation exam case two weeks in advance. During the negotiation they are individually
assessed.
Back to course overview
141
Supply Chain Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Supply Chain Management
SIS code 6100SCME13
Teacher(s) Mr. Draijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2,5
Objective(s) ? create insight into logistic and financial processes, the
management of this processes and integration of these
processes with the supply chains.
? integration, inter relationship, cooperation and chain
optimalization are in the textbooks considered to be the
key of successful Supply Chain Management.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-
do’-statements
The student can apply MRP-1 and MRP-2 schemes.
The student can explain the concepts of materials
management and apply this.
The student can describe the main concepts of procurement
The student can explain the different relationships with
suppliers and related logistics concepts
supply chain strategies to describe and identify in practice
supply chain stages and can describe and apply in practice
supply chain stages and can describe and apply in practice
identify best practices in the above fields Compile and
execute quick scan research within an enterprise.
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
Logistics theory versus Supply chain management
Apply practical knowledge of logistics within the supply chain.
Supply Chain Council Operations Reference Model.
Use of Advanced Planning and Optimizer, SAP SCM.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
logistics and supply chain management Martin Christopher
Printence Hall 2011 latest 0273731122
Teaching method(s)
lectures, tutorials, training
Testing method(s)
Portfolio
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
1. 5 ECs
Specialities SAP ERP and guest lecture University of Economics and Law
studies Berlin.
Back to course overview
142
Strategic Enterprise Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Strategic Enterprise Management
SIS code 6100SEME13
Teacher(s) Mr. Knippenburg ([email protected]), Mr. Van Roosmalen
([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2,5
Objective(s)
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? The student must be able, with the financials ratios, to
judge about the financial situation of a company and
understand that he, as a manager, can help to increase
the liquidity by using JIT f.i.
? The student must be able to make a planning for one or
more divisions (on an operational level), within the area
of the economic situation of a country.
? The student must within the framework of responsibility
accounting be able to explain and defend the differences
between the desired and actual goals
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Searching for literature and other study stuff
Some stuff will be delivered by the lecturer
Teaching method(s)
Lectures and project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Portfolio
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
1. 5 ECs
Specialities
Back to course overview
143
Strategic Marketing/Strategic Market Management
Course code: 3000SMK_10/5000STM_09
Course
Description:
Strategic Marketing
Module area: EM-IBL-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s):
Mr. Molenaars ([email protected]), Ms. Andersen ([email protected]), Mr.
Janssen ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1 Theory
Examination
3010SMK_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
2 Strategic
Plan (Group
Assignment)
3010SMK_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
Contents and topics in the course:
This unit of education provides students with a complete overview of the core concepts of strategic market
management.
Topics are:
- Definition of a business strategy
- Role of strategic market management
- External analysis and customer analysis
- Competitor analysis
- Market/submarket analysis
- Environmental analysis and strategic uncertainty
- Internal analysis
- Creating, adapting & implementing strategy (i.e. alternative value propositions; building and managing brand
equity; energizing the business; leveraging the business; creating new businesses; global strategies; setting right
investment strategy and harnessing the organization).
Coherence with other units of education:
Prior knowledge of the basics of Marketing Management is essential. Also, all prior courses in Market Research
(needed for strategic analysis); Management & Organization and Management Accounting/Financial Accounting
have brought important knowledge and skills to students that will be needed in this course.
144
Learning goals:
No. Learning goal IBL-Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Choosing appropriate research methods to carry out relevant market
research
I-2 3
2 Analyzing and understanding a business in depth both internally and
externally
I-3 3
3 Interpret outcomes of external and internal analysis aiming at
development of best possible business strategy/-ies
I-4 3
4 Understanding the organizational consequences when implementing
the best possible business strategy/-ies (ad 3)
I-4 3
5 Work together in a (mostly multi-national) group with others in a
constructive and business-like way
II-8;III-10; III-11 3
6 Informing and convincing others through business-like presentations II-9 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 33
Self-study 30
Working on group assignment (strategic market plan) 57
Supervision/Q&A hour 20
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Strategic Market Management
(Global Perspectives)
D. Aaker & D.
McLoughlin
John Wiley &
Sons
2010 978-0-470-
68975-2
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test no. Test form Material
1 Theory examination (multiple Chapters 1 to 15
145
choice questions plus open questions)
2 Strategic market plan (group assignment)
Test 1:
Lecturers can make a mock exam available on request so students have an idea of what to expect for the theory
exam.
Test 2:
Students will be formed in groups of 4-6 students. Job: analyzing the external environment (I), analyzing the
internal environment (II) and developing a suitable business strategy (III) for an existing company/business unit.
Students will have to deliver group presentations on part I, II and III which will all be graded. Final grade for test 2:
average grade for part I, II and III of test 2.
Extra information:
A minimum attendance of 80% is required.
Group presentations, part of the group assignment, are to be considered as official exams. In other words, no
show=no grade.
Back to course overview
146
Stock Valuation (Investment Analysis)
Name Educational unit of the minor Stock Valuation/Investment Analysis
SIS code 5000STV_12
Teacher(s) Mr. Jacobs ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) Stock valuation (asset management) is a course offered to 3rd
and 4th year students. It is a course which explains at an
advanced level the determinants of stock prices
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
1 Point out how different indexes are
being composed and interpret
changes in index values.
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
I.1 Int. Business
Awareness
2,3
1,2,3
2 Calculate the return on various
forms of investments
III.8 2,3
3 Sum up the recurrence of the most
important bubbles and bursts in our
financial history and indicate the
common denominators of these.
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
4 Decipher and compare the two
main branches of analysis,
technical and fundamental.
III.8
2,3
5 Use the Gordon Growth Model in
calculating the intrinsic value of a
common stock and interpret the
outcome
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
6 Calculate bond values. III.8
2,3
7 Reproduce the capital asset pricing
model.
III.8
2,3
8 Summarize the role of behavioural
finance in financial markets
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
9 Explain what kind of asset
allocation strategies are feasible to
investors and judge their
implications.
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
10 Write an investment report for a
stock listed company and come up
with a recommendation to buy, hold
III.8
I.1
IV.2
2,3
1,2,3
1,2
147
or sell the stock. V.4 1,2,3
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
The module stock valuation/investment analysis focuses on
financial markets and financial instruments from an investor's
perspective (as opposed to corporate finance where the
company's perspective prevails).Different investment opportunities
available to investors will be discussed, including bonds, mutual
funds, trackers and of course common stocks. Special attention
will be paid to the two branches of analysis, technical and
fundamental. A special feature of the course is the analysis of the
history of markets, with the recurrence of bubbles and bursts. We
will further touch upon behavioural finance, modern portfolio
theory, the capital asset pricing model and asset allocation.
Throughout the course, students will be required to analyze and
interpret financial data from different sources and to participate
actively in classroom discussion.
Finally students will work in teams on an investment report,
thereby putting theory into practice
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Burton G. Malkiel, A Random Walk down Wall Street
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class, , project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Written exam and Investment Report
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
148
Treasury Management Project
Course code: 4000TMP_11/6100TMPE13
Course Description: Treasury Management Project
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Boumans ([email protected]), Mr. Koster ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weigh
1
Treasury
Management
Project
4011TMP_AS
G NVT Assessment
Decentral
Decentral
S1T, ,
S1H,
S2T
S2H
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
The management of money flows is a hot item for many companies. Good treasury management saves money.
Great savings in management and bank costs can be achieved by centralising money flows - millions of Euros a
year for large multinationals.
In the TMP module the students use an ERP system (in this case SAP ERP) to work in the field of Treasury
Management. In this module the ERP system used, SAP, is not a goal in itself, but provides a means of
experiencing the many aspects of treasury management. The emphasis lies on anything to do with the
management of money flows. Tendering, winning orders, purchasing, invoicing, payments and receipts, and
reacting to liquidity shortages / surpluses – all in different currencies – generate the problems that every treasurer
has to deal with.
In groups of four, students are responsible for the cash/forex/treasury management of a (virtual) consultancy
company.
In relation to the final objectives of the IFM program, in the Treasury Management Project students obtain
operational knowledge of and skills in financial accounting, financial markets, the use of instruments and
derivatives in treasury management, and in the application of SAP.
Specific learning objectives are that at the end of the TMP, students will have applied the following competences:
-analysis, pro forma balance sheets and income statements,
-analysis
exchange rate exposure of imports from and exports to non-euro-countries
fore exposure using currency forwards, swaps and options
149
payable management
-of-capital of exceeding credit terms;
Prerequisites
At least 2nd year IFM level knowledge of Corporate Finance , Financial Accounting and Macroeconomics
Coherence of this course with other courses
In this unit of education the knowledge and competencies of the 4th year's courses Financial Accounting and
International Financial Management (MFX and MFI) are applied to "real life" treasury problems. Students do the
job of cash/forex manager / treasurer in a virtual company using SAP ERP.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals Program profile
competences
level
1 Knowledge of financial markets and financial
instruments
PT7 (financial mgt) 3
2 Management of money flows PT7 (financial mgt) 3
3 Management of information
of these money flows (here using SAP ERP)
PT7 (financial mgt) 3
4 Report (written and orally) adequately CD4 Social and communicative
performance
2
5 Understand that in real life financial
management you always deal with uncertainty
PT7 (financial mgt) 3
6 Work and solve problems within a team CD4 Social and communicative
performance
2
7 Learn to take criticism and use it
to your advantage
CD4 Social and communicative
performance
2
8 Take initiative CD3 Business performance 2
Methods of work and study hours:
Attendance is compulsory. In groups of four, students in their role of cash/forex manager or treasurer solve
financial problems that a small company encounters. The teacher acts as consultant. Besides, the teacher plays
the roles of the owner of the company, of banker, forex and option dealer, and more if necessary. Material is
handed out sketching problems. Missing but necessary information students have to find out themselves, from
outside sources and/or from their teacher/consultant. Asking the right questions is as important as coming up with
solutions.
A number of short memos have to be written
150
Work method Total study hours per semester
Tutorials 20
teamwork on assignments 120
total study hours ( 1credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
International Financial Management J. Madura & R.
Fox
Thomson 2011 2 9781408032299 No
TMP syllabus and handouts available on
line and via SAP-mail
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
There is no central test.
For the assessment of the work performed, it is the whole process that counts and takes place during and at end
of the project. The assessment is based on
The resulting grade is for the whole group, although individual adjustments can be made.
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
doc_462438199.pdf
This detailed elucidation regarding hogeschool van amsterdam entrepreneurship.
1
Course book
Fall 2014
(SEMESTER 1: 2014-2015)
For Incoming Exchange Students
Hogeschool van Amsterdam
Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences
School of Economics and Management
2
Welcome to the School of Economics and Management of the Amsterdam University of Applied
Sciences (Hogeschool van Amsterdam / HvA). The School of Economics and Management offers
education to about 14,000 students. It is not only the largest school of the Amsterdam University of
Applied Sciences (AUAS) but also the largest faculty of business-students in the Netherlands.
We are proud to offer our incoming students a wide variety of business-related courses in for instance
Marketing, Finance, Economics, Human Resources, ICT, etc. Moreover, we hope that you will benefit
from the Dutch educational approach, our dedicated lecturing staff and your fellow students. All of
which is meant to enable you to successfully study and live in one of the vibrant hearts of Europe.
Enjoy your time with us!
Postal Address:
Hogeschool van Amsterdam
Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences
School of Economics and Management
International Centre, (Back office: room 4.109)
P.O. Box 22575
1100 DB Amsterdam Z.O.
The Netherlands
Visiting Address:
Fraijlemaborg 133
1102 CV Amsterdam Z.O.
Telephone : +31 (0)20 523 6960
Fax : +31 (0)20 620 6801
E-mail : [email protected]
Website : www.hva.nl/sem-exchange
3
Table Of Contents
Part Content Page
A Selecting Courses 5
1 Introduction 5
1.1 Requirements 5
1.2 Academic Calendar 5
2 Registration for Classes 6
3 Elements of the Course Description 8
3.1 Course Name and Module Code 8
3.2 ECTS credits 8
3.3 Examinations 9
B Minor descriptions (minor = fixed programme of 30 ECTS) 11
1 Business English 12
2 Business of Sports and Events 13
3 Business Process Integration Finance 16
4 Business Process Integration Management 16
5 City Marketing in Europe 18
6 Cross Cultural Business Skills (full time) 21
7 Cross Cultural Business Skills (part time) 23
8 Entrepreneurship 25
9 International Financial Management 37
10 International Marketing Management 39
11 Latin American Business Studies 46
C Sports for Exchange Students 48
D Modules (individual courses) 49
Name module ECTS Course code Study
Programme
Page
Business Ethics 5 5000BET_08 IBL 50
Business Information Systems 5 4000BIS_11 IFM 53
Business Process Simulation 10 6100BPSE13 Minor 56
Controlling and Accounting Project 5
6100CAPE13/
4000CAP_11 Minor/IFM
57
Contemporary Entrepreneurship 5 6400CEP_10 Minor 59
Current Issues in International Business 4 5000CIB_10 IBMS 60
Cases in Entrepreneurship 5 6400CIE_10 Minor 63
Current Issues in Finance 5 5000CIF_10 IBMS 64
Corporate Finance 2 5 5000CO2_06 IBMS 66
Consumer Behaviour 5 5000COB_14 IBMS 68
Demand Chain Management 5 5000DCM_07 IBMS 69
Debating in English 5 5000DEE_08 IBL 70
Development Economics in Asia 3 3000DVE_11 TMA 72
E-commerce 3 4000ECE_11 TMA 75
Economics of Emerging Markets 4 5000ECM_11 IBMS 77
Entrepreneurial Finance 5 6400EFI_10 Minor 80
Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship 5 6400ESP_10 Minor 81
Financial Accounting for Consolidation 5 4000FAC_11 IFM 82
Financial Risk Management 5 5000FRM_13 IBMS 84
4
Globalization and Latin America 3 5000GLA_10 IBMS 86
Human Resource Management 1 3 5000HR1_10 IBMS 98
Human Resource Management 5 6100HRME13 Minor 90
Intercultural Awareness 4 5000ICN_03 IBMS 91
International Financial Accounting 5 5000IFA_13 IBMS 94
International Financial Markets 5 3000IFM_10 IFM 96
International Business Law 5 5000ILW_06 IBMS 99
International Marketing 3 5000IMK_08 IBMS 103
International Money and Finance 3 5000INE_03 IBMS 105
Internet Marketing 5 5000INM_10 IBMS 108
International Trade 3 5000INT_03 IBMS 109
Latin American Business Culture 3 5000LAC_10 IBMS 113
Management Accounting 3 5 4000MA3_11 IFM 114
Management Accounting Techniques 5 5000MAT_06 IBMS 116
Managing Entrepreneurship and
Innovation 5 6400MEI_10 Minor
118
Multinational Business Foreign Exchange
Management 5 4000MFX_11 IFM
119
Modern History and Society in Latin
America 5 5000MHS_06 IBMS
122
Marketing in Action 5 5000MIA_10 IBMS 125
Marketing Communication 5 3000MKC_12 IBL/IBMS 126
Marketing in Latin America 5 6100MLA_13 Minor 129
Dutch for Exchange Students 1 3 5000N01_05 IBMS 130
Political Economy of Latin America 5 5000PEL_13 IBMS 132
Personal Leadership 3 5000PRL_12 IBMS 134
Sales Negotiation & Culture 5 5000SAN_09 IBMS 137
Supply Chain Management 5 6100SCME13 Minor 141
Strategic Enterprise Management 5 6100SEME13 Minor 142
Strategic Marketing/Strategic Market
Management 5
3000SMK_10/
5000STM_09
IBL/TMA/IBM
S
143
Stock Valuation (Investment Analysis) 5 5000STV_12 IBMS 146
Treasury Management Project 5
6100TMPE13/
4000TMP_11 Minor/IFM
148
5
Part A Selecting Courses
This course book provides general instructions on the course enrolment, the organisation of tests and
brief descriptions of all courses which are available for incoming students during the Fall semester of
the academic year 2014-2015. Please note that all the information in this course book may be
subject to change.
1. Introduction
1.1 Requirements
Before students start selecting courses, they should have checked all requirements set by their home
institute.
The selection of candidates is the responsibility of the home institution. The home institute ensures
that students are prepared appropriately for the study abroad programme (academic standard,
language proficiency, motivation etc.). However, the host institution reserves the right to reject any
student whom it considers not meeting its minimum standards, be it academic standards or language
ability.
1.2 Academic Calendar (under reservation!)
Fall 2014 = SEMESTER 1 (Aug. 2014-Jan. 2015)
Spring 2015 = SEMESTER 2 (Jan. 2015- July 2015)
Students are strongly advised to check the most actual schedule on intranet:https://dlwo.dem.hva.nl/en/study/time-tables/
Fall 2014 semester
Arrival days at Schiphol Airport (+ check in at
accommodation)
15 and 18 August 2014
Introduction at HvA (mandatory) 19 August (in the morning)
ISN – Amsterdam introduction 19 (in the afternoon)-22 August 2014
Start lectures 1 September 2014
Autumn Holiday (no lectures) 13-19 October 2014
Exam period (Central exams) 8-19 December 2014
Christmas Holiday 22 December 2014- 4 January 2015
Resit exams 19-25 January 2015
End semester 26 January 2015
Spring 2015 semester
Arrival day at Schiphol Airport (+ check in at
accommodation)
28 January 2015
Introduction at HvA (mandatory) 29 January 2015 in the morning
(under reservation)
ISN – Amsterdam introduction 29-31 January 2015
Start lectures 2 February 2015
Final exams 15-26 June 2015
Resit exams 6-10 July 2015
End semester 17 July 2015
Please bear in mind that it is NOT possible to start the exchange programme later than two weeks
after the start of the lectures. After these 2 weeks, the student has missed too many lectures, and
project groups have already been formed in the first week of the semester. When booking flights,
6
please keep the dates mentioned above in mind. Exam schedules cannot be adjusted to suit an
early departure! It is not possible to do an Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences exam
abroad.
Therefore, we strongly advise to our incoming exchange students to stay in Amsterdam until at
least 26 January 2015 (Semester 1) or 17 July (Semester 2) !
2. Registration for Classes
The School of Economics and Management generally offers education in small to medium-sized
classes. Some courses are offered more than once to give a larger number of students the opportunity
to attend the course. This means that students do not only register for a specific course, but at the
same time they also need to register for a specific day and time at which the concerned course is
offered.
Our School of Economics and Management uses an online registration method for the courses and
timetabling, the Time Table Assembly (TTA). After being accepted, you will receive a login name and
password which gives access to the enrolment site. Within a specified period of time you will register
for courses and thus make your own personal timetable.
In theory, it is possible to compose your own programme out of the courses described in the course
book. This course offering is under reservation, since slight changes and timetable clashes might
occur. However, as there are many alternatives, this should not constitute serious problems. In
principle, registration and timetabling are not open for changes after closing time.
As a rule, a total of 30 ECTS credits is regarded as an appropriate study load for one semester. The
maximum amount of ECTS credits is 33.
Apart from taking individual courses, it is possible to take a so-called minor. This is a one-semester (=
30 ECTS) study programme which consists of a number of fixed, pre-selected courses focusing on a
specific field of study. The minor consists of a number of courses, it is not necessary to pass the full
minor programme to obtain grades for the courses.
The courses you choose constitute your examination programme for the semester.
In the Time Table Assembly, you see different columns and rows. These are the lecture hours. Each
lecture hour takes 50 minutes. The lecture times (the numbers) (except for the part time modules;
these are in the early evening!) are as follows:
Hour Begin time End time
1 08.30 09.20
2 09.20 10.10
BREAK 10.10 10.20
3 10.20 11.10
4 11.10 12.00
5 12.00 12.50
6 12.50 13.40
7 13.40 14.30
8 14.30 15.20
9 15.20 16.10
10 16.10. 17.00
11 17.00 17.50
12 17.50 18.40
13 18.40 19.30
14 19.30 20.20
7
15 20.20 21.10
16 21.10 22.00
17 22.00 22.50
The other elements of the Time Table Assembly refer to the name of the course, the teacher who is
lecturing it and the class room. In addition, information is provided about the number of available
places of that specific class and the number of students that already have enrolled for that class.
We strongly advise you to make a printout of your selection after completion. Do not forget to bring a
printed version of your personal timetable to Amsterdam!
Further instructions on how to register for courses/classes will be emailed to students individually after
admission.
Example:
See for example Mon 3, 4, 5: OAM BDT 1001
(0/30)
The box runs from Mon 3 until Mon 5, this means that this course is lectured on Mondays from the 3rd hour until and
including the 5
th
hour (= 10.10 hrs.-12.40 hrs.)
OAM: abbreviation for course code OAMVH2ES01 (which is Organisation and Management);
BDT: code of the lecturer, in this case Mr. Bout;
1001: number of the classroom;1001 is on the first floor (1), classroom nr. 001
(0/30): there are 30 places in that class and – so far - no students have enrolled.
If all places are taken, you can put yourself in queue for one course, see for example:
Mon 7,8,9, MAB UNG 3029.
8
3. Elements of the Course Description
The course descriptions contain information about the key subjects of the course, prerequisites,
learning goals, assessment matters and the credits awarded on successful completion.
3.1 Course Name and Module Code
Course name and module codes can be found in the heading of the course descriptions. The three-
letter code relates to the name of the subject, which is followed by an exam code.
Please note that the names of the lecturers can change at the beginning of each semester. Therefore,
we always advise students to ask the lecturer for his/her name and e-mail address during the first
lecture.
Since last year, we no longer use the so-called ‘BOE-codes’ anymore (e.g. for the course
‘International Trade’ the BOE-code was INTVH2ES03). These BOE-codes have been adapted into
‘Course Codes’. However; the Course Codes still contain the main 3 letters of the course; for
International Trade (INT) the Course Code is 5000INT_03.
3.2 ECTS credits
Below the module code, you will find the number of ECTS credits which are assigned to the module.
ECTS stands for 'European Credit Transfer Systems', and was developed as part of European Union
(EU) programmes to promote student mobility. It functions as an internationally recognized standard
for describing and weighing courses, meant to facilitate exchanges of students (particularly between
EU member states). The ECTS-system is based on the complete workload of the average student,
including lecture attendance, practical work, personal study and reading for exams. In the ECTS-
system, one credit represents a twenty eight-hour working week, and the standard workload for one
semester is 30 credits.
Example: SMK V H2 EL 04
SMK = Strategic Marketing;
V = Regular fulltime study programme; (V= voltijd = fulltime)
H2, S2, S3 or S4 = 3
rd
/4
th
year of study;
EL = IBL department;
04 = internal code.
The courses offered are selected from several departments or relate to a minor:
ES = IBMS – International Business and Management Studies
EL = IBL – International Business and Languages
FA = IFM – International Financial Management
TA = TMA – Trade Management Asia
IM = IM – International Management
MN = Part of a minor
The basic principles of ECTS are summarised in the ECTS Key Features. More detailed
guidance, answers to frequently asked questions and examples of good practice can be found
in the ECTS Users' Guide published by the European Union.
9
Grading system in the Netherlands
The School of Economics and Management applies the Dutch grading system. Grades are awarded
on a scale from 1 to 10, in which 1 represents the worst possible result, and 10 a brilliant performance.
The minimum for a pass is 5.5.
On the final transcript with grades (= grade list) only round figures will feature. As an example, a grade
between 6.0-6.4 will be rounded down to a 6, a grade between 6.5-6.9 will be rounded up to a 7.
The Dutch grading system, uses from elementary to university education the 1 to 10 scale in the
following table, in which 10 is the highest grade, 6 the minimum pass and 1 the lowest grade. However
9’s are seldom given and 10’s are quite rare. 1-3’s are also not very often used.
Official Dutch grading system:
10 = Excellent
9 = Very good
8 = Good
7 = Satisfactory
6 = Sufficient
5 - 1 = Fail
Sometimes grades are not given but achievements are expressed in words. If that is the case a V is a
pass and a VR is an exemption. The level of achievement is not specified above the minimum level.
The grading table requires universities to keep track of their grading practice and culture, which is
good practice in many institutions across Europe. The ECTS grading table allows for simple,
transparent interpretation and conversion of grades from one system or context to another, and
therefore does justice to the level of academic performance of all learners. Used correctly, it bridges
different grading systems as well as different cultures in the European Higher Education Area and
beyond.
The grading table presents how many students (in percentages) receive a specific grade. This
provides all necessary information to convert the grade in any local grading system.
I.
* based on the total number of grades awarded in the degree programmes during four preceding
years.
Credit System:
A student's workload is measured in ECTS credits. According to Dutch law, one credit represents 28
hours of work and 60 credits represents one year of full-time study. One semester is 30 ECTS.
National / Amsterdam
University of Applied
Sciences Grades
Total number
awarded in reference
group
Grading percentages*
10 12,130 1%
9 62,417 5%
8 285,692 22%
7 509,989 40%
6 414,066 32%
Total 1,284,294 100%
10
3.3. Examinations
As a rule, the students' progress or final results are assessed by examinations held at the end of the
course. Some courses, however, contain or consist entirely of practical work. In those cases, students
performance is assessed per individual or per group (group work), or on the basis of continuous
assessment.
The (usually written) exams at the end of term are scheduled centrally for all groups together; many
practical tests are held in the course of the semester.
During the academic year there are four (central) exam periods for incoming study-abroad students:
Fall 2014 / semester 1: Final exam period in December 2014, centrally organized
Fall 2014 / semester 1: Resit exam period in January 2015, centrally organized
Spring 2015 / semester 2: Final exam period in end of May/June 2015, centrally organized
Spring 2015 / semester 2: Resit exam period in July 2015, centrally organized
A “central” type of exam (or resit) means that the exam is organised by the school, not by a lecturer
individually.
Resit Exams
Students are allowed to do resit exams, only if they have failed the first exam. Generally speaking,
there is a resit opportunity at the end of each semester. The resit exam period is part of the official
academic year. Please note: Our Fall semester ends officially on 26 January 2015. We strongly
advise all students to stay in Amsterdam until these end dates! We will not adjust exam
schedules nor organise any resit opportunities at distance for students who leave earlier.
Exam Clashes
Due to the fact that the courses we offer are part of different programmes and minors, exam clashes
may occur. If this is the case, please contact the International Centre: [email protected].
If you have any questions, please contact us at [email protected].
Let us conclude by wishing you - also on behalf of the programme managers, head of the international
department, International Centre and teaching staff - a very instructive, successful and pleasant period
at the School of Economics and Management.
With kind regards,
Hogeschool van Amsterdam
Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences
School of Economics and Management
International Centre
[email protected]
Ps:
Each semester, we (International Centre) organize a ‘meet and greet’ for the incoming exchange
students, approximately a month after the lectures have started.
This gives the students the opportunity to first get acclimatized in Amsterdam and to get to know their
new study environment. During this ‘meet and greet’, the International Centre will explain more about
the study system at the HvA and about the Dutch grading system. We strongly advise all student to be
present during this meeting. After the presentation, students can ask questions and will meet the staff
members of the International Centre and the Student Counsellor. And of course, we will invite the
students for a drink and some real Dutch ‘bitterballen’.
11
Part B Minor Descriptions (minor = fixed programme of 30 ECTS)
A minor is a one-semester (= 30 ECTS) study programme which consists of a number of pre-selected
courses focusing on a specific field of study. It is not necessary to pass the full minor programme to
obtain grades for the courses.
The following minors (fixed programmes of 30 ECTS) are available in Fall 2014:
To enroll in one of the minors, please contact the International Centre: [email protected] as
it is not possible to enroll for minors with the Time Table Assembly. In your e-mail, please give
your full name (first name and family name) and the name of your home university. And -of
course- give the name of the minor which you would like to follow in Fall 2014.
Full title PAGE
Business English (part time) 12
Business of Sports & Events 13
Business Process Integration Finance 16
Business Process Integration Management 16
City Marketing in Europe (location @ Wibautstraat!) 18
Cross Cultural Business Skills (full time) 21
Cross Cultural Business Skills (part time) 23
Entrepreneurship 25
International Financial Management 37
International Marketing Management (only 5 places available) 39
Latin American Business Studies 46
12
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Business English (Part time program)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Randy Bundel, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To
enroll, you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to
[email protected]. Please mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of
the minor and the International Centre will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the
minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor,
you are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
The Business English course is intended for those motivated Bachelor students who wish to
improve their practical language skills primarily within the field of Business English. The course
focuses on improving both fluency and listening skills in business situations, such as meetings
and telephone conversations, as well as in improving writing skills for business: letters, memos,
faxes and e-mail.
Students will prepare for Cambridge BEC Higher Certificate which will show that they have
learned English to an advanced level and that they can use it in a business context. The
Business English Certificates (BEC) are internationally recognized qualifications that show
employers your skills for using English in the workplace.
This minor relates to the international orientation of Amsterdam. More than ever, a good
knowledge of English is needed to succeed in international business and commerce. If students
can show they have relevant language skills, they'll have a greater advantage in the jobs
market and much greater flexibility if they want to work either abroad or in ICT, creative or
financial services industries in Amsterdam.
The minor consists of the following courses:
? BEC Higher Reading, 6 ects. Examination: written test
? BEC Higher Writing, 6 ects. Examination: written test
? BEC Higher Listening, 6 ects. Examination: written test
? BEC Higher Speaking, 6 ects. Examination: assessment
? English Language Portfolio, 6 ects. Examination: assessment
Minimum participants: 10 / Maximum participants: 60
Department who's offering this minor: Commerciële Economie (part-time)
Study guide number Tuesday and Thursday: 6000MBEN11
Study guide number Saturday: 6000MBEZ11
Semester: 1 (Fall 2014) and 2 (Spring 2015)
Open to: The Business English minor is meant for part-time students of all programmes, inside
and outside the HvA. The Business English course is intended for those students who already
have a reasonable grasp of English.
Requirements:
The entry level of the course is English at (upper) intermediate level (European B1 – B2 level).
The students' actual level of English will be determined by the Diagnostic Placement test at the
start of the course.
13
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Business of Sports and Events (BSE)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mrs. Tinie Denton-Beeker, e-mail: [email protected].
Enrollment
Eleven places in the minor Business of Sports and Events are reserved for incoming study-
abroad students. Students will be expected having followed a general marketing and/or business
study course for at least 2 years as part of their programme. We prefer native English speaking
students or near native.
If you are not native or near-native but very confident of your level of English feel welcome as
well. Last but not least we expect students to have a passion for sports and/or events.
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To
enroll, you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to
[email protected]. Please mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of
the minor and the International Centre will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the
minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor,
you are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
The focus of this minor is on sports- and entertainment events on a global scale. Students will be
offered more profound marketing- and business skills in the specialized industry of sports- and
entertainment. After successful completion of this minor students will have gained insight and
knowledge regarding current developments, the stakeholders and different business models.
Students will also have gained insight in the close relation between sport and entertainment. Last
but not least students will have gained some working experience related to marketing- and/or
business skills in the sport and/or entertainment market.
During the course of the minor students will be offered: lectures, guest-lectures, workshops, visits
to events and/or venues and the opportunity to work on ‘real’ assignments as junior consultants
in a team for ‘real’ clients. Some visits will be paid to ‘local’ events and/or venues as part of the
formal programme (compulsory to attend, costs will be very limited).
A three-day educational trip to London is organized with an exciting program
(at your expense but costs will be limited).
The lecturers involved in this minor use their professional network to secure challenging
assignments and interesting guest-lectures.
The minor Business of Sports and Events programme consists of:
70% : lectures guest-lectures, workshops, assignments (individual & group), work on
portfolios/papers.
30% : practical project activities as junior consultant in a team.
This minor represents 30 ECTS, contact-hours = 240, study-effort = 840 hours (30x28).
Modules
1. International Sport Events & Live Music & Dance Events (SEIVH2MN04) ----- 7 ECTS
International Sport Events (part I)
This subject focuses on large global sports events. First of all we will look into the impact and
14
large scale of these events which attract millions of dollars in sponsor-revenues, huge attention
from media but are also of great importance to society. Why do these cities or countries put
themselves forward as candidate, what is the process from bidding, preparation, execution to
leaving a ‘lasting legacy’? What is the economic and social importance for the upcoming markets
such as the BRIC countries?
Live Music & Dance Events (part II)
This subject demonstrates the characteristics and structure of the live music- as well as dance
sector. The lectures are structured around the following themes:
1. Why do we like events? Sociological and psychological background of the striking popularity and
commercial success of events.
2. Mapping the international scene. The industry, the role and position of agencies and artists,
changing business models and some traits of touring.
3. The business of Dance. This class offers a treaty of scope and depth of dance as a field of
enterprise in the Netherlands.
4. Branding, Identity & Event Marketing. Profiling some of the major Dutch events by alternately
switching from birds-eye-view to looking-glass-view.
Testing: 2 written tests (part I&II) & assessment of papers and portfolio (part I&II).
2. Sponsoring & Media (SPMVH2MN03) ----- 7 ECTS
This subject focuses on current developments in sport sponsoring and media and its
stakeholders. What are the revenue-shares of gate revenues, sponsorship, media rights and
merchandising? What are the differences between geographic markets? What is the impact of
regulators? We will have a closer look at the revenues of top football (soccer) clubs. How do
research agencies contribute to the accountability of investments in sponsorships? Furthermore
attention will be given to the close relation between technology, media and telecommunications.
What are the predictions for these sectors for the current year? What are the different cross-
media-types and different media-buying models used by broadcasters and specifically sport-
programming. What is the difference between the business model of a traditional broadcaster
and a broadcaster offering content business-to-business to distributors. Online search-, video-
and display-advertising are hot topics as well as mobile advertising. Finally, the elements of a
TV-format will be explained and applied in a practical group-assignment.
Testing: 2 written tests & assessment of assignments & portfolio.
3. Sustainability in Sport Events (SUSVH2MN01) ----- 3 ECTS
Sustainability is a topic of managerial interest. Companies have to be more and more aware and
act according to social responsibility. Respect for the environment, human rights and social
topics are part of strategic decisions. This development is also very much present at major
sports- and music events, ‘leaving a lasting legacy’. The main focus of this subject is giving an
insight in developments organizing sustainable events.
Testing: 1 written test & assessment of assignments & portfolio.
4. Project (PRCVS4MN01) ----- 10 ECTS
This subject of the minor allows students to gain experience as a junior consultant. The
knowledge and insights of the theoretical subjects that will be offered during the course of the
minor can be put into practice in the project. Involved lecturers use their international,
professional network to find relevant and challenging assignments for the project Studency
activity. Students will gain experience working in an international team. Each team will consist of
5/6 students and will be responsible for the whole process from brief to delivering a final advisory
report as well as presentation to the client.
Testing: assessment; delivery of final advisory report, final presentation to client, a group- and
individual assessment will all be part of establishing grade for this subject. The findings of the
client will also be taken into account.
15
.
5. Financial & Project Management (FPMVH2MN01) ----- 3 ECTS
This subject of the minor allows students to strengthen their financial- and project management
skills.
Topics in this course: financial aspects of a business plan of an international operating sport
organization, pricing and cost calculations of a sport consultancy agency, financing an
international sport event, project management of events. Students will be able to strengthen their
entrepreneurial skills and apply these skills straight away in their project activities (PRC).
Testing: 1 written test.
Back to minor overview
16
Minor (Fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Business Process Integration:
BPI Finance and BPI Management
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Maarten, e-mail: [email protected] and/or Mr. Dirk-Jan Schenk, e-mail:
[email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To
enroll, you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected].
Please mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the
International Centre will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
Business Process Simulation serves as a basis for the other modules of the minor. In Business
Process Simulation you become an employee of a virtual company with up to 75 employees. For
example, you become a purchasing officer, Personnel Manager, or marketing employee. You take
this function over from your predecessor, because the companies are continued each semester
with a personnel change of almost 100%. The Management, consisting of about three lecturers,
remains. Each semester new projects are set up, in response to the current situation at
comparable companies. The companies at present being simulated are a production company
(SME), a chemical company, a bank and insurance company, a packaging and distribution
company, and a sport consultancy. If there is sufficient student intake, new companies will be set
up, such as a health centre / private hospital, a building company, and/or an airline company. The
BPI minor gives students a deeper understanding of integrated business processes, making use of
an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. The emphasis is on the integration of logistical,
financial, and personnel processes. The course focuses on the analysis of business situations, the
thinking up of alternative solutions, and the making of well-founded choices, in which use must be
made of current information from practice, for example, from visits to comparable companies.
The minor contains a main course plus 2 Specialization courses:
(a student needs to select one of the two specializations: BPI Management or BPI Finance):
BPI Management
? Business Process Simulation, 10 ECTS/ Examination: report & presentation
? Human Resource Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Project Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Supply Chain Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
? Strategic Enterprise Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
BPI Finance
? Business Process Simulation, 10 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
? Human Resource Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Project Management, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & written test
? Controlling and Accounting, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
? Treasury Management Project, 5 ECTS / Examination: report & presentation
17
Minimum participants: 25 / Maximum participants: 200
Department who's offering this minor: International Business and Management Studies (IBMS)
Study guide number: 6000BPME13 (management eng) en 6000BPFE13 (finance eng)
This minor is offered in semester 1 (Fall 2014) and semester 2 (Spring 2015)
Allowed for all students.
Requirements: students with a pass for their Propedeuse exam and with 40ECs in their post
propedeutic phase.
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
:
Back to minor overview
18
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
City Marketing in Europe (IVCF)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mrs. Núria Arbonés Aran, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll. To enroll, please contact
the International Centre: [email protected] and they will enroll you for all courses that are
part of the minor.
IMPORTANT!
? It is not possible to do individual courses from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
? The venue of this minor is the school building at the ‘Jan Bommerhuis’- Wibautstraat 80-86!
? Extra costs: Participants should keep in mind that they will need to make a personal
contribution of around 400 Euros for travel costs.
? Students should check themselves before enrollment for this minor, if they need a visa to
travel to Barcelona (Spain) and Paris (France). If they need a visa, the visa must be arranged
by the student him/herself!
Minor Title City Marketing in Europe IVCF
Faculty Urban Management Program Co-production Faculty Sociology &Law,
Economics &Management and Technology
Available Semester Semester 1 (Fall) 2014-2015
Open to: 3
rd
and 4
th
year students of any discipline (with interest in urban
environments, internationalization, and with Marketing & Communication
Casuistry):
-Marketing
-Communication
-MIM
-European Studies
-Business & Public
Administration
-Commercial Economics
-Interactive Media
- Entrepreneurship
-Sociology
-Psychology
-Urban Studies
What the minor has to offer: This minor is unique opportunity for students because it involves
cooperation with partner educational institutions and trendsetting
initiatives from today’s business world in Amsterdam, Barcelona and
Paris.
Location: The Minor takes place in various locations in the city of Amsterdam with
additional visits to Barcelona and Paris
Contact Information: Núria Arbonés Aran
Email: [email protected]
Minimum Required Students: 30
Maximum Required Students: 60
Overview and Learning Aims:
In the minor City Marketing in Europe (CME) you will gain insight and understanding of the various
methods cities take advantage of in order to advantageously position themselves. In today’s world the
city must compete to remain (or become) attractive to tourists, businesses and even its own
inhabitants. Just a few of the factors that are important for a city’s sustainability and popularity are:
fashion, architecture, culture, nightlife, sport and tourism. You can expect to come in contact with
19
topics like these when taking part in this minor. Part one of the minor is an introduction to city
marketing that not only takes place in the classroom, but in the city itself in the form of excursions and
visits to the businesses involved in making the city what it is. In part two you begin a project where;
together with an international team, lecturers, and business clients, you will learn how to successfully
setup and complete an international marketing & communication assignment.
What’s in it for You?
What you do makes a difference! You will be part of a marketing project from the problem definition in
the beginning, through to the analysis and design, to the presentation of your solution and the
evaluation at the end. This is one of the only programmes in Europe where you can get hands-on
experience with international collaboration, Educational expertise from three educational institutions
and come face to face with the business world when doing field work both here in Amsterdam and
abroad in Paris and Barcelona.
Successful completion of the CME Minor results in more than just a passing grade. Students who
complete the minor will also receive an internationally recognized certificate of completion. In addition
to this, at the end of the minor students also have the chance to apply for certification of English
proficiency through the Cambridge Certificate in Advanced English Programme.
In conclusion, you will receive experience in international collaboration, learn to overcome cultural
barriers, and you will build your own professional network though contact with leading experts in the
field of business and marketing.
Topics of Study:
Thorough intensive exchange and collaboration with the Universitat de Barcelona and L’Ecole de
Commerce et Gestion Internationale in Paris each year, new themes in the realm of city marketing are
selected. In the coming 2014-2015 study year you can expect to approach topics such as ‘urban
lifestyles’ and ‘place image and reputation’ and “connectivity. We also work together with businesses
and other institutions that have a direct influence on how the city is experienced. In previous editions
of the minor, city promoters such as Barcelona Activa and I Amsterdam have been involved.
Moreover, organisations that you might not immediately associate with city marketing have been able
to take advantage of the research, analysis and advice produced in the CME minor. Some examples
are: city developer, Bureau Zuidas, airline, Vueling, and online jukebox, 22Tracks.
Method of Study:
The CME course is designed to give students an up-close-and-personal look at City Marketing.
Students will literally take part in “the city” in order to develop insight and understanding of questions
central to the study, such as: What is city marketing? How does one brand a city? Is it possible to
brand a city? When does city marketing work and when does it not?
City Marketing is by nature a multidisciplinary study and the CME minor offers a variety of modules,
information, tools and mentoring to help you synthesize and construct successful marketing advice.
The CME minor offers:
? General knowledge and insight relating to the European City
? Knowledge of City Marketing, places Brand, Identity and Reputation
? Concrete and relevant knowledge of Amsterdam, Barcelona and Paris
? Various marketing perspectives (*every branch and each case requires a different approach)
? Concrete and relevant knowledge of participating organisations
? Research techniques and methods
? The use of visual media
? Language, inter-cultural communication and international collaboration
The minor begins with a general introduction to city marketing. During the introductory phase students
are lead on tours by city experts to discuss various initiatives and campaigns. The second phase
begins with the marketing kick-off. Here, all of the various organisations involved come together and
students form international teams.
20
In the following period students have seminars and workshops approximately three days per week to
bring student up to speed on the different tools and skills necessary to complete the project. Among
other thing students learn: How do you make a functional work-plan? How do you work at a
distance? What techniques and methods can be used and are required? How do you implement and
adapt interactive media to the project? And finally, language skills are practised and sharpened.
Halfway through the second phase there will be a midterm evaluation in Barcelona/Paris together with
your international team, the professional clients and the educative staff. We close the semester with
the final presentations for the clients with all parties, including those from Barcelona and Paris here, in
Amsterdam.
Instructional materials:
Project material and information will be published on the CME digital learning environment specially
developed for this course.
Assessment:
- Primary assessment: Marketing and publicity project: the international group assignment.
- Secondary assessment: Report: an individual assignment about city marketing.
- Tertiary assessments: Milestone evaluations & discussions, interim assignments to keep you
on course, English exam.
Educators:
Lecturers and guest speakers share their expertise in order to assist and lead you along the path
towards a successful final product.
Back to minor overview
21
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Cross Cultural Business Skills (CCBS) / Full time program
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Sander Schroevers, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
The skies nowadays are full of airplanes carrying professionals, travelling to do business abroad.
They need to be able to communicate effectively in cross-cultural settings or build trust with culturally
diverse partners. This minor aims to prepare participants for such practical business situations. We
offer weekly full evening classes on specific cultures (e.g. Korea, France, Brazil, China, Russia etc.
etc.). Often in the form of seminars at the Chamber of Commerce, or university symposia open to
externals. Frequently international guest-lecturers present their home cultures. Other weekly lessons
are around generic global skills, such as negotiating, corresponding, meeting, recruiting etc. During
this course all students will co-write (on their own names) a real management book in English (for
sale, ISBN number etc.). Specific writing classes are scheduled to help you write in native English.
There are also weekly fact-finding clinics to support your research. We also survey and interview
professionals from around the world. All further information can be obtained from the site
www.minorccbs.com, which offers a wealth of information, our own books, video's, podcasts, e-
books as well as flyers in many different languages. This site plays a pivotal role during the CCBS
elective course. Besides the work things, we also organize many social events and even country-
parties, which you will like for sure. We welcome exchange students and students from other Dutch
institutes.
The minor contains the following courses (total of 30 ECTS):
? International Survey 3 ECTS - Examination: international questionnaire, database proof
? Country Profile 6 ECTS - Examination: written country analysis
? Elective Assignment 1 ECTS - Examination: native feedback assignment
? Mid Term Exam 3 ECTS - Examination: written knowledge test
? Skill Focus 2 ECTS - Examination: digital report
? Stream Task 4 ECTS - Examination: assessment
? Theoretical Framework 5 ECTS - Examination: written web texts
? Final Exam 6 ECTS - Examination: written knowledge test
Minimum participants: 25
Maximum participants: 90
Department who's offering this minor: Commerciële Economie
Study guide number: 6000MCBS11 for the fulltime minor
Open to students of all programs.
22
Requirements: According to the study programme exam regulation: a student must have obtained
her/his propaedeutics, with a minimum of forty (40) credits (EC’s). There are no specific entry
requirements for this minor.
Back to minor overview
23
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Cross Cultural Business Skills (CCBS) / Part time program
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Sander Schroevers, e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
The skies nowadays are full of airplanes carrying professionals, travelling to do business abroad.
They need to be able to communicate effectively in cross-cultural settings or build trust with culturally
diverse partners. This minor aims to prepare participants for such practical business situations. We
offer weekly full evening classes on specific cultures (e.g. Korea, France, Brazil, China, Russia etc.
etc.). Often in the form of seminars at the Chamber of Commerce, or university symposia open to
externals. Frequently international guest-lecturers present their home cultures. Other weekly lessons
are around generic global skills, such as negotiating, corresponding, meeting, recruiting etc. During
this course all students will co-write (on their own names) a real management book in English (for
sale, ISBN number etc.). Specific writing classes are scheduled to help you write in native English.
There are also weekly fact-finding clinics to support your research. We also survey and interview
professionals from around the world. All further information can be obtained from the site
www.minorccbs.com, which offers a wealth of information, our own books, video's, podcasts, e-
books as well as flyers in many different languages. This site plays a pivotal role during the CCBS
elective course. Besides the work things, we also organize many social events and even country-
parties, which you will like for sure. We welcome exchange students and students from other Dutch
institutes.
The minor contains the following courses:
International Survey 3 ECTS Examination: International questionnaire, database
proof
Country profile 6 ECTS Examination: written country analysis
Elective (feedback web article) 1 ECTS Examination: native feedback assignment
Mid term exam 3 ECTS Examination: written knowledge test
Written lab 2 ECTS Examination: digital report
Stream task 4 ECTS Examination: Assessment
Theoretical framework 5 ECTS Examination: written web texts
Final exam 6 ECTS Examination: written knowledge test
* Most stream tasks already
24
? Minimum participants: 10
Maximum participants: 60
? Department who's offering this minor; Commerciële Economie part-time
? Study guide number: 6000MCSD11
? The aimed for audiences have an international professional scope, and wish to develop
applied global skills.
The target group(s) of this minor are: HvA part-time and (allowed) HvA-duaal students.
We also focus on Kies-Op-Maat part-time students.
? Requirements: According to the study programme exam regulation: a student must have
obtained her/his propaedeutics, with a minimum of forty (40) credits (EC’s). There are no
specific entry requirements for this minor.
The intake-level is equal to European Qualifications Framework (EQF) level 5, Associate
Degree level as well as the specific Croho-final level of the core-phase of a course.
Back to minor overview
25
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
Entrepreneurship
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible coordinator:
Mrs. Anoesjka Timmermans, e-mail: [email protected].
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll, you
need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please mention your
name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre will enroll you for all
modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you are
obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Part 1 – Minor description
1 Brief description of objectives and content of the minor.
The mission of the Minor Entrepreneurship is to inspire students to create, or identify, and exploit their
own chances and opportunities in business and (self)employment, by training, stimulating, facilitating
and appreciating Entrepreneurial knowledge, skills and behaviour.
Companies find themselves continually redefining their markets, restructuring their operations, and
modifying their business models as a result of the high rate of market dynamism that characterizes the
21
st
century. Whereas companies used to be able to rely on relatively sustainable competitive
advantages in the 20
th
century, the rules of the competitive game are changing so fast, that the
previously considered advantages are fleeting, with many consequences to going concern and
staffing. Risk averseness by means of short-term labour contracting leads to a higher demand for a
flexible work-force and hence demands more entrepreneurial skills, spotting or creating (self)
employment opportunities.
What keeps leading companies in the lead is constant innovation.
Innovation is a trait of creative, entrepreneurial people, in equally creative and entrepreneurial
companies, regardless whether start up enterprises or multinational corporations. Entrepreneurship
refers to daring to see beyond what others have seen, risking to invest in something that might look
ludicrous at the time of developing or could potentially disrupt the current business of the company or
even entire industry.
The minor Entrepreneurship centres around the concept of creating innovative business concepts with
various stakeholders, the so called co-creative business development methods, that provide
opportunities to start or grow a business.
You will discover what (corporate) entrepreneurship entails and what makes entrepreneurial
companies stand out in the competitive arena of today’s global business environment.
During the minor you will experiment with various methods to create a new business, from concept
development to business modelling and formal business planning, using traditional and new methods
for business creation and development, such as Design Thinking, Ideation, Effectuation and the
Business Model Generation Canvas.
26
The entrepreneurial process of generating and implementing new business ideas will be placed in the
contexts of small- and medium sized enterprises as well as international and multinational
corporations. All with an international scope.
As entrepreneurship, large or small scale, encompasses multiple disciplines, all are included in the
minor. From a Management & Organizational perspective you will be familiarized with the complexities
of human functioning in organizations and how to apply the toolkit that theory offers to deal with these
complex problems. Since starting a new venture, whether within an existing corporate structure or a
new business, requires and earns money, the module Financial Management will provide you with the
proper tools for financial planning and analysis of new business activities.
No business exists without customers, the most important stakeholders in any venture. To prepare you
for the toughest situations in the commercial process, you will gain real-time experience with preparing
and conducting commercial negotiations in the module Sales Negotiation.
Finally no new business can be created without understanding how innovation comes to being. The
modules contemporary entrepreneurship and entrepreneurial skills and behaviour will help you find
and develop your own personal creative and innovative competencies, identify means and
opportunities to make creation and innovation happen in small-, medium sized and large corporate
environments and implement methods to sustain innovation in corporate settings.
2 Description of the relation of the minor to the HvA-profile
The minor is connected with the HvA-profile in the three areas of:
(a) Industry and entrepreneurship in a metropolitan context: by preparing students for
entrepreneurship as a start-up entrepreneur or as a corporate entrepreneur.
(b) Entrepreneurship, innovation and the knowledge economy: The minor Entrepreneurship
centres around the concept of creating innovative business concepts with various stakeholders, the so
called co-creative business development methods, that provide opportunities to start or grow a
business.
3 Description of the relation of the minor to the Professional/Programme profile
The minor is both of a profound or broad nature and as well exceeds the final terms of the Programme
profile. The department of Commercial Economics of the School of Economics and Management, has
mentioned in her vision document six main themes, of which the minor CCBS covers two: (i)
international ambition and (ii) multicultural. This document also includes two vision paragraphs on (1)
International Orientation and (2) an integration of theory and practice. The first speaks for itself when
called Cross-Cultural Business Skills, but also the second concept is fully integrated in this minor
through the engaging concept of so-called self-regulating streams. In fact the European Association of
International Education has invited us to present our approach on her yearly conference. Also both the
educational magazine Transfer (Nuffic), as well as Folia Magazine has reported three times each on it.
For the rest the minor CCBS relates to the Dutch Higher Education end qualifications of the IBMS/IBL
programme. The subjects furthermore relate to the Dublin descriptors through the IBMS/IBL end
qualifications.
4 Minor learning plan scheme for block 1 and block 2
Below is an overview of the educational units of the minor, the followed teaching and testing method,
the number of
27
EC’s and the number of contact hours measured per individual course programme part (i.e.: not per
week).
But the total average number of contact hours per week is 16 hrs.
B L O C K - 1
Minor Course programme
parts
Teaching method Testing / assignment type EC
s
contact hours *
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Project
Written exam &
Project Report
1,8
Contemporary
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Workshops Assignments 1,8
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
1,8
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Assignments
Written exam
1.8
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment, Assignment &
Oral Exam
1,8
Financial Management Lecture
Paragraph in BP
Written exam
1,8
B L O C K - 2
Minor Course programme
parts
Teaching method Testing / assignment type EC
s
contact hours *
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Project
Written exam &
Project Report
5 1,8
Contemporary
Entrepreneurship
Lecture & Workshops Assignments 5 1,8
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
5 1,8
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Assignments
Written exam
5 1.8
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment, Assignment &
Oral Exam
5 1,8
Financial Management Lecture Paragraph in BP
Written exam
5 1,8
* Contact hours are based on a 20 week lesson programme. Because this minor runs on a
semester basis, the actual contact hours per week are 1,8 = 3 on semester basis.
Teaching method
This minor uses a mix of several learning methods: (i) classic lecturing (due to large amount of
students necessary often), (ii) out-of-school activities: we try to put students into contact with the
outside (professional) world, we therefore have designed activities that urge students to take up
contact with professionals around the world, such interviewing stakeholders in various industries, by
28
organising in-school business contests for which students and representatives from the business
world will be invited, (iii) workshops and (iv) role-play.
Attendance is not so much compulsory, as the delivering of good results is. Students are obliged to
hand in peer-review forms on team and task performance for all other team students.
5 Target group
This minor is meant for: HvA (Hogeschool van Amsterdam) full-time students, KOM (Kies-Op-Maat)
full-time students, HvA-exchange students, self-registered (paying) students from foreign non-HvA
partner institutes.
6 Entry requirements
Specific entry requirements for this minor include successful completion of at least one module in the
subjects marketing, management and organization and financial management. According to the study
programme exam regulation, article 3.10 under 5: a student must have obtained her/his propaedeutic,
as well as a minimum of forty (40) credits (EC’s) from the main phase of the study. Therefore the
intake-level is equal to European Qualifications Framework (EQF) level 5, Associate Degree level.
Furthermore the intake-level is equal to the specific Croho-final level of the core-phase of a course.
7 Facilities and other conditions
Students need to be able to log-in to the course website, and be able to co-author the different
writings. For some elective assignments a Skype or VoIP recording connection is required. The course
itself needs a rather large class room (60 plus) for workshop and crowd-coaching purposes.
8 Results (see also attachment 1)
The final result of the minor is the weighted average of the results of all the separate educational units.
The tests described in the matrix above, are only passed when the result is 5.5 or higher.
When assignments are carried out by duo’s or groups, the result will be a group mark, for the
participating
individual students a peer-assessment needs to be filed by all team members.
Part 2 - Mini-OER
Minor Cross-Cultural Business Skills, Mini-OER 2014 – 2015
This Mini-OER contains essential basic information of the minor that is used for educational logistics
and internal and external communication. The information provided grants students educational rights
regarding this minor.
B L O C K - 1
SIS-code Educational unit Teaching Method Testing & assessment EC’s contact hrs
p/w*
6410ESP
_TS
6410ESP
_PJ
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture
Project
Written exam
Project Report
1,8
6410CEP
_AS
Contemporary Entrepreneurship Lecture & Workshops Assignments 1,8
6410CIE
_AS
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
1,8
6410MEI
_AS
6410MEI
_TS
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Papers 1,8
29
Written exam
6410ESB
_T1
6410ESB
_T2
6410ESB
_T3
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment
Assignments
Oral Exam
1,8
6410FIM
_AS
6410FIM
_TS
Financial Management Lecture
Paragraph in BP
Written exam
1,8
Total ECs and contact hours: 10,8
B L O C K - 2
SIS-code Educational unit Teaching Method Testing & assessment EC’s contact hrs
p/w*
6410ESP
_TS
6410ESP
_PJ
Fundamentals in
Entrepreneurship
Lecture
Project
Written exam
Project Report
2
3
1,8
6410CEP
_AS
Contemporary Entrepreneurship Lecture & Workshops Assignments 5 1,8
6410CIE
_AS
Cases in Entrepreneurship Lecture
Debates
Research Papers
1
4
1,8
6410MEI
_AS
6410MEI
_TS
Managing Entrepreneurship &
Innovation
Lecture
Papers
Written exam
3
2
1,8
6410ESB
_T1
6410ESB
_T2
6410ESB
_T3
Entrepreneurial Skills &
Behaviour
Lecture & Workshops
Assessment
Assignments
Oral Exam
2
1,5
1,5
1,8
6410FIM
_AS
6410FIM
_TS
Financial Management Lecture
Paragraph in BP
Written exam
2
3
1,8
Total ECs and contact hours: 30 10,8
* Hours based on the 20 week system. Since the minor will be taught in a semester system, the hours
correspond to: 1,8=3 hrs/week during a full semester; 0,9= 3 hrs/week during half a semester
Part 3 – Set of educational units of the minor
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship
2 SIS code To be assigned (6410ESP)
3 Teacher(s) Fonkert/Song
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
30
7 Objective(s) to learn about the entrepreneurial process and to draw up -on
paper- a commercially viable and financially well documented
Business Plan with a variety of scenarios, for stakeholders such
as potential venture (seed) capital financiers (and/or bankers).
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Explain Entrepreneurship and discuss its importance
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Carry out a feasibility study
? Conduct an industry and market analysis
? Construct a variety of effective business scenarios
? Justify the proper ethical and legal foundation
? Justify a (new) venture’s financial needs, potential, strength and
viability
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Starting a company
• Recognizing Opportunities vs Creating Markets
• Blue Ocean Strategy
• Conducting a market & industry analysis
• Conducting a market feasibility analysis
• Marketing strategy & planning
• Constructing business scenarios
• Translating a business model into a business plan
• Preparing the proper ethical and legal foundation
• Assessing financial needs, potential, strength and viability
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Entrepreneurship; Successfully Launching new ventures by
Bruce R. Barringer & R. Duane Ireland, Pearson Education
Limited (2012), ISBN-13: 978-0-27-376140-2
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class assignments
• Project coaching
• Guest lectures & Company visits
12 Testing method(s)
? Business Concept Start document (5%)
? Feasibility Analysis report (15%)
? Business Plan including various Business Scenario’s (40%)
? Written exam (40%)
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Feasibility Study Report: 1 EC (incl. start doc)
Business Plan: 2 EC
Written Exam 2 EC
14 Specialties Theme specialists
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Contemporary Entrepreneurship
2 SIS code To be assigned (suggestion: 6410CEP)
3 Teacher(s) Vacant (Requested: Harriet Robijn)
31
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) Learning about Entrepreneurship through experimentation,
building upon the growing body of knowledge and insights in
successful entrepreneurship from the business and academic
world.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Create ideas, concepts and business models to exploit these
opportunities
? Explain how the various aspect of business models relate to one
another
? Generate novel, appropriate & viable business concepts
? Examine the influence and possibilities of the infinity of
computing, the rise of digital information and digital fabrication
on the entrepreneurship
? Develop web-based entrepreneurial activities (crowd-funding,
crowd-sourcing, open-sourcing, social media, etc) and
instruments to measure their success
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• The need for innovation – Trends & Developments
• Lean Start Up
• Idea Generation
• Design Thinking
• Effectuation
• Creating Value
• Business Model Canvas
• The Cloud, the Crowd and the Enterprise
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Digital syllabus provided by lecturer(s) on DLWO
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Field Assignments
• Guest lectures & Company visits
12 Testing method(s)
Professional products & Research paper
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
6 continuous assessment assignments: 1 EC
1 project assignment: 1EC
1 Research paper: 1EC
14 Specialties Guided Experience Based Learning
32
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Cases in Entrepreneurship
2 SIS code To be assigned – (Suggestion: 6410CIE)
3 Teacher(s) Vacant (requested: Anoesjka Timmermans – Timan)
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) Critically discussing the success and fail factors in
Entrepreneurship, using research papers, Harvard business
review articles and case studies
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Justify one’s opinion based on proper academic research
? Debate vision and viewpoint based on proper academic
research
? Discuss the concept of value creation and its essence for a
business to be successful
? Criticize the elements that make a successful entrepreneurial
manager)
? Criticize the elements in a corporate culture that increase
entrepreneurial & innovative success
? Explain what organizations require when adopting open
innovation
? Discuss the benefits and disadvantages of the various
innovation models
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Business Basics
• Market Entry
• Blue Ocean Strategies
• Failure
• Personal leadership & creativity in (corporate) entrepreneurship
• The entrepreneurial manager
• Culture & Leadership in entrepreneurial MNCs
• Innovation models (closed versus open) and their impact on
organizational structure, culture, systems and management style
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Digital syllabus provided by lecturer(s) on DLWO including
research papers, Harvard Business Review articles and Case
studies
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class debates
• Self study, research & writing
12 Testing method(s)
4 Debates (20%),
4 Research papers (80%)
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
4 Debates: 1 EC
4 Research papers: 4EC
14 Specialities Critically assessing and discussing research and business
publications and practices to broaden information acceptance
33
and appreciation and deepen understanding of themes covered.
Course in parallel with Cases in Entrepreneurship at UvA Minor
Entrepreneurship
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Managing Entrepreneurship and Innovation
2 SIS code 6400MEI_13
3 Teacher(s) J.A.A. Kloosterman, D.M. Bout
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) To create alignment between the organizational and managerial
building blocks of a company and its business strategy.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Assess the effectiveness of a business strategy in view of a
companies environment using contemporary theoretical
frameworks.
? Identify the necessary key resources and capabilities to execute
a business strategy
? Describe an organization structure with its departmentalization
approach, coordination mechanisms and job design principles.
? Align an organization structure with a companies’ strategy.
? Explain employee motivation based on contemporary motivation
theories.
? Identify leadership styles and leadership activities.
? Align leadership style with business strategy and employee
motivation.
? Create the right circumstances for effective teamwork.
? Align organizational culture with the organization’s strategy,
structure and leadership style
? Manage the process of change in an organization or department
based on contemporary insights.
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• The learning objectives are introduced through a combination of
lectures and self-study. Students write a number of papers that
show their mastery of the learning objectives.
•
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Study materials consist of presentations and hand-outs in addition
to articles used for the papers.
11 Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Guest lectures?
12 Testing method(s)
papers and written central exam
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
4 papers and 1 written exam; 5 EC’s
34
14 Specialities
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Entrepreneurial Skills & Behaviour
2 SIS code To be assigned (Suggestion: 6410ESB)
3 Teacher(s) F. Zwarthoed & M. van Buschbach
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) train and develop students’ entrepreneurial, commercial and
negotiating skills, and adopt a flexible approach to cultural
differences.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Sum up and describe the basic strategies, tactics and concepts
of negotiation theory
? Recognize strategies and tactics used by himself and others
? Validate the effect of cultural variables on communication
? Identify and demonstrate various communication and
negotiation styles
? Construct a plan of approach for a sales, procurement or
negotiation session
? Demonstrate a professional approach during the negotiating
process
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Primary Research Skills
• Commercial Skills (Sales & Procurement)
• Networking
• Negotiating
• Cross Cultural negotiation
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Intercultural Business Communication
Chaney/Martin Prentice Hall 1995
ISBN 131860097
It’s a deal
Steele/Murphy Russill McGraw-Hill 1989
ISNB 007709229-5
Intercultural Sales Negotiations
various HES 2009
11 Teaching method(s)
Lecture and workshop with role-play sessions
35
12 Testing method(s)
Assessments (Role Play and participation)
Written Reports
Oral Exam
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Assessment:
(80% Attendance, 3-6 pop-quizzes, 3-6 preparation plans) 2EC
3 Written reports 1,5EC
1 Oral exam 1,5EC
14 Specialties Role Play
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Financial Management
2 SIS code 6410FIM
3 Teacher(s) S. Ackah
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
7 Objective(s) In the course, the student will learn the competencies needed to
develop the financial statements of a business plan and judge the
attractiveness of investing in a business. Furthermore, the student
will be able to make sound investment-, working capital
management-, cash management- and financing decisions based
on contemporary financial theories.
8 Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Prepare and analyse financial statements, including
the cash flow statement of a company and financial models
? Use ratio-analysis and financial modelling to optimize
the working capital and cash position of a company
? Calculate present values and future values of simple
and complex cash-flows such as annuities
? Calculate the return and present and future values of
an investment
? Calculate the risk and return of an investment portfolio
? Calculate an investment’s required return using the
capital asset-pricing model and the security market line.
? Describe the features of bonds, stocks and other
financing items, calculate their future and present value and their
expected return
? Prepare a financial plan for a company including
optimization of working capital, financing structure and liquidity
forecast.
9 Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Besides a general introduction to financial
management this course will give students a profound knowledge
of financial statements (Historical and Pro Forma), including the
meaning and usefulness of cash flow. Financial forecasting and
modelling will be a major part of this course.
• Several aspects of shareholder value will be
discussed like, bond and stock valuation and the concept of time
value of money. An important issue in financial management is the
aspect of risk and its relationship with return. We will introduce
36
quantitative tools and methods to measure risk and return.
• Capital investments are analysed by using the net
present cash flow concept. A very important determinant of this
analysis is the cost of capital. Students will get an inside in how
the cost of capital is calculated and what its usage is in modern
financial management.
10 Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Principles of Managerial Finance - Global Edition
L.J. Gitman, C.J. Zutter
Pearson, 13
th
edition
ISBN: 978-0-273-75428-2
11 Teaching method(s)
Lecture & self study
12 Testing method(s)
Financial Paragraph in Business Plan (MENT)
Written Exam
13 Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Financial Paragraph in Business Plan (MENT only) 2EC
Written Exam (MENT only) 3 EC
Attachment 1 From main text HvA – Teaching and Examination Regulations (OER) 2013-2014
Article 5.3 Dates and frequency of examinations and tests
1. Two opportunities to take the foundation year examinations and tests will be offered every academic year,
with the first immediately following the conclusion of the unit of study concerned.
2. Two opportunities to take the post-foundation year examinations and tests will be offered every academic
year, with one of these immediately following the conclusion of the unit of study concerned.
3. etc …
Article 5.9 Standardisation of assessments
1. Examination or test assessment results are expressed as one of the following:
2. a grade on a scale of 1 to 10, with a maximum of one decimal point, in which grade 1 or 1.0 stands for ‘very
poor’, grade 2 for ‘poor’, grade 3 for ‘highly unsatisfactory/very unsatisfactory’, grade 4 for ‘unsatisfactory’,
grade 5 for ‘slightly unsatisfactory/fair/weak’, grade 6 for ‘satisfactory’, grade 7 for ‘quite satisfactory’,
grade 8 for ‘good’, grade 9 for ‘very good’ and grade 10 for ‘outstanding/excellent’.
3. The final assessment of a minor is expressed as a whole grade on a scale of 1 to 10, in which grade 1 or 1.0
stands for ‘very poor’, grade 2 for ‘poor’, grade 3 for ‘highly unsatisfactory/very unsatisfactory’, grade 4 for
‘unsatisfactory’, grade 5 for ‘slightly unsatisfactory/fair/weak’, grade 6 for ‘satisfactory’, grade 7 for ‘quite
satisfactory’, grade 8 for ‘good’, grade 9 for ‘very good’ and grade 10 for ‘outstanding/excellent’.
4. Rounding off to arrive at a whole number or a number with one decimal point must be performed in
accordance with the ordinary rules of calculation. Accordingly, decimals higher than 500 are rounded
upward and decimals lower than 500 are rounded downward.
5. A student’s assessment result is deemed satisfactory where the grade allocated is 5.5 or higher.
6. If a student resits a test, the highest of the grades obtained determines whether he/she has met
the requirements.
Back to minor overview
37
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
International Financial Management (MINFI)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mr. Ralf Jacobs, e-mail: [email protected].
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
The mission of the international department is to provide the world of international business with
graduates who can recognize and manage the implications of global change; who are international
professionals with an interdisciplinary view on business problems, and who can analyze and solve
those problems successfully. More specifically, the IBMS-department concentrates on international
market development.
From the mission statement above it follows that, though important, students should not necessarily
focus exclusively on the marketing and management implications of international market
development. Different market entry strategies will also have a serious impact on the finance
function of a company.
The minor international financial management aims to provide students with an in-depth knowledge
into this field of international finance.
Students who have followed the minor international financial management should be well equipped
to enter as a junior international financial specialist, the professional field. Positions that can be
thought of are: assistant financial or management accountant, business analyst, investment analyst
or junior controller. This minor might further be useful for students who wish to enter a management
trainee program. As such this minor can also be recommended to students from other streams who
would like to specialize in international finance.
The minor contains the following subjects:
? Financial Risk Management = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam + assignment
? Investment analysis (Stock Valuation) = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam + investment report
? Corporate Finance 2 = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam
? International Financial Accounting = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam + assignment
? Management Accounting Techniques = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam
? Current Issues in Finance = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam, presentation
Department who's offering this minor: International Business and Management Studies (IBMS)
38
Minimum participants: not applicable / Maximum participants: 60
Catalogue number: 6000MINF14
This minor will be offered in: Semester 1 (Fall 2014) and Semester 2 (Spring 2015)
This minor is open to: IBS students, students from other HvA programmes, exchange students,
students from other institutes of higher education.
Requirements: the minimum requirements stated by OER-rules apply: the student must have
obtained his Propedeuse plus 40 ECs in his postpropedeutic phase.
For international exchange students: basic knowledge of finance and accounting.
Back to minor overview
39
Minor (fixed program of 30 ECTS)
International Marketing Management
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
manager Mr. R.J.W. Janssen ([email protected]) directly.
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you are
obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Part 1 – Minor description
1 Brief description of objectives and content of the minor.
The minor International Marketing (MINTM) is to further the students’ knowledge of the marketing
function. It is broadly based on the Marketing tool-kit, the four P’s. The module Strategic Marketing
focuses on the development of a market/marketing strategy for a give company/industry. Based on
analysis of both internal and external environment and identification of core competences and key
success factors. Marketing in Action focus on product, the introduction of a product in a new market,
and it’s positioning.
Consumer behaviour involves an understanding of the segments in the target market, an analysis of
customer motivations and an exploration of unmet needs. To understand consumer choice, it is
imperative to understand the motivations that drive consumer decision making. The more so, because
the global marketplace is continuously in motion, generating a tremendous amount of challenges. In this
dynamic world, consumer attitudes, values, or lifestyles are likely to be dynamic as well. A proper
understanding of consumers is needed to continuously meet their needs, wants, and, and to outperform
the competition in doing so. Demand chain managements focuses on creating a competitive advantage
through the management of the supply chain and distribution (Place). This is an area of business which
is becoming more and more important to businesses, as for many firms, products are standardized and
it is only through the service offering that a company can differentiate.
Marketing communication is concerned with the detailed construction of a communications platform in
traditional media. The module Internet marketing focuses wholly on the possibilities opened to
companies through the internet. This module offers students a step-by-step approach from online
strategy to highly interactive implementation.
2 Description of the relation of the minor to the HvA-profile
1
The programme centres on further developing marketing skills in an international business context. This ties in
with the HvA-profile “5.2 Industrie en ondernemerschap in grootstedelijke context “
3 Description of the relation of the minor to the Professional/Programme profile
1
Creating tomorrow
40
The rationale for the International Marketing Minor for 3rd year students is derived from the final
qualifications of IBMS (Framework Competencies IBMS). This is preceded by three marketing
management courses in the foundation and second year where focus lies on marketing in relationship to
other areas of business operations. The rationale for the minor is to provide the specialist tools
necessary to develop and execute a Marketing Plan to reach specific targets
4 Minor learning plan scheme for block 1 and block 2
See part 2: minor OER and part 3: set of educational units
5 Target group
(International) students in their 3rd year of studies
6 Entry requirements
Students will need to have passed their Propedeutic exam and will need to have at least 40 ECTS
from their second year as well as successful completion of the MM1, MM2 and MAP courses or the
equivalent of 9 ECTS in marketing. For some educational units of the minor additional prerequisites
apply (see following table) Prerequisites for entering the minor international marketing:
ECTS ECTS ECTS
Equivalent in basic marketing Management and
organisation
cross cultural management
Strategic Market
management
9
Marketing in Action 9 3
Consumer behaviour 9
Supply chain
management
9 3
Marketing
communication
9
3
Internet marketing 9
7 Facilities and other conditions
Lecture rooms with beamers, audio facilities and with sufficient seats to accommodate students for both
lectures and case studies.
8 Results (See also attachment 1)
Students will need to have passed all educational units with a sufficient grade in order to achieve the
30ects of the minor.
The final result of the minor is the weighted average of the results of all the separate educational units
with the provision that each educational unit needs to be passed with at least a 5.5
Part 2 - Minor-OER
Block 1 & 2
SIS code Educational unit teaching method Testing & assessment
Number of
ECs
number of contact
hours per week
6100STM_10 Strategic Marketing Lectures, case studies
Assignment & written
exam
5 3
6100MIA_10 Marketing in Action
Assignments, guest
lecture
Assignment(s) 5 2
6100COB_14 Consumer Behaviour Lectures, case studies Assignment & written 5 3
41
exam
6100DCM_10
Demand Chain
Management
Lectures, case studies Written exam 5
3
6100INM_10 Internet Marketing Lectures, workshop
Assignment & written
exam
5 3
6100MKC_10
Marketing
Communication
Lectures, assignments
Assignment & written
exam
5 3
Sum total 30 17
Part 3 – Set of educational units of the minor
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Strategic Market Management
2 SIS code 6100STM_10, STMVH2MN02
3 Teacher(s) R.J.W. Janssen
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3
7 Objective(s) Develop effective marketing strategies in order to stay relevant and at
the same time explore growth options
8 Learning goals
1 Define and recognize elements associated with internal /external
analysis
2 Point out relevant marketing strategies
3 Explain the strategic marketing planning process
4 Deduct outcomes of external and internal analysis in order to develop
strategic marketing options in an international context
5 Justify the choice for a particular marketing strategy
6 Design a strategic international marketing plan.
7 Participate in the group process of designing a strategic marketing
solution.
8 Present a comprehensive marketing strategy
9 Content
Students will focus on the core concepts of strategic market
management:
- Definition of a business strategy
- Role of strategic market management
- External analysis
- Customer analysis
- Competitor analysis
- Market/submarket analysis
- Environmental analysis and strategic uncertainty
Internal company analysis
Moving from analysis to strategy
- Searching for sustainable advantages
- Growth strategies
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
Strategic Market Management - Global Edition, D. Aaker, D.
McLoughlin, John Wiley & Sons, 2010, isbn 978-0-470-68975-2
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, cases studies, project group assignment and meetings
12 Testing method(s)
Knowledge test, project assignment
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 tests: project assignment (application of theory), written test (theory)
5 ects can be achieved only after successfully passing both test
14 Specialities None specific
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Marketing in Action
2 SIS code 6100MIA_10
3 Teacher(s) Max Kohnstamm
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
2
7 Objective(s) Learn to develop effective solutions to solve marketing problems by the
usage of online and offline marketing instruments.
8 Learning goals
Student is able:
? to apply the relevant theoretical concepts to solve a marketing related
‘real life’ problem
42
? to understand a marketing briefing
? to analyse the briefing in depth by studying the ‘reasons behind’ the
problem mentioned in the briefing
? propose creative solutions to solve the problem as described in the
briefing
? to present the solutions in a convincing way
9 Content
Students should use all the relevant theory from other (marketing)
courses
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
No extra literature. Usage of relevant marketing literature is needed to
solve the marketing problem mentioned above (under 8)
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, guest lectures, briefing by companies, working in teams to
solve a marketing problem. Coaching during group work.
12 Testing method(s)
Students receive a briefing from a company X: we have problem Y on
market Z. Goal is to solve the problem and present the solution to
company X.
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 project assignments: 2,5 EC’s per assignment
14 Specialities Each term two companies will brief the students about a specific
marketing problem the company is facing on a specific market.
Problems are always based on ‘real life situation’ in a specific market.
Representatives of the company will form the jury to judge the
proposed solutions of the best teams in a class.
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Demand Chain Management
2 SIS code 6100DCM_10
3 Teacher(s) Lucinda J. Unger
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5 ECTS
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
7 Objective(s)
8 Learning goals
? The student can construct a supply chain map to illustrate flaws and
critical paths
? The student can calculate lead times and the effect on total costs at
retail level
? The student can identify efficiency gains in manufacturing using various
supply chain models
? The student can forecast future sales using various forecasting models
? The student can estimate risk associated with various models
9 Content
? Measuring logistics and supply chain performance Lead time Supply
chain responsiveness
? Lead-time management
? Risk management
? The synchronous supply chain
? Replenishment models
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory Logistics and Supply Chain Management, 4
th
edition,
M. Christopher
ISBN-13: 978-0-273-68176-2
11 Teaching method(s)
The course is interactive; key points are elaborated on in a short
lecture followed with class discussions. Short case studies are
also prepared in class to give a more hands on learning
experience.
In addition to lectures student groups will prepare 3 case studies
of which two are presented in class. The third case is a written
report. Case presentations account for 20% of class time.
12 Testing method(s)
Open book exam testing application of theory and 3case presentations
to test understanding of theories
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 case presentations: 1 ECs
1 written case: 0.5ECs
1 written test: 3.5 ECs
14 Specialities None
43
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Internet Marketing
2 SIS code 6100INM_10
3 Teacher(s) Simeona Petkova
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3
7 Objective(s) The course Internet Marketing covers different aspects of how
organizations use internet for marketing, describing emerging models
for developing strategy, and using case studies of companies that use
internet marketing in their strategy.
Students will play an active role throughout the course. They are
encouraged to explore and experiment with digital marketing, by
working on a variety of assignments, and expected to present their
findings in pair and group presentations. The course will culminate with
group presentations of a creative and fully developed online presence
for a specific case study.
8 Learning goals
Explain the key differences between internet marketing and traditional
marketing.
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Consumer Behaviour
2 SIS code 6100COB_14
3 Teacher(s) Erik Kostelijk
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5 ECTS
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
7 Objective(s)
8 Learning goals
? Understand and analyze the social and psychological processes that drive
consumer behaviour
? apply theoretical models of consumer behaviour to create an insight in the
decision making processes of the target audience of an organization
? design a market study to measure the drivers behind consumer choice
? create an understanding of consumer behaviour based on real-life market
data
? use information about consumer behaviour to determine market
opportunities, and to use this information as input for strategic decision
making
? create and implement a marketing strategy that takes the consumer choice
behaviour of the target audience into account
? analyze and act on consumer behaviour in an international context
9 Content
During this semester module students will focus on the core concepts
of consumer behaviour:
? The psychology behind consumer decision making
? The influence of culture on consumer behaviour
? Consumer segmentation
? Benefits, and life-styles
? Perception and learning theory
? Values and motivations
? Attitudes
? Life-styles
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
M. Solomon,G. Bamossy, S. Askegaard, M. K. Hogg,
"Consumer behaviour: A European perspective" (2010),
Pearson Education, 5th ed, ISBN 978-0-273-77272-9
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, cases studies, project group assignment and meetings
12 Testing method(s)
Knowledge test, assignment
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
2 tests: assignment (application of theory), written test (theory)
5 ects can be achieved only after successfully passing both test
14 Specialities None
44
Demonstrate the significance of micro and macro-environment factors
in the internet marketing strategy of an organization.
Examine the opportunities and threats on a company level arising from
the internet.
Interpret the elements of the marketing mix in an online context.
Assess the difference in communications characteristics between
digital and traditional media.
Describe the main success factors in managing a digital campaign.
Develop the fundamentals of an internet marketing strategy for a
specific case study.
9 Content
Digital marketing fundamentals; Digital Strategy Development, Digital
Marketing implementation and practice; The internet and the marketing
mix, Relationship Marketing, Campaign planning and evaluation.
10
Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
Chaffey D., Ellis-Chadwick F. (2012) “Digital Marketing, Strategy,
Implementation and Practice”, Person Education Limited.
11
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, project work, blogging on ECRC.nl
12
Testing method(s)
De – central open book test, Digital Marketing Project and Presentation
13
Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
1 De-central test 2.5 ECs
2 Project and presentation 2.5ECs
14 Specialities
Blogging, guest lecturers; the projects are related to real world
problems that IBS, HvA, and companies face.
1 Name Educational unit of the minor Marketing Communication
2 SIS code 6100MKC_10
3 Teacher(s) S.I. Petkova
4 Language English
5 Number of ECs 5
6 Number of contact hours per week distributed
over 20 teaching weeks
3
7 Objective(s) In this course students will learn the essence of marketing
communications and its role within the marketing function for an
organization. They will also learn how to set up an international
marketing communications plan for an international product or service
in a country or region.
Special attention is given to cross cultural marketing communications
and international advertising specifically. National culture poses a
challenge for global marketing companies and agencies in the choice
between standardized and localized approach in marketing
communications, which would be examined in more detail throughout
the course.
8 Learning goals
Explain various aspects of integrated marketing communications such
as communication objectives, strategy and communication mix
Summarise different elements of successful branding and global
branding
Discuss the influence of culture on international communication
Put together a sound SWOT analysis of the company and decide which
outcomes of the SWOT give direction to a new Marketing
Communications Plan
Develop a Marketing Communications Plan
Review existing international advertising campaigns and programs
Produce a briefing for a marketing communications agency
Demonstrate ability to work well in a team on the assignments related
to the subject (deadlines, individual contribution and cooperation)
9 Content Integrated marketing communications, advertising tools, media tools,
45
promotional tools, ethics, regulation and evaluation
10 Literature and other Study material Mandatory
and/or advised
Book: Kenneth E. Clow, Donald E. Baack, Integrated Advertising,
Promotion and Marketing Communications Global Edition, 5/E, ISBN:
9780273753285
Lecture Slides and any in class material
11 Teaching method(s)
Lectures, group work
12 Testing method(s)
Test Central (50%); Marketing Communications Plan Report (35 %);
Presentations of the MKC plan for feedback (5 %); Advertising
Assignment (10%)
13 Number of tests and the connected number of
ECs
1 project
1 assignment
1 central test
14 Specialities Guest Lecture
Attachment 1 Testing and Assessment
As regards Testing and Assessment the following OER 2014-2015 rules apply to the minor
Article 3.11 Minor
1. A minor consists of 30 credits and forms part of the main phase. In order to take a minor, students must
successfully complete the foundation year examination and obtain at least 40 credits during the main
phase. In order to take part in the 3-year VWO track, students must successfully complete the
foundation year examination and obtain at least 30 credits during the main phase.
Article 5.3 Dates and frequency
1. At least two opportunities will be offered during each academic year on which to complete a unit of study of
the foundation year or the main phase.
Article 5.8 Standardisation of assessments
1. The assessment of an examination or partial examination for all units of study in the study programme will be
expressed in a grade on a scale from 1 through 10, with no more than one decimal point, whereby the grade 1 or
1.0 stands for ‘very poor’, grade 2 for ‘poor’, grade 3 for ‘highly unsatisfactory/very unsatisfactory’, grade 4 for
‘unsatisfactory’, grade 5 for ‘slightly unsatisfactory/fair/weak’, grade 6 for ‘satisfactory’, grade 7 for ‘quite
satisfactory’, grade 8 for ‘good’, grade 9 for ‘very good’ and grade 10 for ‘outstanding/excellent’.
2. A student’s assessment result is deemed satisfactory where the grade allocated is 5.5 or higher. Rounding off to
arrive at a whole number or a number with one decimal point must be performed in accordance with the
ordinary rules of calculation. Accordingly, decimals higher than 500… are rounded upward and decimals lower
than 500… are rounded downward.
3. As regards the completion of a unit of study, the highest awarded (rounded) grade will serve to determine whether
or not the student has met his/her obligations.
Article 5.10 Allocation of credits
4. A minor is deemed to have been passed and the corresponding 30 credits are allocated if the student has passed all
the units of study comprising the minor.
Back to minor overview
46
Minor (fixed program of 30 Ects)
Latin American Business Studies (LABS)
If you have specific questions about the content of this minor, you should contact the responsible
coordinator: Mrs. Rosa María Vila Roches; e-mail: [email protected]
Enrollment:
Please note: You cannot make use of the Time Table Assembly to enroll for this minor. To enroll,
you need to contact the International Centre by sending an e-mail to [email protected]. Please
mention your name (first name + family name) and the name of the minor and the International Centre
will enroll you for all modules (courses) that are part of the minor.
Also, it is not possible to do individual modules from this minor. If you are enrolled for this minor, you
are obliged to follow all modules of this minor.
Short description:
Given the significant Latin American relevance in the new global developments, we offer this
comprehensive program combining economics, marketing, politics, (business) culture and
developments viewed within a historical perspective to complete the international vision of our
future graduates. Because of the orientation of the IBM-department towards international market
development, the future managers are offered a solid basis to understand, interpret and act upon
information related to this part of the world.
This minor enhances the students' business skills and personal performance, and it broadens their
horizon and knowledge of the world.
All subjects in this minor are in English.
The minor contains the following courses:
? Globalization and Latin America = 3 ECTS / Examination: final research paper
? Modern History & Society in Latin America = 5 ECTS / Examination: continuous assessment
? Political Economy of Latin America = 5 ECTS / Examination: research report, presentation and
written exam
? Sales Negotiations & Culture = 5 ECTS / Examination: continuous assessment, written
assignment, negotiation
? Economics of Emerging Markets = 4 ECTS / Examination: written exam + report/presentation
? Latin American Business Culture = 3 ECTS / Examination: continuous assessment
Choose one of these subjects:
? International Business Law = 5 ECTS / Examination: written exam
? Marketing in Latin America = 5 ECTS / Examination: report work main case
Minimum participants: not applicable
47
Maximum participants: 30
Department who's offering this minor: International Business and Management Studies (IBMS)
Catalogue number: 6000LAB_13
This minor will be offered in Semester 1 and 2 (Fall 2014 and Spring 2015)
Open to students, from the IBMS programme, other HvA programmes, other (IBMS) programmes in
the Netherlands and exchange students from other countries.
Requirements:
The student needs to have passed his first year and additionally have obtained a minimum of 40
ECTS in his Second Year of studies. Required command of the English language should be at CEF
level B-2.
Back to minor overview
48
Part C Sports for Exchange Students
Students can find more relevant information on Intranet (intra.dem.hva.nl) on sport timetable and
www.hessport.nl andhttp://www.usc.uva.nl/algemeen/index_en.php
49
Part D Modules:
Please note that the modules offered in this course book for exchange students are from 7 different
study programmes / departments:
1. IBL : (International Business and Languages)
2. IBMS: (International Business and Management Studies)
3. IFM: (International Financial Management)
4. IM: (International Management)
5. TMA: (Trade Management for Asia)
6. ‘minor’: this module is part of a minor programme
7. LD: Language Department
We strongly recommend all our exchange students to make a selection of modules of one and
the same ‘department’ (IBMS /IBL / IFM/ IM /TMA /minor /LD), to prevent exam clashes and
other difficulties!!
Disclaimer
This Course book for Exchange students is designed to provide as much useful information as
possible for those participating in the exchange programme of the School of Economics and
Management. The International Centre (IC) makes every effort to keep this Course book as up to date
and as comprehensive as possible. However, the IC and the School of Economics and Management
disclaims all responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the Course book and disclaims all
responsibility for any consequences whatsoever resulting from the use of the Course book. Also, the
IC does not provide any assurance that use of this Course book will ensure that exchange students
answer the exams correctly or pass the exam.
50
Business Ethics
Course code 5000BET_08
Description Business Ethics
ECTS 5
Module area Intercultural awareness
Lecturer(s) Ms. Gunning ([email protected])
Language English
1st Ac. Year 2008-09
Applied Ac. Year 2014-15
Study year 3/4
EXAMINATION
# Descripti
on
Catalo
gue
Nbr.
Gradin
g basis
Minimu
m
Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weig
h
1 Group
presentat
ion
Decima
l 1
- presentat
ion
Decentr
al
Not T2-I,
T4
30 50
2 essay Decima
l 1
- Test
digital
Central
Central
T2-I,
H1-I,
T4,
H2
120 50
CONTENT AND TOPICS IN THE COURSE
The course covers ethical aspects of decision making in organizations. The subject will be approached from
philosophical, societal, managerial and marketing viewpoints. After a general introduction of ethics and morality,
several aspects of business ethics will be covered, such as: the role of stakeholders, ethical dilemmas in
international business, ethics as part of company culture and ethics in the seller-buyer relationship (power
positions, advertising business).
The course trains the student in approaching societal and organizational problems and individual decisions from
several stakeholder viewpoints and value systems.
Many ethical dilemmas have an international character; students are from many nationalities and discuss
differences in values as to the topics discussed.
COHERENCE WITH OTHER UNITS OF EDUCATION
Prerequisites
Before being admitted to BET all 60 study credits (EC) of the second year (semester 3 and 4 = H1) must have
been obtained.
Coherence of this course with other courses
51
Business Ethics, Intercultural Communication, Management and Organization, Law, Accounting, basically all
aspects of international business focus on human activities in the company in relationship to its environment,
society and the international community.
LEARNING GOALS
#
Learning goals
The student
Programme’s profile
competencies Level
1 is able to assess and apply ethical aspects of decision
making as citizen, stakeholder, manager or specialist
8.1-2
10.4-5
2
2 has a critical approach as to ethical positions and
behaviour of companies
10.1
11.1-4
final
3 is able to reflect on personal moral behaviour
11.1-2 final
4 approaches an ethical problem according to basic ethical
theories
11.3-4 2
5 implies viewpoints and value systems of stakeholders
before making decisions or giving advice.
11.3-4 2
6 applies ethical norms when selling, marketing, buying or
consuming goods or services.
5.1
6.1
final
METHODS OF WORK AND STUDY HOURS
Work methods
BET classes consist of introductory lectures and group discussions, analysing ethical problems in business life
and searching for solutions based on ethical theories. Basic ethics and various models for analysing will be
discussed.
Compulsory attendance
? The student must attend at least 70% of all classes
? Attendance is compulsory because of team assignments and test 1
? Students without a valid reason for their (over 3) absences will be expelled from further participation in this
course and have to re-do this course in the semester following.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study
? Time allocated per week for contact (classes and/or tests) : 2 hours per week
? Time allocated per week for self-study : 8 hours per week
? Total time = 10 x 14 weeks = 140 hours = 5 EC’s
LITERATURE
52
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Edition ISBN Require
d
Ethics & Business Jeurissen, R. Van Gorcum
2007
9789023243
519
Yes
TEST FORMS AND MATERIALS COVERED IN EACH TEST
Test # Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Group presentation
(report)
presentation 1,2,4,5 PPt’s, cases, notes students
Chapters 1-9
2 essay
Test digital 1-5 Cases, ppt’s, notes student
Chapters 1-9
Assessment criteria and distribution of points (optional*)
? Group presentation (report) (test 1): group mark for content (sufficient use of ethical theories and dept in
problem analysis, valid arguments, logical reasoning for solution).
? Written test (test 2): content (sufficient use of ethical theories and dept in problem analysis, valid arguments,
logical reasoning for solution).
Feedback
Students are given continuous feedback on assignments done either in class or at home. Feedback on the written
test is given on the centrally organised exam review day.
Back to course overview
53
Business Information Systems
Course code: 4000BIS_11
Course Description: Business Information Systems
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Breuer ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weigh
1
Business
Information
Systems
4011BIS_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central
S1T,
S1H
60 25
2
Presentation
4011BIS_T2
D NVT Presentation
Decentral
Not S1T 0 25
3
Project 4011BIS_T3
D NVT Project Decentral
Not S1T 0 25
4
Casus 4011BIS_T4
D NVT Project Decentral
Not S1T 0 25
Contents and topics in the course:
Information Systems and new technology are used to create value for companies and organizations. The
technical developments that affect the financial function are characterized by the continuing computerization of
financial and other business processes, as a result of which applications are increasingly being integrated into
computerized systems. The tracing, analysis and interpretation of the relevant information for decision making is
becoming increasingly important to businesses. International Financial Managers also need sufficient expertise in
the area of information and communication technology, so that they can co-operate with IT experts in arriving at
proposals to organize and improve the provision of information.
This module enables the student to broaden his view on the use of Business Information Systems, in particular for
performance management. How to assess the business value of both proven and state of the art information and
communication technology’s another topic. Change management and sourcing issues will also be studied. A case
to setup a Business Intelligence environment for a international company.
Topics in this course:
Use of Business Information Systems: Performance Management, Business Intelligence Management;
Change management;
Sourcing;
Investigating issues in adopting proven and state of the art information and communication technology;
Setup a Business Intelligence environment for a international company. From an old report and decision system
to a new BI system by creating new KPI’s and design a dashboard. Data warehouse and data marts is given.
Understanding how the process flow of the data will be manage.
54
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites: modules MS1, MS2, and MS3.
The module is part of the research training track as students have to formulate a research question and sub
questions and report on their findings.
Learning goals:
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals: Programme's profile
competencies
Level
1. Formulate and explain the use of modern business solutions
tools in a digital firm and/or large organizations.
PT1 Business functions
CD4 Social &
communicative performance
3
2. Formulate and explain the use of modern Management
Information Systems in a digital firm and/or large
organizations.
PT2 Management
information
PT8 Organizational and
policy
CD4 Social &
communicative performance
3
3. Explain the use of Business Intelligence and Performance
management
PT2 Management
information
CD1 Developmental
orientation
3
4. Create KPI's for a decision making. Research the data for the
design of a Business Intelligence system.
PT1 Business functions
PT2 Management
information
CD1 Developmental
orientation
3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 14
Project, cases and research 100
Self-study 12
Computer lab 14
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
55
Management Information
Systems
1)
Kenneth C. Laudon, Jane P.
Laudon
Prentice
Hall
11 9780136093688 No
1)
or later edition
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Test form Learning
goal#
Material
1 Business Information
Systems
written
exam
1,2 Business Information Systems, Reports written by
students
2 Presentation project 1,2 Project presentation
3 Project project 1,2 Written project report
4 Casus project 3,4 BI business case
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
56
Business Process Simulation
Name Educational unit of the minor Business Process Simulation
SIS code 6100BPSE13
Teacher(s) Mr. Schenk ([email protected]), Mr. Draijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 10
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
5
Objective(s) ERP and Business Processes
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? The student can execute process steps in a ERP system
? The student can carry out business process in a team
and understand the steps before and after his part in the
complete business processes over the departments
? The student can explore new processes and implement
these in a ERP system
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Working with SAP ERP
Execute business processes as a employee in a department
Implement new processes as member of a project group
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Hands-on With SAP ERP and IDES
Documents from the predecessors in the simulation company
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, IT- training, project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Hand in result of work with SAP, oral and written result of
department and project
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 project assignment: 2 * 3 ECs
1 personal result / presentation: 4 ECs
Specialities Business Simulation in ongoing companies with SAP ERP
Back to course overview
57
Controlling and Accounting Project
Course code: 4000CAP_11/6100CAPE13
Course Description: Controlling & Accounting project
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Draijer([email protected]), Mr Van Roosmalen ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Controlling and
Accounting
Project
4011CAP_PJ D NVT Project Decentral Not S1T,
S2T
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
In the Controlling and Accounting Project (CAP) module the student learns about the integration of, logistics,
financial accounting and controlling processes that are integrated and can be carried out within the ERP system
SAP ERp.
The exercises performed in SAP ERP are based on the logistic and financial transactions of a trading company.
The processes are extended with the use of projects, cost centres, profit centres and fixed asset management.
The exercises will give insight into
? Financial Accounting : how it is integrated within logistics and how integration with controlling can be
realized.
? Controlling: implementation of profit centres, cost centres, project, cost centre planning/budgeting,
allocations, actual allocations and variance analyses
? Reporting: operational and management information systems.
The financial results will be analyzed, documented and reported.
Students carry out exercises and answer questions that are given with the exercises.
Coherence with other units of education:
This unit of education is the practical and concluding part of the theory of controlling and accounting were
students can apply their competences in this subject in a ERP environment
Learning goals:
58
No. Learning objective
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1. Develop a cost centre planning PT5 (Management accounting) 3
2. Create and analyze cost and profit centre
reports
PT5 (Management accounting)
CD2 (Professional Performance)
3
3. Analyze fixed assets PT5 (Management accounting)
CD2 (Professional Performance)
3
4. Apply financial streams and reporting PT5 (Management accounting)
CD4 (Social & communicative performance)
3
5. Take initiative CD3 (Business Performance)
6. Work result oriented CD3 (Business Performance)
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 14
Computer lab 63
Assignment(s) 63
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Assignments for CAP
1)
Yes
1)
All assignments are available on-line
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Title Subject matter
1 Written report Controlling and Accounting
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
59
Contemporary Entrepreneurship
Name Educational unit of the minor Contemporary Entrepreneurship
SIS code 6400CEP_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Robijn ([email protected]), Ms. Timmermans
([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) Learning about Entrepreneurship through experimentation,
building upon the growing body of knowledge and insights in
successful entrepreneurship from the business and academic
world.
Learning goals
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various
elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Create, validate and justify ideas, concepts and business
models to exploit these opportunities
? Explain how the various aspect of business models relate
to one another
? Create and justify novel and appropriate business concepts
? Develop and justify an entrepreneurial development path
from starting-point to envisioned future
? Explain the role of corporate management and culture in
stimulating entrepreneurship
? Develop and justify a corporate structure to stimulate
entrepreneurial behaviour.
Content
• The need for innovation – Trends & Developments
• Lean Start Up
• Idea Generation
• Design Thinking
• Effectuation
• Creating Value
• Business Model Canvas
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
(to be ordered at Study Store, HvA FMB)
“Entrepreneurship, An Evidence Based Guide”
Robert A. Baron; 2012
Edward Elgar Publishing, UK
ISBN: 9781-7810-0039-7
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Field Assignments
• Guest lecture(s)
Testing method(s)
Assignments
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
2 team assignments: 1,5 EC
2 group assignments: 1 EC
2 individual research assignments: 2,5 EC
Specialties Guided Experience Based Learning
Pre requisites None
Back to course overview
60
Current Issues in International Business
Course code: 5000CIB_10
Course Description: Current Issues in International Business
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 4
Lecturer(s): Ms. Divito ([email protected]), Ms. Andela ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 CIB Project -
TS
5010CIB_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
Want to be prepared for the future? Have you wondered why theory translates into practice in unexpected ways?
Are you ready for a completely different view on current business issues? This course was created to challenge
your knowledge, to address the social responsibility of business, and to provide a helicopter view of the issues
businesses face. It is designed to open your eyes to the role and impact of international business in our daily
lives. We live in an increasingly global society and business practices in one part of the world have an impact on
the businesses, people and society in other parts of the world. Our global world is becoming more interconnected
and interdependent. Political, legal and social changes have far-reaching consequences, as do the behaviour,
actions and reactions from corporations, institutions, states and individuals. This course takes the theory that
students have learned and encourages them to criticize and debate it. Through assignments, interactive
discussions and lectures students will integrate, expand and reflect on their knowledge and how it relates to
current business events, practices and trends. Emphasis is placed on exploring, interpreting and evaluating
business issues primarily from managerial, environmental, ethical, legal, political and financial perspectives.
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites:
IBMS students are required to have passed all second year subjects and to have completed their placement.
Coherence of this course with other courses:
Current Issues in Business draws on material and theory from all courses within the IBMS curriculum. The course
is intended to integrate the acquired knowledge from previous courses and stimulate critical analysis, evaluation
and thought. The student should have knowledge of important recent events and issues in the (business) world
and should have the required skills to critically analyse these events and issues.
61
Learning goals:
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Summarize and interpret major international trends, events or
developments
I.1 International business
awareness
2
2 Interrelate the impact that international trends or events have on
businesses, the world economy and society
I.1 International business
awareness
3
3 Recognize different concepts used in business ethics VI.7 Ethical Responsibility 3
4 Interpret the implications of ethical and strategic issues on business
operations in international contexts (i.e. political, legal, or economic)
VI.7 Ethical Responsibility
I.1 International Business
Awareness
3
3
5 Distinguish between the ways firms adapt, innovate and compete in
international contexts
I.1 International Business
Awareness
II.3 International Strategic
Vision Development
3
2
6 Combine knowledge and information from various sources into logical
and persuasive arguments
V.4 Business Research
Methods
3
7 Present (in written and oral form) complex information from different
sources
IV.3 Business Communication 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods
Current Issues in Business is an interdisciplinary course in which current issues are viewed from different
perspectives: ethical, financial and managerial. Teaching methods include theory lectures, interactive discussions,
student presentations and documentaries, among others. The course is taught by two different lecturers.
The assignments require students to work in groups and to use various sources and multimedia (e.g. newspaper
and magazine articles, films, documentaries, YouTube) in order to gather information and construct arguments.
The teaching methods will enable students to develop their research, critical thinking, presentation and writing
skills. Students are encouraged to participate in discussions, to argue and defend their positions on issues and to
debate with other students.
Compulsory attendance
Due to the interactive nature of the lectures, discussions and student presentations, attendance and participation
is mandatory. Students may not miss more than the maximum amount of absences allowed by IBS (for 2012-
2013: 20%). Poor attendance and participation will result in a reduction of the final grade. Additionally, group
participation and contribution is also mandatory. Free riders are not tolerated. Students will evaluate their peers in
their group at the end of the semester. For students with low peer evaluation scores, a maximum of one (1) point
may be deducted from the final grade.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study:
- per week for contact (classes and/or tests): 3 hours per week
- per week for self study: 3 hours per week
- per week for group work and meetings: 2 hours per week
62
Literature:
Understanding Business Ethics
Stanwick & Stanwick
2009 Pearson Higher Education 2009
ISBN-13: 9780137129898
Other materials will be made available electronically
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
No
Description Form of
Test
Learning
Goal #
Material Covered
1 Presentations in class and/or assignment(s)
on the chosen topic/assigned topics
Project 1 to 7 As covered in lectures and
specified in assignment instructions
Assessment criteria and distribution of points:
This course is taught by different lecturers and each lecturer provides instructions and assessment criteria
separately. This is distributed to the students at the start of the semester.
Feedback
Feedback on assignments is provided during lectures.
Extra information:
This module will be given by 2 lecturers providing different perspectives on current business issues. For 2014-
2015 the lecturers are Lori DiVito (Management & Economics) and Anne-Sophie Andela (Law & Ethics).
Back to course overview
63
Cases in Entrepreneurship
Name Educational unit of the minor Cases in Entrepreneurship
SIS code 6400CIE_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Robijn ([email protected]), Ms. Timmermans
([email protected]), Ms. Andersen
([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 12 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) Critically discussing the success and fail factors in
Entrepreneurship, using research papers, Harvard business
review articles and case studies
Learning goals
? Justify one’s opinion based on proper academic research
? Debate vision and viewpoint based on proper academic
research
? Discuss the concept of value creation and its essence for a
business to be successful
? Criticize the elements that make a successful
entrepreneur(ial manager)
? Criticize the elements in a corporate culture that increase
entrepreneurial & innovative success
? Explain what organizations require when adopting open
innovation
? Discuss the benefits and disadvantages of the various
innovation models
Content
• What makes an Entrepreneurial Entrepreneur?
• Starting a venture in a global context
• Social Entrepreneurship
• The role of Failure in Success
• The entrepreneurial manager
• Culture & Leadership in entrepreneurial MNCs
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Digital syllabus provided by lecturer(s) on DLWO including
research papers, Harvard Business Review articles and
Case studies
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class debates
• Self study, research & writing
Testing method(s)
4 Debates (20%),
4 Research papers (80%)
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
4 Debates: 1 EC
4 Research papers: 4EC
Specialities Critically assessing and discussing research and business
publications and practices to broaden information acceptance
and appreciation and deepen understanding of themes
covered.
Course in parallel with Cases in Entrepreneurship at UvA
Minor Entrepreneurship
Pre requisites ? Fundamentals in Marketing, Marketing Management 1, or
equivalent
? Management & Organisation 1, or equivalent
Back to course overview
64
Current Issues in Finance
Name Educational unit of the minor Current Issues in Finance
SIS code 5000CIF_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Keijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2
Objective(s) This course offers a broader perspective on the world of finance
and it’s practices
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
Evaluate the ‘mechanics’ of a banks
balance sheet, off-balance sheet
transactions, Special Purpose
Vehicles, securitization.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
2
Evaluate the factual events that
took place before and during the
Subprime Mortgages crisis
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
2
Give arguments for the
risks/weaknesses within financial
regulation.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Give arguments for the strengths
and flaws within monetary- and
fiscal policies conducted by central
banks and governments before and
during Subprime Mortgages Crisis.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Break down of the financial
contagion during the crisis in to
specific elements of financial
innovation.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Give arguments for the changes in
risk aversion due to financial
innovation and the effects of
perverse incentives in run up to the
crisis.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Deduce the causes of some of the
financial events during the crisis to
the capitalistic paradigm and global
financial imbalances
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
Give arguments for the academic
and 'popular' causes of the
Subprime Mortgages crisis.
III.8/International
Finance and
Accounting
3
65
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
This course is about the Subprime Mortgages Crisis .
The financial crisis of 2007 till the present is a crisis triggered by
an insolvent United States banking system. It has resulted in the
collapse of large financial institutions, the bailout of banks by
national governments and downturns in stock markets around the
world. The US housing market has also suffered, resulting in
numerous evictions, foreclosures and prolonged vacancies. It is
considered by many economists to be the worst financial crisis
since the Great Depression of the 1930s. It contributed to the
failure of key businesses, the decline in consumer wealth
estimated in the trillions of U.S. dollars, substantial financial
commitments are incurred by governments, and a significant
decline in economic activity.
The “ second part of the crisis”; the Sovereign Debt Crisis in
Europe will be touched up on lightly. The course mainly focus on
the ‘mechanics’ of the subprime mortgages crisis in the US.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
The Meltdown Years : The Unfolding of the Global Economic
Crisis , Wolfgang Munchau
Teaching method(s)
Lectures
Testing method(s)
Written exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
66
Corporate Finance 2
Name Educational unit of the minor Corporate Finance 2
SIS code 5000CO2_06
Teacher(s) Mr. Keijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) This course mainly focuses on debt and equity issues, workings of
financial markets and a companies capital structure, instead of
working capital management issues of Corporate Finance 1
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
Describe and explain the Time
Value of Money. To identify that
Discounting of Cash Flows
(DCF) is the prime valuation
method within basic finance.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
2
Describe and explain the
working of debt and equity
issues. To identify the pro’s and
con’s of both ways of financing.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
2
Describe and explain stocks
information. To identify that
prices reflect information, not
only fundamentals; Efficient
Market Hypotheses
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
2
To calculate the bond- and stock
prices (via Gordon Growth
Model and Capital Asset Pricing
Model)
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
To identify different forms of risk
and manage this risk by
diversification.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
To calculate the risk and return
of stocks and stock portfolios,
using probability scenarios.
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
To calculate the Weighted
Average Cost of Capital
International
Finance&Accounting
III.8
3
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Corporate finance is the task of providing the funds for a
corporation's activities. The subject generally involves balancing
risk and profitability, while attempting to maximize an entity's
wealth and the value of its stock, and generically entails three
interrelated decisions. In the first, "the investment decision",
management must decide which "projects" (if any) to undertake.
The discipline of capital budgeting is devoted to this question, and
67
may employ standard business valuation techniques. The second,
"the financing decision" relates to how these investments are to be
funded: capital here is provided by shareholders, in the form of
equity (privately or via an initial public offering), creditors, often in
the form of bonds, and the firm's operations (cash flow). Short-
term funding or working capital is mostly provided by banks
extending a line of credit. The balance between these elements
forms the company's capital structure. The third, "the dividend
decision", requires management to determine whether any
inappropriate profit is to be retained for future investment /
operational requirements, or instead to be distributed to
shareholders, and if so in what form.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance: European Edition , Hillier
and Clacher
Teaching method(s)
Lectures
Testing method(s)
Written exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
68
Consumer Behaviour
Back to course overview
Name Educational unit of the minor Consumer Behaviour
SIS code 5000COB_14
Teacher(s) Mr. Kostelijk ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5 ECTS
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
Objective(s)
Learning goals
? Understand and analyze the social and psychological
processes that drive consumer behaviour
? apply theoretical models of consumer behaviour to
create an insight in the decision making processes of
the target audience of an organization
? design a market study to measure the drivers behind
consumer choice
? create an understanding of consumer behaviour based
on real-life market data
? use information about consumer behaviour to
determine market opportunities, and to use this
information as input for strategic decision making
? create and implement a marketing strategy that takes
the consumer choice behaviour of the target audience
into account
? analyze and act on consumer behaviour in an
international context
Content
During this semester module students will focus on the core
concepts of consumer behaviour:
? The psychology behind consumer decision making
? The influence of culture on consumer behaviour
? Consumer segmentation
? Benefits, and life-styles
? Perception and learning theory
? Values and motivations
? Attitudes
? Life-styles
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory
M. Solomon,G. Bamossy, S. Askegaard, M. K. Hogg,
"Consumer behaviour: A European perspective" (2010),
Pearson Education, 5th ed, ISBN 978-0-273-77272-9
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, cases studies, project group assignment and meetings
Testing method(s)
Knowledge test, assignment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 tests: assignment (application of theory), written test (theory)
5 ects can be achieved only after successfully passing both test
Specialities None
69
Demand Chain Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Demand Chain Management
SIS code 5000DCM_07
Teacher(s) Ms. Unger ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3 contact hours
Objective(s)
Learning goals
? The student can construct a supply chain map to
illustrate flaws and critical paths
? The student can calculate lead times and the effect on
total costs at retail level
? The student can identify efficiency gains in manufacturing
using various supply chain models
? The student can forecast future sales using various
forecasting models
? The student can estimate risk associated with various
models
Content
? Measuring logistics and supply chain performance Lead
time Supply chain responsiveness
? Lead-time management
? Risk management
? The synchronous supply chain
? Replenishment models
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory
Logistics and Supply Chain Management, 4
th
edition,
M. Christopher
ISBN-13: 978-0-273-68176-2
Teaching method(s)
The course is interactive; key points are elaborated on in a short
lecture followed with class discussions. Short case studies are
also prepared in class to give a more hands on learning
experience.
In addition to lectures student groups will prepare 3 case studies
of which two are presented in class. The third case is a written
report. Case presentations account for 20% of class time.
Testing method(s)
Open book exam testing application of theory and 3case
presentations to test understanding of theories
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 case presentations: 1 ECs
1 written case: 0.5ECs
1 written test: 3.5 ECs
Specialities None
Back to course overview
70
Debating in English
Course code 5000DEE_08
Description Debating in English
ECTS 5
Module area International Communication
Lecturer(s) Ms. Gunning, [email protected]
Language English
1st Ac. Year 2008-09
Applied Ac. Year 2014-15
Study year 3/4
EXAMINATION
# Descripti
on
Catalo
gue
Nbr.
Gradin
g basis
Minimu
m
Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weig
h
1 Group
presentat
ion
Decima
l 1
- presentat
ion
Decentr
al
Not T2-I,
T4
30 100
CONTENT AND TOPICS IN THE COURSE
? Fundamental theory of critical argumentation
? Gathering and analysis of relevant background information (desk research)
? Presentation skills
? Debating: rules, skills
COHERENCE WITH OTHER UNITS OF EDUCATION
Before being admitted to DEE all 60 study credits (EC) of the second year (semester 3 and 4 = H1) must have
been obtained.
Debating skills are communication skills and therefore always part of more general (hbo) professional tasks and
competencies. IBL graduates must be able to do desk research on a specific topic and to analyse the
importance and relevance of the research results. IBL graduates also need to be able to build a correct, strong
argumentation in order to convince business partners of a necessary adjustment in Sales, Marketing, Business or
Communication strategies.
LEARNING GOALS
#
Learning goals
The student
Programme’s profile
competencies Level
1 knows the fundamentals of critical argumentation. 7.1 2
2 knows the principle rules of debating. 7.1 2
71
3 Is able to identify, analyse and evaluate arguments. 7.1 final
4 Is be able to gather and categorise relevant information. 2.1, 4, 7 final
5 Is able to debate according to specific rules. 7.1 (English B2)
8.1,5
9
2
6 Is able to provide an audience-centred and convincing
presentation.
I.3.4
7, 9
final
7 has attained an attitude of critical thinking, considering all
arguments for and against.
10.3.4, 5
11.1, 2, 3
final
METHODS OF WORK AND STUDY HOURS
Work Methods
Basics of critical argumentation will be discussed in introductory lectures. Students participate in debates in
various forms and roles.
Compulsory attendance
? The student must attend at least 70% of all classes
? Attendance is compulsory because of team assignments and test 1
? Students without a valid reason for their (over 3) absences will be expelled from further participation in this
course and have to re-do this course in the semester following.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study
? Time allocated per week for contact (classes and/or tests) : 2 hours per week
? Time allocated per week for self-study : 8 hours per week
LITERATURE
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Edition ISBN Require
d
Critical Thinking Skills Cottrell, S. Palgrave
MacMillan
2011
2nd 9780230285
293
No
TEST FORMS AND MATERIALS COVERED IN EACH TEST
Test # Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Group
presentation
presentation 1-7 PPt’s, cases, notes students
Assessment criteria and distribution of points (optional*)
Group presentation (test 1): group mark for content (sufficient dept in problem analysis, valid arguments, logical
reasoning for solution) = 60%; individual mark for presentation skills = 40%
Feedback
Students are given continuous feedback on oral assignments done in class and prepared at home. Feedback on
the test performance is provided immediately after the test is done.
Back to course overview
72
Development Economics in Asia
Course code: 3000DVE_11
Course Description: Development Economics Asia
Module area: EM-TMA-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Teutelink ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014-2015
Study year: 3
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Written exam 3011DVE_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
C C S1, S2,
S1H, S2H
120 60
2 Report +
presentation
3011DVE_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
D N S1, S2 0 40
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Content and topics in the course:
Development Economics investigates emerging economies. This term was first coined in the early 1980s.
Emerging economies are economies with low to middle per capita income. Such countries constitute
approximately 80% of the global population and represent about 20% of the world's economies. In the end it are
the developments and reforms that take place within countries that define them as being emerging. Next to the
well-known BRIC countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China), there are many small countries across the globe that
deserve this title. Many of the most promising ones can be found in Asia. This module will try to capture emerging
economies from both a theoretical as well as a more practical point of view.
Topics included into this module will include:
• definition of development;
• comparative economic development;
• theories and models underlying growth and development;
• poverty, inequality and development;
• population growth, urbanization and development;
• education, health and development;
• development policymaking;
• rural development;
• the environment and development
The course provides the theoretical backing and case studies that support managers to perform market
intelligence in order to identify opportunities and threats in Asian emerging economies. Subsequently, this market
intelligence can be used to plan and implement import and/or export policy.
73
Coherence with other units of education:
The course Development Economics builds upon the body of knowledge that has been addressed in Economics 1
and Trade Economics Asia. It deepens the students’ understanding of doing business with emerging economies,
which can have markedly different dynamics compared to business with developed nations.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Define how development is being measured both on a one-dimensional and
multi-dimensional basis
2,3, and 4* 3
2 Classify and categorize the development status of developing countries
based upon different measurements.
2,3, and 4 3
3 Link the development status of emerging economies to the various classical
and contemporary models of development.
2,3, and 4 3
4 Measure poverty and inequality as indicators of development. 2,3, and 4 3
5 Identify and describe the common features of financial institutions within
developing countries.
2,3, and 4 3
6 Explain the impact of population growth on development and vice versa. 2,3, and 4 3
7 Recognize and understand migration patterns, national as well as
international, that take place within and between developing and developed
nations.
2,3, and 4 3
8 Point out the impact of development on the environment. 2,3, and 4 3
9 Define the components of human development, and measure the level of
human development within a country.
2,3, and 4 3
10 Formulate a research question and outline a methodology for a research
paper related to development economics.
2,3, and 4 3
11 Report and present the main finding of the research paper. 2,3, and 4 3
*Programme’s profile competency 2: Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
Programme’s profile competency 3: Import and purchase management in Asian countries
Programme’s profile competency 4: Export and outsourcing (management) in Asian countries
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods
Total workload of the course is app. 84 hours. During the semester 2-hour classes will be weekly scheduled. At
the beginning of the semester students will receive a semester planning specifying the contents and homework on
a weekly basis. In discussing the various topics, the lecturer will make use of PowerPoint slides that will be made
available to all students through the T-drive/DLWO. In addition, students will work in teams on a research paper.
During the last 2 or 3 classes of the semester, students will present the main findings of these research papers.
74
Compulsory attendance
Compulsory attendance (>80%) is required since active participation during classes is necessary. Students not
meeting the attendance requirement will be delisted from the course.
Time allocated for contact (classes and/or tests) and self-study
Weekly lecturer hours: 2.0 hours per week or 28 hours in total
Preparation of a research report: 2.5 hours per week or 35 hours in total
Self-study and regular homework: 1.5 hours per week or 21 hours in total
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Economic
Development
Michael P. Todaro, Stephen C.
Smith
Addison
Wesley
2011 latest 9781408284476 Yes
Testing:
Test forms and materials covered in each test
Test Description Form of Test Learning
goal #
Material covered
1 Written exam Written exam 1 through 9 Book Todaro/Smith chapters 1 through 10 + 15. In addition,
students should study all information on the T-drive/DLWO
as posted under code DVE.
2 Research
paper
Research paper +
presentation
10 and 11 Application of materials under test 1 + additional sources
based on the research topic.
Assessment criteria and distribution of points (optional*)
Both tests will be graded on a scale 1 through 10. In grading the research paper, specific attention will be paid to
the originality of the topic chosen and whether students are capable of specifying a clear research
question/hypothesis and ditto methodology. The presentation will count for 10% of test 2 grade.
Feedback
In an early stage, students get a chance to hand in their research proposal and will receive feedback upon this.
After doing their presentation students will receive extensive feedback on both their paper and presentation.
Students will receive the exam and solutions to their written exam. The lecturer will provide all students with the
opportunity to review their exam work individually.
Extra information:
Exchange students should not follow DVE and ECM (from the IBMS programme) together as they are largely
identical.
Back to course overview
75
E-commerce
Course code: 4000ECE_11
Course Description: E-commerce
Module area: EM-TMA-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Van den Thillart ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014-2015
Study year: 4
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Assignment 4011ECE_AS D NVT Assessment D N S1, S2 0 100
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Contents and topics in the course:
This course focuses on the recent developments in the e-commerce field. Students will learn about the following: -
e-commerce - social media - online marketing, SEO - web analytics - multichannel strategy
Literature: variety of readings relevant for the discussed topics. References will be provided during the course.
E-commerce is highly relevant for modern marketer/business person. The course will be helpful for the
professional life of IBS graduates. It is critical to know and understand how companies can use online medium for
business, sales, promotion, networking, success measurement. Also, students should apply this knowledge in the
final thesis.
Coherence with other units of education:
E-commerce is linked to the subject Sales in developing an online marketing strategy. Also, it is relevant for
writing Bachelor thesis.
Prerequisites:
Completed marketing courses
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1 Compare the use of social media for business
purposes in the Netherlands and other
countries
PC 2. Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
PC 3. Import & purchase management in Asian
countries
PC 4. Export & outsourcing (management) in Asian
3
76
countries
PC 8. Consultancy
2 Discuss the recent developments in e-
commerce field
PC 2. Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
PC 3. Import & purchase management in Asian
countries
PC 4. Export & outsourcing (management) in Asian
countries
3
3 Develop an online marketing strategy for a
given company
PC 2. Entrepreneurship related to an Asian market
PC 3. Import & purchase management in Asian
countries
PC 4. Export & outsourcing (management) in Asian
countries
2, 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Teaching method: Tutorial.
The workload of this module is 3 credits. The course will be held only in the first block of the semester.
Time allocated per week for tutorial: 3 hours per week (21 hours in total)
Time allocated per week for self-study: 3 hours per week(21 hours in total)
Time allocated for assignments: 42 hours per semester
Open assessment:
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Form of test Learning
goal #
Material Covered
1 Compare the use of social media
for business purposes in the
Netherlands and other countries
Assignment:
The students will present their findings.
The product is a presentations of the
research findings. 40% of the final
grade
1 Literature on
Social Media
(articles)
2 Discuss the recent developments
in e-commerce field
Presentation:
E-commerce business news
presentation. 20% of the final grade.
2 Business press
3 Develop an online marketing
strategy for a given company
Assignment:
The product is: an online marketing
strategy. 40% of the final grade
3 Literature on
online marketing
tools (articles)
Back to course overview
77
Economics of Emerging Markets
Course code: 5000ECM_11
Course Description: Econ. of Emerging Markets/development
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 4
Lecturer(s): Mr. Resing ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 written exam 5011ECM_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 60
2 Report +
presentation
5011ECM_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 40
Contents and topics in the course:
The term emerging markets was first coined in the early 1980s. Emerging economies are economies with low to
middle per capita income. Such countries constitute approximately 80% of the global population and represent
about 20% of the world's economies. In the end it are the developments and reforms that take place within
countries that define them as being emerging. Next to the well-known BRIC (Brazil, Russia, India, China), there
are many small countries across the globe that deserve this title. This module will try to capture emerging
economies from both a theoretical as well as a more practical point of view. Topics included into this module will
include:
ng.
In addition, during case analysis, the above-mentioned topics will be elaborated. In a number of case studies
specific attention will be paid to the development of Latin American countries. The module is linked to l.1
(international business awareness) of the national framework IBMS competencies.
Coherence with other units of education:
Economics of Emerging Markets is a 4 EC course, part of the Latin American Business Studies minor. The
module can further be selected as an elective within the major. Next to a firm body of knowledge in the field of
development economics, students will work on several case studies, some of them with an explicit focus on the
development status of Latin American countries. Next to a coherence with the other modules within this minor,
78
economics of emerging markets has a link to the second year IBMS modules international economics & business,
and international money & business.
Learning goals:
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Define how development is being measured both on a one-dimensional
and multi-dimensional basis
l.1 International Business
awareness
1,2
2 Classify and categorize the development status of developing countries
based upon different measurements.
l.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
1,2
1,2
3 Link the development status of emerging economies to the various
classical and contemporary models of development.
l.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
1,2
1,2
4 Measure poverty and inequality as indicators of development. l.1International Business
awareness
1,2
5 Identify and describe the common features of financial institutions within
developing countries.
l.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
1,2
1,2
6 Explain the impact of population growth on development and vice versa. l.1International Business
awareness
1,2
7 Recognize and understand migration patterns, national as well as
international, that take place within and between developing and
developed nations.
l.1International Business
awareness
2,3
8 Point out the impact of development on environment. l.1International Business
awareness
2
9 Define the components of human development, and measure the level of
human development within a country.
I.1International Business
awareness
I.2 Intercultural Awareness
2
1,2,3
10 Formulate a research question and outline a methodology for a research
paper related to development economics.
l.1 International Business
Awareness
IV.2 Cooperation
V.4 Business research
methods
3
1,2,3
2
11 Report and present the main finding of the research paper. I.1 International Business
Awareness
IV.2 Cooperation
V.4 Business research
methods
II. 2 Intercultural
competence
1,2,3
2,3
3
1,2,3
Methods of work and study hours:
79
Total workload of the course is app. 112 hours. During the semester3 hour classes will be weekly scheduled. At
the beginning of the semester students will receive a semester planning specifying the contents and homework on
a weekly basis. More specifically, each week students will be required to prepare a case study linked to the topic
at hand. In discussing the various topics, the lecturer will make use of power points that will be made available to
all students through the T-drive. In addition, students will work in teams on a research paper. During the last 3
classes of the semester, students will present their main findings of these research papers.
Compulsory attendance (> 80%) is required since active participation during classes is necessary. Students not
meeting the attendance requirement will be delisted from the course.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Economic
Development
Michael P. Todaro & Stephen C.
Smith
Addison
Wesley
2011 11th 978-1-4082-
8447-6
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Form of Test Learning
goal #
Material covered
1 Written exam Written exam 1 through 9 Book Todaro/Smith chapters 1 through 10 + 15. In addition,
students should study all information on the T-drive as
posted under code ECM.
2 Research
paper
Research paper +
presentation
10 and 11 Application of materials under test 1 + additional sources
based on the research topic.
Both tests will be graded on a scale 1 through 10. In grading the research paper, specific attention will be paid to
the originality of the topic chosen and whether students are capable of specifying a clear research
question/hypothesis and ditto methodology. In an early stage, students get a chance to hand in their research
paper and will receive feedback upon this. After doing their presentation students will receive extensive feedback
on both their paper and presentation. The presentation will count for 20% of test 2 grade.
Students will receive the exam and solutions to their written exam. The lecturer will provide all students with the
opportunity to review their exam work individually.
Extra information:
This module should not be chosen together with the module DVE from the TMA/IM programme, since there are
significant overlaps. It is compulsory to bring the book of Todaro/Smith to class.
Back to course overview
80
Entrepreneurial Finance
Please note that this course may appear as FIM (5000FIM_10) in the course selection online as
the name of this course changed only recently.
Name Educational unit of the minor Entrepreneurial Finance
SIS code 6400EFI_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Ackah ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8*
Objective(s) By the end of this course students can write a financial plan
specifically for start-up ventures and for new ventures within
existing organizations
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-
do’-statements
? Prepare and analyze financial statements, including the
cash flow statement of a company and financial models
? Use ratio-analysis and financial modelling to optimize the
working capital and cash position of a company
? Evaluate the risk and return of investment business
opportunities
? Evaluate the features of financing instruments
? Prepare a financial plan for a company including
optimization of working capital, financing structure and
liquidity forecast.
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
• Besides a general introduction to financial management
this course will give students a profound knowledge of
financial statements (Historical and Pro Forma), including
the meaning and usefulness of cash flow. Financial
forecasting and modelling will be a major part of this
course.
• Several aspects of shareholder value will be discussed like,
bond and stock valuation and the concept of time value of
money. An important issue in financial management is the
aspect of risk and its relationship with return. We will
introduce quantitative tools and methods to measure risk
and return.
• Capital investments are analysed by using the net present
cash flow concept. A very important determinant of this
analysis is the cost of capital. Students will get an inside in
how the cost of capital is calculated and what its usage is
in modern financial management.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Entrepreneurial Finance: Strategy, Valuation and Deal
Structure
Kiholm Smith, Smith and Bliss; Stanford University Press
ISBN: 978-0-8047-7091-0
Teaching method(s)
Case Based Lectures & self study
Testing method(s)
Assignments
Written Exam
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Assignments 1,5 EC
Written Exam 3,5 EC
Specialties:
Prerequisites
The course requires the concepts and skills developed in
Financial Accounting 1, Financial Management 1 and
Corporate Finance 1, or equivalent. This is a pre-requisite for
participating in this course.
Back to course overview
81
Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship
Name Educational unit of the minor Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship
SIS code 6400ESP_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Timmermans ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 12 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) to learn about the entrepreneurial process and to draw up -on paper-
a commercially viable and financially well documented Business Plan
with a variety of scenarios, for stakeholders such as potential venture
(seed) capital financiers (and/or bankers).
Learning goals
? Explain Entrepreneurship and discuss its importance
? Identify and explain push- and pull factors to entrepreneurship in a
global context
? Explain the Entrepreneurial process and its various elements
? Identify business opportunities
? Carry out a feasibility study
? Conduct an industry and market analysis
? Construct a variety of effective business scenarios
? Justify the proper ethical and legal foundation
? Justify a (new) venture’s financial needs, potential, strength and
viability
Content
? Entrepreneurship and its various forms
? Entrepreneurship in a global context
? Opportunities & Barriers to starting a venture in various
parts of the world
? Cognitive Foundations of Entrepreneurship, current and trends +
differences across cultures and countries
? Vocabulary of Entrepreneurship – from idea to vision to necessities
for success
? Feasibility validation
? Transforming Ideas Into Reality - Effectuation
? Assembling Key Resources
? Legal Aspects of New Ventures
? Building the New Venture
? Exit - How to leave the founded company, various scenarios
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
(to be ordered at Study Store, HvA
FMB)
Essentials of Entrepreneurship,
Robert A. Baron
EdwardElgar Publishing Ltd UK (2012)
ISBN 9781783471782
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class assignments
• Project coaching
• Guest lectures
Testing method(s)
? Enterprise Portfolio (60%)
? Written exam (40%)
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
Feasibility Study Report: 1 EC (incl. start doc)
Business Plan: 2 EC
Written Exam 2 EC
Specialties Theme specialists
Pre requisites ? Fundamentals in Marketing, Marketing Management 1, or
equivalent
? Management & Organisation 1, or equivalent
Back to course overview
82
Financial Accounting for Consolidation
Course code: 4000FAC_11
Course Description: Financial Accounting for Consolidation
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Verboom ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Financial
Accounting 1
4011FAC_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1T,
S1H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
This module focuses on the knowledge and professional attitude necessary for an international financial
accountant. The module builds on the first and second year accounting modules with more emphasis on the
international financial environment of corporations. The topic of this module is consolidation.
Topics in relation to the profession/programme profile:
In this course in the knowledge and skills learning track, the following professional tasks and
activities are the main focus:
Professional tasks
2. Design and use of a management information system (provision of management information)
3. Design and operation of a complex financial business administration
4. Compilation of the annual accounts and tax returns (financial accounting)
Professional activities see Educational profile IFM
2.8,9
3.10-12
4.6-11
Coherence with other units of education:
83
Prerequisite for this forth year module are the first and 2nd year Accounting modules. Students must have passed
the second year accounting exams.
Learning goals:
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals Progamme’s profile
competencies
Level
1. Prepare consolidated financial statements PT4 Financial accounting 2
2. Prepare translation and re-measurement of foreign-entity
financial statements, one line consolidations of equity
investments, consolidation of foreign subsidiaries for external
reporting purposes
PT4 Financial accounting 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 40
Self-study 100
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Advanced Accounting Beams Prentice Hall 2012 11th 9780132830362 Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Title Testing material
1 Financial Accounting 1, written test Beams, Chapters 1 - 5, 14
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
84
Financial Risk Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Financial Risk Management
SIS code 5000FRM_13
Teacher(s) Mr. Mrabti ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) The FRM-course covers financial risks in trading, investment and
companies (banks!) and risk management in international financial
markets. The core of the course is the properties and applications
of financial instruments and derivatives, as tools for trading,
speculation and hedging financial risks. Also their role in the
current global financial crisis is discussed.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
The following learning goals are key in the course:
The
student
can:
Programme’s
profile IBMS
competencies
1. Recognize and identify different
types of financial markets,
instruments and derivatives
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
2
2. Recognize and identify different
types of financial market analysis
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
2
3. Assess financial risk of projects,
instruments, companies caused
by changes in interest rates,
currency rates, financial market
conditions
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
3
4. Use financial derivatives
(forwards, futures, options,
swaps) for trading purposes
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
3
5. Use financial derivatives
(forwards, futures, options,
swaps) for hedging purposes
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
3
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Subjects:
- What is financial risk, how is it measured: basis point value,
duration, volatility, VAR, leverage
- Overview of money and capital markets; types of market analysis
- Type of derivatives: futures, forwards, options, swaps, structured
instruments
- Short and long term interest rate instruments and derivatives
- Application of derivatives in commodity, interest rate and forex
trading
- Application of derivatives for hedging financial risks of projects
and companies
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Syllabus
Teaching method(s)
Lectures
Testing method(s)
Written exam
85
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
86
Globalization and Latin America
Name Educational unit of the minor Globalization and Latin America
SIS code 5000GLA_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Alderete
Language English
Number of ECTS 3
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 10 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) There are clear indications that the globalization process in Latin
America requires a new institutional framework in which a more
efficient management of global interdependence can be combined
with the introduction of firm, clearly defined principles of
international solidarity.
The module will provide the required platform for inquisitive and
insightful students of international business to understand,
comprehend, and analyse the great transformations that are
shaping the Latin American landscape.
Learning goals
The process that has come to be known as globalization- i.e., the
progressively greater influence being exerted by worldwide
economic, social and cultural processes over national or regional
ones- is clearly leaving its mark on the world of today. This is not
a new process. Its historical roots run deep. Yet the dramatic
changes in terms of space and time being brought about by the
communications and information revolution represent a qualitative
break with the past. Globalization clearly opens up opportunities
for development. National strategies should be designed to take
advantage of the potential and meet the requirements associated
with greater integration into the world economy. This process
also, however, entails risks: risk generated by new sources of
instability in trade flows and, especially, finance; the risk that
countries unprepared for the formidable demands of
competitiveness in today’s world may be excluded from the
process; and the risk of an exacerbation of the structural
heterogeneity existing among social sectors and regions within
countries whose linkages with the world economy are segmented
and marginal in nature. An important dimension of the
globalization process is the gradual spread of ideas and values
with regard to civil and political rights, on the one hand, and
economic, social and cultural rights, on the other.
Content
The first part of the module analyses globalization from
an integral standpoint. The second part of the study
focuses on specific issues: external vulnerability and
macroeconomic policy, the integration of Latin America
and the Caribbean in global trade and production circuits,
strengthening innovation systems and technological
development, international migration, environmental
sustainability and social development.
Literature and other Globalization and
Development
UN CEPAL
(various
authors)
UN
CEPAL
2002 No
Globalization and
Latin America
C.H. Alderete Yes
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class participation, project groups, assignments, group’s
discussions, presentations
87
Testing method(s)
Final research paper
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
3 ECs
Specialities Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the
entire minor
Back to course overview
88
Human Resource Management 1
Course code: 5000HR1_10
Course Description: Human Resources Management 1
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Ms. Kuijper ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Written
exam
5010HR1_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 70
2 Presentation 5010HR1_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 30
Contents and topics in the course:
Managing people effectively is vital to success in today’s highly competitive marketplace. The task of managing
human resources effectively include all the activities that organizations use to influence the competencies,
behaviours and motivations of all the people who work for them. These in turn influence profitability, customer
satisfaction and a variety of other important measures of organizational effectiveness. Meeting the challenge of
managing people effectively requires the involvement of everyone in the organization. HR activities include both
the formal policies of the organizations and the actual daily practices that people experience.
In this course we address and incorporate those facts and competencies with which modern managers need to be
knowledgeable. Many of the traditional functions of Human Resources (HR) are today incorporated into the job
descriptions of line managers and teams as a result of restructuring and employee empowerment. So this course
is not just for future HR managers, but also primarily for future managers and team members who must now know
HR.
Topics include international HRM, recruitment and selection, training and development, motivation, generation Y.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Cognitive skills
Taxonomy level
Interpersonal
skills
Framework
Competencies IBMS
and level
89
1 To identify the role of HRM in modern
organizations
2 9, Level 1
2 To relate new job analysis and design
approaches to motivation, retention, and
performance
3 9, Level 1
3 To relate effective recruitment, selection and
retention strategies
3 9, Level 1
4 To explain training and developing activities 2 9, Level 1
5 To explain HR in an international context 2 9, Level 1
6 To identify the importance of motivation and
to discriminate between various ways of
motivating employees
2 9, Level 1
7 To illustrate the impact of a certain
generation in the workforce
2 9, Level 1
Methods of work and study hours:
During the lectures we will go over the reading material and illustrate the topics discussed with the help of video's,
exercises, cases and class discussion.
In addition, as of week 4 there will be a group presentation in every class on the topic discussed.
Classes are 2 hours per week
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Human Resource
Management
1)
compiled by A. van
Woudenberg
Pearson
Education
latest 9781849591690 Yes
1)
custom made for HvA
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test # Description Form of test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Exam written test 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 Reader, power points from presentations
2 Group presentation presentation 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 Reader, own research
The written exam will be 70% of the final grade
The presentation will be 30% of the final grade
Back to course overview
90
Human Resource Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Human Resource Management
SIS code 6100HRME13
Teacher(s) Ms. Kuijper ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2,5
Objective(s) Student learns theory on (strategic) HRM and its implementation
in SAP ERP
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Knowledge of (strategic) HRM-processes
? Know that strategic HRM plays an integral part in
company policies and the formulation of company
strategies
? Can use SAP ERP for HRM in general
? Can use SAP ERP for recruitment and selection and
hiring
? Can use SAP ERP for performance appraisal
? Can use SAP ERP for succession management
? Can use SAP ERP for training and development
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
? Organisational structure
? Job analysis
? Recruitment
? Selection
? Performance management
? Succession management
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Teaching method(s)
Lecture
IT-training
Assignments
Testing method(s)
Portfolio
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
1. 5 ECs
Specialities
Back to course overview
91
Intercultural Awareness
(Please note that this is last year’s description, minor changes may have been made to this
course description, an updated version will be available as soon as possible)
Course code: 5000ICN_03
Lecturer Ms. Mai Nguyen ([email protected])
Study Program IBMS
ECTS: 4
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1
project 5003ICN_T1
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 50
2
written
exam
5003ICN_T2
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
Contents and topics in the course:
Intercultural Awareness is essential for building productive relationships and operating effectively in an
environment of globalization and international business.
Business students must define, recognize, and relate to different cultures in order to plan effectively and to carry
out strategies for coping with the challenges posed by inter-cultural operating environments and situations.
The main focus of this course is to elucidate the essence of culture in terms of values and beliefs that lie behind
customs, habits, and symbols. The course helps students to prepare corresponding arguments and strategies for
addressing and coping with various intercultural situations.
The course is presented in three parts. The first part focuses on the concept of culture and theories of culture
developed by Hofstede, Hall and Trompenaars. Students are expected to develop an in-depth ability to use these
theories and to break down, distinguish and compare situations by employing the respective dimensions. They
are also expected to present practical illustrations and applications of the theories taken from their own
experience and research.
The second part of the course looks at various models of how to cope with different sets of values as presented in
the first parts. These include Earley’s Cultural Intelligence, cultural shock, stereotypes, Development of Cultural
Sensitivity (DCIM); Hofstede’s Onion and pyramid model., DAE model of analyzing, Cultural Relativism. Similar to
the first part, students are required to research, cooperate, present and discuss case studies while demonstrating
and developing the links between the studied theories and reality.
In the third part of the course, students are required to work in groups and do in-depth research on a chosen
topic that is related to the course content. After discussing the research questions carefully with the lecturer(s),
they move on to conduct qualitative/ quantitative research that can prove their hypothesis. Examples of such a
project is: “In what way culture has influenced the economic development of East Asia?”. One of the most crucial
requirement of the project is that students have to deliver some new knowledge as the result of their research.
The theories presented in the first and second parts of the course are used as theoretical framework for their
work.
Subjects & Keywords
1. Cultural dimensions: Power Distance, Collectivism, Individualism, Masculinity, Femininity, Uncertainty
Avoidance, Short-Long term time orientation, Particularism, Universalism, Diffuse, Specific, Neutral, Affective,
Human and Nature, High-Low context, Mono-polychronic, Kinaesthetic.
2. Defining Culture: anthropological definition of culture; working definition of culture; types of culture: national
culture, organizational culture, sub-cultures; models of culture; role of values in
culture
92
3. Cultural Awareness models: Cultural Intelligence, Stereotype, DCIM (Development of Cultural Sensitivity),
Three levels of Cultural Understanding, Onion, Cultural Shock, DAE (model of Analyzing), Cultural relativism.
4. Application of Cultural Theories: Research methodology, application, critique
5. Intercultural themes: These subjects are situational as they depend on the topics chosen by students. Based
on their research themes, the presentations and the content of the lessons will focus on the main issue
accordingly. Examples of these themes are: The influence of Culture in North American Fooding Advertisement;
How Indian culture persists in its Bollywood film industry.
6. Intercultural Teams: intercultural communication; working in intercultural teams; project
Coherence with other units of education:
Intercultural Awareness is an elective course. It is especially relevant for students who are currently studying
abroad as they can readily apply the knowledge gained from class to their daily lives.
Learning goals:
Upon completion of the Intercultural Awareness course, students should be able to anticipate situations and
suggest solutions to culture-based misunderstandings. Students will be able to identify the relationship between
values and culture. They will demonstrate their ability to work in an intercultural environment by completing an
international group project. Using the knowledge gained in this course, students should be able to develop
strategies to avoid culture-related misunderstandings.
At the end of this course, students will be able to identify the relationship between values and culture and be able
to relate to specific situations. They will be able to use competency independently to develop and identify effective
solutions in a relatively clearly arranged intercultural situations
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1. Define and explain relevant terms Inter-cultural L3
2. Describe the acculturation process Inter-cultural L2
3. Explain and identify cultural dimensions with accurate examples Inter-cultural L3
4. Determine whether cultural dimensions are relevant to the analysis
of a situation.
Inter-cultural L2
5. Distinguish personal and cultural traits and between nationality and
cultural
background
Inter-cultural L3
6. Practice cultural relativism in intercultural discussions
Inter-cultural L2
7. Work and communicate effectively as part of a multicultural group
Inter-cultural L2
8. Develop strategies for working effectively with a multicultural group
Inter-cultural L2
9. Adapt behaviour to different cultural situations
Inter-cultural L2
10 Demonstrate curiosity about other cultures
Inter-cultural L2
Methods of work and study hours:
Work Method Total study hours per semester
Seminars 21
Self-Study 60
Assignment(s) 31
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 112
93
Feedback
Much of the class consists of discussions to develop and check understanding of reading materials and lecture
concepts. Students will receive direct feedback to their comments in class.
For the group project, students will receive oral and written feedback during the project development phase. The
instructor will be available by email, during office hours, and by special appointment for further comment or
guidance on the presentation. Students will receive written and oral feedback after completing the presentation.
Attendance
Discussion with classmates and the instructor are vital for increasing intercultural awareness and passing the
exam. Therefore, attendance is required. Students are allowed three absences per semester. Students who miss
more than three classes risk consequences that may include a reduced exam score or exam ineligibility.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Trompenaars’ Seven Dimensions.
Understanding Cross-Cultural
Management.
1)
Trompenaars, F.,
Hampden-Turner, C.
Riding the Waves of
Culture
Prentice Hall. 2008 No
Cultures and organizations : software
of the mind.
2)
Geert H Hofstede; Gert
Jan Hofstede; Michael
Minkov
Maidenhead :
McGraw-Hill
2010 Yes
Cues of Culture: The Basis of
Intercultural Differences in Nonverbal
Communication
3)
Anderson, P Wadsworth
Publishing Co
2000 Yes
Monochronic and Polychronic Time.
Intercultural Communication: A
Reader
4)
Hall, E. T Wadsworth
Publishing Co
Yes
The Seven Dimensions of Culture.
5)
Trompenaars Hampden-
Turner Consulting.
2009 Yes
The man_nature relationship and
environmental ethics. Journal of
Environmental Radioactivity
6)
Bourdeau, Ph. 2004 Yes
The man_nature relationship and
environmental ethics. Journal of
Environmental Radioactivity (72)
7)
Bourdeau, Ph. 2004 Yes
Cultural Intelligence. Harvard
Business Review. October 2004
8)
Earley, P. C; Mosakowski,
E.
Yes
1)
pages 82-87.
2)
3rd Edition
3)
Larry A. Samovar and Richard E. Porter pages 258-269.
4)
Larry A. Samovar and Richard E. Porter pages 280-286
5)
URL:http://www.7d-culture.nl/Content/cont042.htm. Accessed 8 July 2009.
6)
(pages) 9–15
7)
(pages) 9–15
8)
pages 139-146.
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test no. Test form Material
1 Project Weekly lesson topic: assigned readings plus extensive additional research
2 Written exam Intercultural Awareness reader and in-class discussions.
Back to course overview
94
International Financial Accounting
Name Educational unit of the minor International Financial Accounting
SIS code 5000IFA_13
Teacher(s) Mr. Mrabti ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) The purpose of this course is to make students aware of the
international dimensions of financial reporting
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
1
Student is able to classify different
international accounting systems
using theoretical approaches
discussed in contemporary
accounting journals (NF III.8, Level 1)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
2
Student is able to explain possible
differences between financial
statements taking into account the
use of different accounting standards
(NF III.8, Level 1)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
3
Student is able to journalize
international business transactions,
keeping in mind the broader
international business context (NF
III.8, Level 2)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
4
Student is able to prepare a set of
financial statements in accordance
with IFRS (NF III.8, Level 2)
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
2
5
Student is able to analyze a
company’s profitability, liquidity, and
solvency by applying various
measurement metrics and interpreting
the results (NF III.8, Level 3).
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
3
6
Student is able to make inferences
about a given firm’s degree of
internationalization and preferred
mode(s) of internationalization with a
careful analysis of the firm’s financial
statements (NF III.8, Level 3).
III.8 International
Financial
Accounting
3
95
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
A solid knowledge of Financial Accounting, i.e. the ability to read,
asses and evaluate a company's Annual Report. Students should
be familiar with the interrelationship between the Balance Sheet,
Income Statement and the Cash Flow Statement.
The course is a continuation of the subject matters of Corporate
Finance, and addresses issues that must be dealt with in the
thesis.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Financial accounting, an international introduction: Alexander &
Nobes
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class, , project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Written exam, assignments, continuous assessment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
96
International Financial Markets
Course code: 3000IFM_10
Course Description: International Financial Markets
Module area: EM-IBL-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Rensen ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014 - 2015
Study year: 3
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Test 3010IFM_TS D NA Test
(written)
C C S1, S2, S1H,
S2H
120 100
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Contents and topics in the course:
The IBL graduate is intended to become a 'human interface', providing the links between his or her company and
its international environment. To perform this function adequately, it is essential to understand the importance of
monetary policy (fluctuations in interest and exchange rates) and the functioning of international financial markets
for the company and for the economy of the relevant region and country.
The course International Financial Markets focuses on current topics related to international financial markets.
Partly students are confronted with underlying theories like Purchasing Power Parity and other exchange rate
theories and with the theoretical foundation of monetary and fiscal policy. The course focuses on recent
publications in the most influential newspapers (The Financial Times) and magazines (The Economist) and
publications of leading institutions such as the IMF, European Central Bank and the U.S. Federal Reserve. Topics
may vary depending on recent developments in world finance, but topics that surely will be covered are:
· the financial crisis in Europe;
· the influence of monetary economy on the real economy;
· the global imbalance between debtor countries (U.S.) and creditor countries (China)
· the role of the major currencies (U.S. Dollar, euro) in international financial market
· the functioning of the euro zone: monetary union, the Stability Pact / fiscal compact;
· financial development in BRIC countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China) and Japan
· Central banks (and its policies). International character of the course
The course contributes to the international character of IBL. Not only because of the topics it includes, but also
because of the fact that the student are taught and tested in English in classes with other students from different
nationalities.
Coherence with other units of education:
The student needs to be familiar with the content of the economics courses taught in year 1 and 2, students will
97
learn about the connection with International Marketing Management and Sales & Account Management
Learning goals:
No Learning goals, the student can: IBL programme profile
competencies
Level
1 Make an analysis of economic developments in a country,
especially with respect to international financial matters.
1.1, 1.2, 3.4 3
2 Advocate opposite points of view with respect to matters of
international financial matters.
1.2, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 28
Self-study 84
Individual discussion 28
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Feedback
Mainly in class. Students pose questions about articles (or theories) they prepared. Articles that are studied
during class are discussed. Students also have the possibility to pose their questions by email. Feedback will take
about 14 hours of the time spent in class.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
The economics of money, banking
and financial markets
Documents from several central
banks: ECB, Fed etc
Frederic S.
Miskin
Pearson Global
edition
available on
internet
10
th
13:9780312649362 Yes
yes
Articles from The Economist available on
internet
Yes
Documents from several international
organizations: IMF, OECD etc .
available on
internet
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
The material covered consists of all the documents and newspaper articles distributed in class and referred to on
relevant websites. The documents relate to recent developments in the international financial markets and
students are tested on their knowledge about the causes and consequences of these developments.
The exam consists of open-ended questions focusing on the understanding of the recent developments in
98
international financial markets, covered with the distributed Articles.
Back to course overview
99
International Business Law
Course code: 5000ILW_06
Course Description: International Business Law
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Ms. Andela ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2006
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Written open
book
examination
5006ILW_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
# Description Catalogue
Nbr.
Grading
basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Exam 6100ILW_10 Decimal 5.5 Test
(written)
centrally centrally B2, H1,
B4, H2
120
minutes
100%
Rationale
Law is an indispensable instrument in a business manager's toolkit. It deals with risk management.
How to comply with regulations, how to conclude international sales contracts, how to avoid conflicts and how to
deal with them if they do occur? Questions that you will be able to answer!
The course focuses on the hands-on use of law in international business and transnational commercial
transactions. You will be equipped with the legal insight and knowledge to make sound business decisions.
Learn the do's and don'ts from the perspective of a legal advisor to major trade houses, banks, insurers and
transporters. Acquire a strong(er) legal position in negotiations. Be able to use the opportunities the law affords
and avoid the pitfalls. Understand how business and law, as well as politics and economics interconnect.
At the end of this course you will be aware of the important role of law in international business. You will be able
to distinguish the different legal systems, know which business form to use and the level of risk and control
involved. With regard to international trade you are aware of NAFTA and EU.
In case a dispute arises, you can estimate which court should be involved.
In the field of EU competition law, you can make a preventive assessment whether contracts and practices
comply with the rules of competition. In the field of international contract law, you can evaluate and negotiate
100
contracts with customers, distributors, agents, carriers, insurance companies and banks. You can analyse the
terms of delivery according to the INCOTERMS 2010 and terms of payment in a sales contract on a case to
case basis. You will know when it is opportune to use documentary credit. You will be in a position to give advice
on when particular clauses such as Free On Board or Cost Insurance Freight are favourable or unfavourable and
which clauses can easily be negotiated upon. You will be aware of the legal implications of business decisions
and the ethical responsibility involved.
In the course we will start with an introduction on the role of law in general and in international business followed
by an overview of the different legal systems. Thereafter the focus will be on international business law, in
particular on multinational corporations, EU competition and US antitrust law, the conclusion of contracts for the
export transaction, uniform rules such as international trade terms as the INCOTERMS 2010, dispute settlement
mechanisms, litigation and legal procedure, methods of payment and the carriage of goods by sea, by air and
over land. Special attention is given to the development of free trade and economic integration in Europe and
Latin America by taking a closer look at the EU, MERCOSUR and NAFTA and its effects. Legal aspects of
topical issues, such as the credit crisis and groundbreaking mergers and take overs are dealt with as and when
they develop.
Needless to say, part of this course will be dedicated to case law of international and national courts, in order to
understand where it went wrong and how this can be avoided in the future. The cases serve to illustrate the
theory.
The knowledge and skills gained in this course are categorized under the areas of international business
awareness and ethical responsibility. They are an absolute necessity for anyone operating in the international
business arena in the professional role of advisor for which IBMS prepares its students.
Subjects and Keywords
The topics covered are:
1) ) Overview of the following aspects of international business law:
a) history, distinction public/private law; b) main sources; c) main subjects; d) comparison of Common Law, Civil
law and Islamic Law systems;
2) Dispute settlement (choice of law/choice of forum/arbitration/legal procedure);
3) Different business forms and their characteristics: (sole proprietorship, partnership, Ltd., GmbH, PLC, SA de
CV), multinational corporations, product liability, US anti-trust and EU competition law;
4) International Trade Law: special emphasis on EU (European Union), NAFTA (North American Free Trade
Agreement) and MERCOSUR (Mercado Comun del Sur);
5) Legal framework of the Export Trade: International Sales Contract: conclusion of a valid contract according to
the United Nations Convention on the International Sale of Goods (CISG);
6) Transport law: Use of INCOTERMS 2010, the carriage of goods by sea (Bill of Lading, liability of the carrier
under the Hague (Visby) Rules/Rotterdam Rules), the role of insurance;
7) Finance: methods of payment (Bill of Exchange, Letter of Credit);
8) Legal aspects of topical issues (financial crisis, mergers and acquisitions, globalization, ethical responsibility,
compulsory licences)
Coherence of this course with other courses
International Business Law is related to Marketing, Corporate Finance, Sales Negotiations, Macroeconomics &
Finance in International Trade, European Law, Entrepreneurship, Management and Organisation, Critical
Thinking and the Business Cases Project as well as Current Issues in International Business and the Foreign
Direct Investment Project. It also ties in with Modern History and Society in Latin America and Political Economy
of Latin America.
Learning goals:
101
Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 distinguish between the major legal systems in the world (common law, civil
law, Islamic law)
I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
2 explain the difference between various legal entities in the international
business arena (partnership, Ltd., GmbH, PLC, SA de CV);
I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
3 differentiate between MERCOSUR, NAFTA and EU; I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
4 judge EU competition and US anti trust issues (cartel, monopoly/abuse of a
dominant position) and take business decisions accordingly
I.1 International Business
Awareness
3
5 identify the applicable law of a particular contract and which court to involve I.1 International Business
Awareness
2
6 use the United Nations Convention on the International Sale of Goods
(CISG)for the practical evaluation of international sales contracts;
I.1 International Business
Awareness
3
7 justify which INCOTERMS and /or financial instruments to use in practical
situations;
I.1 International
Business Awareness
3
8 interpret the legal impact of current issues in international politics and
economics on business
I.1 International
Business Awareness
3
9 interrelate legal implications of business decisions with current ethical issues
and ethical responsibility
VI.7 Ethical
responsibility
3
Methods of work and study hours:
Teaching methods:
* We meet three lecture hours a week (block) for one semester of approximately fourteen weeks. Furthermore
self-study and preparation for case presentations are required.
* The interactive lectures are split between Theory and Cases. Your personal input, with your national
background, influences the content of the lectures. Legal aspects of topical issues will be dealt with as and when
appropriate.
* Starting from a quick scan over International Law, we jump to the practice of (preventive) legal thinking. During
the last weeks the pieces of the jigsaw will fall together and you will then be able to evaluate and negotiate
commercial contracts for different situations successfully.
* A visit to an international institution, such as the European Parliament or the European Commission in Brussels
or the International Court of Justice in The Hague might be included, as well as a guest lecture on a topical issue.
Time allocated for contact: 42 hours
Self-study: 98 hours
102
Attendance and active class participation serve as an important asset for the exam and are highly recommended.
The court cases dealt with, explained, discussed and/or presented in class by both the lecturer and students are
mandatory for the exam. In addition, the lectures will clarify the legal theory of the topics mentioned above. All
information on the course, study materials such as Power points and International Legislation, (links to) treaties
and conventions and examination information are made available for students on the intranet. The main course
book is International Business Law 6th/latest ed. by Ray August et al.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Understanding European Union
Law
Karen Davies Routledge
Cavendish
2007 latest No
International Business Law August, R. et
al.
Prentice Hall 2013 latest 0-13-014377-
4
Yes
Syllabus on international
legislation
1)
n.a. Yes
1)
e-syllabus available on the intranet
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
#
Description Form of
Test
Learning
goal #
Material covered
1 Exam Written 1-9 Chapters 1,4,10,11,12, Power points on Comparison of Legal
systems, Transnational Commercial Law, EU and Treaty of Lisbon,
EU Competition Law and Merger Control, assigned cases and
readings.
Extra information:
Whether compulsory:
For students taking the Minor Latin American Business Studies (LABS) it is an elective within the minor. Elective
course for 3rd and 4th year and Exchange students.
Back to course overview
103
International Marketing
(Please note that this is last year’s description, minor changes may have been made to this
course description, an updated version will be available as soon as possible)
Course code: 5000IMK_08
Lecturer Ruya Kocer ([email protected])
Study Program IBMS
ECTS: 3
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1
Analysis 5008IMK_T1
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 35
2
Implementatio
n through
cases
5008IMK_T2
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 30
3
Written
Exam
5008IMK_T3
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 35
Contents and topics in the course:
The course International Marketing (IMK) concentrates on the international aspects of marketing mix and the
business environment of global companies. This module focuses on how business environment differs from
country to country and takes the perspective of marketing decisions made by global companies. On completion of
this module student should be able to: • explain the differences between international marketing and domestic
marketing; • apply international marketing theory and concepts in a range of areas including product, promotion,
pricing, and distribution (marketing mix); • relate international marketing theory to a given scenario in order to
solve practical problems, like performing market selection process and choosing appropriate market entry
strategy.
Coherence with other units of education:
This course is related to other courses within Minor International Marketing.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1 Analyze the marketing mix used in
international business.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management
3
2 Explain the recent developments
in international business.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management; IV.3 Business Communication
3
3 Recognize the ways/models to
select international markets.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management; V.4 Business Research Methods
3
4 Identify the possible market entry
strategies.
I.1 International Business Awareness; III.6 International Marketing
and Sales Management; V.4 Business Research Methods
3
Methods of work and study hours:
104
Lessons 28
Assignments 56
Total study hours 3 ECT (1 credit = 28 study hours) 84 hrs
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Global marketing. A decision-oriented approach Svend Hollensen Prentice Hall 2011 latest No
Test forms and material covered in each test:
The form of testing is open assessment (decentral testing).
Students receive 3 assignments:
- International business news presentation 30% of final grade
- Written assignment and presentation 35% of final grade
- Written case analysis and presentation 35% of final grade
One assignment is individual; the other two are group assignments. However each student is responsible for the
quality of his/her contribution on all parts of the assignment and can be graded individually.
Back to course overview
105
International Money and Finance
Course code: 5000INE_03
Course Description: International Money and Finance
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Huijg ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2003
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Written 5003INE_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
The course International Money and Finance (INE) explains -at intermediate level-
1) how Foreign Exchange (FX) markets function,
2) where these FX markets are located (physically and in cyberspace),
3) why exchange rates fluctuate and which economic and social factors impact their volatility,
4) how financial managers can mitigate the inherent risks of varying exchange rates, in the short and long term,
and
5) which specific financial instruments are used to hedge against FX volatility, consisting mainly of derivatives
(options, futures, forwards and swaps).
General international economic concepts and current problems are also explained:
a) Balance of Payments,
b) the role of Central Banks in monetary economics,
c) the emergence of the Euro,
d) the credit crisis,
and specific International Finance are also addressed:
e) the Interest Rate Parity Theory,
f) the Purchasing Power Parity theory and
g) the theory of Arbitrage.
Coherence with other units of education:
Students should be familiar with the basic concepts of supply and demand, the balance of payments, interest rate
calculations (present values etc.), the basic underlying economic forces in determining exchange rates and basic
role of Central Banks in the overall economy, i.e. determination of the discount rates, open market transactions
106
and so called quantitative easing.
This course will elaborate on these concepts up unto the level that students can implement methods to mitigate
foreign exchange (FX) risk and to reduce FX exposure.
This course mainly takes the position of students working later for financial or industrial companies as (junior)
financial managers, whereby they get involved in the financial decision making process.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals. The student can: Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 identify how Foreign Exchange (FX) markets function. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
2 assess where these FX markets are located (physically and in cyberspace. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
3 classify the various elements of the Balance of Payment. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
4 illustrate why exchange rates fluctuate and which economic and social
factors impact their volatility
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
5 identify the control instruments for the Central Banks to conduct monetary
economic policy.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
6 predict whether exchange rates will move up or depreciate. III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
7 appreciate the emergence of the Euro as a common currency and the
associated problems.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
2
8 interpret how financial managers can mitigate the inherent risks of varying
exchange rates, in the short and long term.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
9 choose which specific financial instruments can be used to hedge against
FX volatility, consisting mainly of derivatives (options, futures, forwards and
swaps).
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
10 interpret the Interest Rate Parity Theory, the Purchasing Power Parity theory
and the theory of Arbitrage.
III.8 International
Finance & Accounting
3
Methods of work and study hours:
The instructor will give weekly lectures covering all the material.
Given the political nature of the material, discussion in class is encouraged.
Supporting material consists of handouts; DVDs are shown.
Suggested daily/weekly reading of: Financial Times, The Economist, Wall Street Journal, Fortune etc. or
equivalent websites.
Literature:
107
Book: Foundations of Multinational Financial Management, by: A.C. Shapiro, Publisher: Wiley, 6th edition, ISBN:
0-471-66117-1 (book is not compulsory, it provides supporting material; the contents of the course are
summarized in the PPT's by the lecturer).
Test forms and material covered in each test:
One final written exam with 40 multiple choice questions covering all the topics of the course.
Extra information:
Prerequisites: Students should have had introductory courses in micro- and macroeconomics.
Back to course overview
108
Internet Marketing
Name Educational unit of the minor Internet Marketing
SIS code 5000INM_10
Teacher(s) Ms. Petkova ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECs 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) The course Internet Marketing covers different aspects of how
organizations use internet for marketing, describing emerging
models for developing strategy, and using case studies of
companies that use internet marketing in their strategy.
Students will play an active role throughout the course. They are
encouraged to explore and experiment with digital marketing, by
working on a variety of assignments, and expected to present their
findings in pair and group presentations. The course will culminate
with group presentations of a creative and fully developed online
presence for a specific case study.
Learning goals
Explain the key differences between internet marketing and
traditional marketing.
Demonstrate the significance of micro and macro-environment
factors in the internet marketing strategy of an organization.
Examine the opportunities and threats on a company level arising
from the internet.
Interpret the elements of the marketing mix in an online context.
Assess the difference in communications characteristics between
digital and traditional media.
Describe the main success factors in managing a digital
campaign.
Develop the fundamentals of an internet marketing strategy for a
specific case study.
Content
Digital marketing fundamentals; Digital Strategy Development,
Digital Marketing implementation and practice; The internet and
the marketing mix, Relationship Marketing, Campaign planning
and evaluation.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Chaffey D., Ellis-Chadwick F. (2012) “Digital Marketing, Strategy,
Implementation and Practice”, Person Education Limited.
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, project work, blogging on ECRC.nl
Testing method(s)
De – central open book test, Digital Marketing Project and
Presentation
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
1 De-central test 2.5 ECs
2 Project and presentation 2.5ECs
Specialities
Blogging, guest lecturers; the projects are related to real world
problems that IBS, HvA, and companies face.
Back to course overview
109
International Trade
Course code: 5000INT_03
Course Description: International Trade
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Mr. Van Amerom ([email protected]), Ms. Khan ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2003
Applied Ac.Year: 2014 - 2015
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 INT
International
Trade - TS
5003INT_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
International Trade is a "Risk Management" course.
The module is based upon the concept that international enterprises require management's full knowledge and
understanding of the major considerations supplementing the marketing effort, the risks involved, and the
practical steps in which the corporation must engage prior to, during, and subsequent to the consummation of the
sales contract.
Maintaining an overview perspective and acceptance of the philosophy that corporations should not be in the
business of knowingly taking risks over which they have no control, this module has been designed to help the
student to understand the nature of the major risks inherent in conducting business on an international level:
shipment modes and packaging, payment types and related issues, and the cause of and solution to foreign
exchange risk exposure.
This module, presented in twelve interactive classes throughout each semester, provides a primer on the terms
and conditions of the international transaction, major related risks and coverage, transportation, insurance,
documentation, and payment methods.
The following material is covered over the period of one full semester. With the exception of the course
introduction, the risk topics listed below are not in any particular order. Notification will be given during class
concerning the order to be followed.
1 Course Introduction
2 The Contract & Trade Terms
3 Packaging & Transport
4 Means of Payment
5 Short-Term Payments
6 Long-Term Payments
7 Foreign Currency
110
8 Risk Insurance
9 Logistics
10 Price Calculations
11 Price Calculations
12 Open
Topics in relation to the profession/programme profile:
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisite courses include a solid knowledge and understanding of the precepts of marketing theory and
finance. All candidates are expected to have completed, or concurrently be following an International Marketing
module.
A common sense approach to business would also help...as would a willingness to prepare for and participate in
classroom discussions.
Learning goals:
Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Recognize, Understand, and deal with everyday risks associated with
international trade in the areas of shipping, payment vehicles, foreign
exchange, insurance, and product/service pricing.
I.1 International business
awareness
II.4Business process and
change management
II.5 Entrepreneurial
management
III.7 Int. Supply Chain
management
3
3
2 Differentiate between risk-taking which is a normal part of a business'
competencies and those risks which lie outside of management's normal
core competencies and/or control, and be able to advise management how
to avoid or cover these risks.
II.4 Business process and
change management
II.4 Entrepreneurial
management
IV 2 Cooperation
IV.3 Business
communication
V.4 Business Research
methods
V.5 Planning and
organising
3
Methods of work and study hours:
The International Trade module is presented in the form of 12 interactive 3-period lectures. It is important that
in preparation for this students should read the materials(reports and book) given to them on the intranet.
Familiarizing themselves before each class with the assigned reading material aids significantly to the
understanding of the lectures.
111
Major media includes in-house created materials developed from practical international corporate and consulting
experience.
Interactive classroom discussions designed to enhance the knowledge, understanding and flexibility necessary for
corporate risk survival in the global marketplace.
Each Lecture consist of :
- Brief presentation and discussion on latest news items related to the subject(what’s up)
- presentation of relevant theory by the lecturer
- Group presentations of a brief analysis (max 5 sheets ) regarding a specific report or essay .
- Discussion and presentation of questions related with a case.
Key to this module will be theory to practice interpretation through introduction and discussion of current/past
affairs based on international business developments.
The rationale behind this course is that there is a very meaningful relationship between the export/import of goods
with other modules presented in the IBMS programme. Import and export are merely opposite sides of the same
trading coin - both of which touch upon areas of International Law and International Marketing, as well as
logistics, banking and finance, and others. A simple business calculation model is used as a platform to
demonstrate the place of pricing risk/consequence in the import/export business.
The International Trade module is a very practical down-to-earth "How To" module which seeks to consolidate in
the mind of the student all of the above seemingly disparate parts into a coherent business whole. When the
proposed import/export transaction is examined, the student is instead encouraged to ask practical "What if...?"
or, "What then..?" types of questions in a proactive stance designed to pre-empt problems/risks prior to making
the deal.
Study Load in percentage: Classroom study 50%; self-study 50%
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
no.
Type of test Subject matter
1 written 120
minutes
Value: 100%
The test examines all material covered during the semester. All material in the book
will be tested, as well as all material presented and discussed in classes.
All presentation sheets from lectures (both from students as well as (guest)
lecturer(s)
Case text if given by the lecturer
Course Book : Practices of International trade , Author : O.van Geuns, ISBN number 90-802115-3-2
The regular end-of-term exam is comprised of semi-open essay and/or multiple choice type questions requiring
students to demonstrate their understanding of/solution to the scenario based problems presented. The test is
112
designed to test the student's knowledge and understanding of the material, as well as to test the student's
application of the tools and techniques used to cover various situation based risk scenarios.
Exam and Resits
There is the normal possibility to retake the INT exam during the resit period. All exams and resits are closed-
book exams. Better to pass the regular end-of-term exam.
Format of the exam : 50% multiple choice and 50% open questions.
Back to course overview
113
Latin American Business Culture
Name Educational unit of the minor Latin America Business Culture
SIS code 5000LAC_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Meiller ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 3
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 10 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) 1. To provide students with useful knowledge about social
and business practices of trade and commerce in Latin
America;
2. To help students reflect about skills, attitudes and
behaviours needed to achieve success while
working/living in Latin America.
Learning goals
The student can:
? Sum up general intercultural differences dealt with in
each session;
? Describe general behaviour/business patterns/practices
observed in a particular geographical region and/or
country;
? Identify specific behaviour/business patterns/practices
observed in different groups within a particular country;
? Compare different behaviour/business patterns/practices
of similar groups in different countries in the area;
? Deduce aspects influencing behaviour/business
patterns/practices of different countries than his/her own;
? Generalize common management and leadership
patterns from different countries/geographical region;
and,
? Predict and justify behaviour/business patterns/practices
of Latin American countries not discussed during lecture
Content
1. General introduction.
2. The Changing Role of the Enterprise in Latin America.
3. The Role of Women in Latin American Societies.
4. Division of Classes in Latin America.
5. The Informal Economy.
6. Doing Business in Latin America – A collection of
anecdotes and practicalities.
7. A Short Comparative Study of Latin American
Economies.
Literature and other The study material will be provided by the lecturer during the
course.
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class participation, project groups, assignments, group’s
discussions, presentations
Testing method(s)
Continuous assessment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
3 ECs
Specialities Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the
entire minor
Back to course overview
114
Management Accounting 3
Course code: 4000MA3_11
Course Description: Management Accounting 3
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Ms. Ming ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
# Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Wei
gh
1 MA3 exam 4011MA3_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1T,
S1H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
An international financial manager or controller is a decision maker or member of a decision making team, using
cost accounting as a managerial tool for allocation corporate costs to divisions and products. The allocation of a
company's internal support costs and allocation of joint costs among departments and projects can have a big
impact on their respective profitability.
This module focuses on accounting related tot decision making and the concepts of relevant and opportunity
costs, and pricing decisions.
Emphasis lies on more complex cost allocation systems, cost management. Finally there is the topic of process
costing and just-in-time inventory systems.
Topics:
1. Decision making
2. Cost allocation
3. Inventory management (FIFO process costing and JIT)
Coherence with other units of education:
This unit of education is a core subject of the exam program of the main phase. It is a continuation and application
of the 2nd year cost accounting and management accounting course.
Successful completion of the 2nd year cost accounting module (MA2) is necessary for starting this MA3 module.
Learning goals:
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
115
1. Distinguish relevant from irrelevant data and explain the opportunity-
cost concept in decision making. Explain why conflicts can arise between
the decision model used by the manager, and the performance evaluation
of this manager. Discuss how companies can make short-run and long
run pricing decisions.
PT5 Management
accounting
3
2. Discuss the purposes for cost allocation and be able to allocate
(corporate, division, and support department cost) costs to cost objects.
Discuss the concept of common costs, and revenues and be able to
compute joint costs to products, and by-products.
PT5 Management
accounting
3
3. Discuss the concepts of process costing and back-flush costing.
Outline the principles of lean accounting. Implement the process costing
system in a manufacturing environment using transferred-in- costs. Carry
out different ways in which back-flush costing can simplify
traditional inventory costing systems.
PT3 Financial
administration
PT5 Management
accounting
3/2
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 40
Self-study 100
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Cost Accounting Horngren, Datar and Rajan Prentice Hall 2011 14th 9780273753971 Yes
Handout MA3 Ming 2011 Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test # Description Form of test Learning goal # Material covered
1 MA3 exam written test 1-3 Chapters 11, 12,14, 15, 16, 17, 20 and handouts
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
116
Management Accounting Techniques
Name Educational unit of the minor Management Accounting Techniques
SIS code 5000MAT_06
Teacher(s) Mr. Van Roosmalen ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) In the first year course Management Accounting1 the basic
concepts and techniques were discussed. In the course
Management Accounting Techniques the techniques are
elaborated further focusing on:
-how to apply these techniques in a international corporate
environment;
-how to integrate the use of these techniques with management
and organization theory.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
1 identify relevant cost information in
order to support decision making by
management.
III.8 Int. Fin.Acc 2
2 relate the outcome of cost calculations
for decision making to management
control aspects like performance
evaluation.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc. 3
3 construct both financial and non
financial measures for management
control purposes.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 3
4 calculate the contribution of strategy
implementation to changes in
operating income.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 3
5 identify both the purposes of indirect
cost allocation and the criteria used to
allocate indirect costs.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 2
6 decide how to set up an effective
management control system that fits
the organization’s structure of a
multinational.
III.8 Int. Fin. Acc 3
7 develop measures for evaluating both
business unit and management
performance as an integrated part of a
management control system in a
multinational setting.
III.8 Int. Fin.Acc 3
Content In this course some of the techniques already covered by basic
117
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
management accounting courses will be elaborated further.
Special attention will be paid to the way these techniques can be
applied in an international environment. Next to this, the course
focuses on the integration between management accounting and
management and organization theory.
The course will develop the student’s ability to perform managerial
cost calculations but also the ability to identify the way the
outcome of these calculations can support the management
function. Furthermore, the course helps the student to develop an
integrated approach to management control in a multinational
organization.
Topics of the course include accounting for decision making
purposes, allocation of indirect (corporate) costs, measures for
general management control purposes, strategic operating income
analysis, aspects of effective management control systems in a
multinational environment and measures for both business unit
and managerial performance.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Cost Accounting, a managerial emphasis , Horngren, Datar &
Rajan
Teaching method(s)
Lecturers
Testing method(s)
Written exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
118
Managing Entrepreneurship and Innovation
Name Educational unit of the minor Managing Entrepreneurship and Innovation
SIS code 6400MEI_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Hagen ([email protected]), Mr. Bout ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
1,8
Objective(s) To create alignment between the organizational and managerial
building blocks of a company and its business strategy.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? Assess the effectiveness of a business strategy in view of a
companies environment using contemporary theoretical
frameworks.
? Identify the necessary key resources and capabilities to execute
a business strategy
? Describe an organization structure with its departmentalization
approach, coordination mechanisms and job design principles.
? Align an organization structure with a companies’ strategy.
? Explain employee motivation based on contemporary
motivation theories.
? Identify leadership styles and leadership activities.
? Align leadership style with business strategy and employee
motivation.
? Create the right circumstances for effective teamwork.
? Align organizational culture with the organization’s strategy,
structure and leadership style
? Manage the process of change in an organization or
department based on contemporary insights.
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
• The learning objectives are introduced through a combination of
lectures and self-study. Students write a number of papers that
show their mastery of the learning objectives.
•
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Study materials consist of presentations and hand-outs in
addition to articles used for the papers.
Teaching method(s)
• Lectures
• In class workshops & assignments
• Guest lectures?
Testing method(s)
papers and written central exam
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
4 papers and 1 written exam; 5 EC’s
Specialities
Back to course overview
119
Multinational Business Foreign Exchange Management
Course code: 4000MFX_11
Course Description: Multinational Bus. Foreign Exchange Man.
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Boumans ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
# Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 Multinational
Forex
Management
4011MFX_TS D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1T,
S1H
120 100
Contents and topics in the course:
This unit of education, foreign exchange management by multinational companies, is a core subject of the IFM
exam program of the main phase H2. It builds on and is an application of the more theoretical 2nd year
introduction to corporate finance (COFVS2), with emphasis on the international financial environment, especially
foreign exchange exposure, of corporations. It is the twin module of MFIVS4FA
Literature used:
J.Madura & R Fox, International Financial Management 2nd ed. Ch 1-11
Subjects :
oreign exchange markets and foreign exchange determination
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisite: 2nd year module Corporate Finance COF (EM-IF-I 2000COF_09) .
MFX is mandatory for IFM students.
MFX is the twin module of MFI, also mandatory for IFM students. The combination MFI+MFX is a full course in
multinational finance: financial markets, economics, foreign exchange analysis and fx-management, investing and
funding, interest and liquidity management.
120
It is an optional module for IBMS students and exchange students from partner schools if they have a thorough
fundamental knowledge of corporate finance and quantitative methods.
Following one of or both the 3rd year courses Bank Management (BMA) and Financial Risk Management (FRM)
is advisable.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1. have the knowledge and the professional attitude necessary for functioning
as an international financial manager working in globally integrated financial
markets
CD2 Professional
competence
3
2. argue ForEx exposure and hedging problems PT7 Financial
management
3
3. use scenario analysis to decisions on the use of ForEx derivatives PT7 Financial
management
3
4. do ForEx forward rate calculations PT7 Financial
management
2
5. use international capital market analysis, cross currency arbitrage, PPP,
IRP, IFE and current/capital account analysis for financial management
decisions.
PT7 Financial
management
2
Methods of work and study hours:
A 3 hours lecture each week. Lecturer hands out and discusses in class a number of mini finance cases relevant
to the topics studied from the book
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lectures/discussions 38
Supervision/Q&A hour 4
Self-study 98
Guest lectures 2
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
International Financial Management J. Madura & R. Fox Thomson 2011 2 9781408032299 Yes
121
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Title Testing material
1 Multinational Foreign Exchange Management exam (written test, 120
min.)
J. Madura & R. Fox 2nd ed. CH 1-
11
and hand-outs by lecturer
Assessed is knowledge of the subjects taught and foremost the ability to apply this knowledge to problems
concerning forex markets and multinational foreign exchange management
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
122
Modern History and Society in Latin America
Course code: 5000MHS_06
Course Description: Modern History and Society in Latin America
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Ms. Vila Roches ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2006
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 Modern History
&Society in
Latin America
5006MHS_AS D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
A graduate of International Business and Management interested in doing business in Latin America should know
and be aware of a number of aspects, f.i., history, culture, tradition, politics, economy and development,
influencing not only the attitudes but also the identity of varied groups of population in different Latin American
countries.
This course relates to the professional area International Business Environment and contributes to the personal
development of the professional role of manager because:
1. it is essential for the graduate to be knowledgeable about the historical facts that are at the basis of the present
situation in relevant countries in which he/she would be interested in conducting business.
2. it is important to have developed a social orientation conducive to a responsible, professional ethical behaviour.
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites
For IBMS-students and for interested students of the other IBS-programs: two years of business studies (at least
40 ECTS in the second year). The course is available for exchange students.
Coherence of this course with other courses
This topic is clearly related to the subjects of the Minor Latin America Business Studies:
Latin American Business Culture
Sales Negotiation
Political Economy of Latin America
International Business Law and
Economics of Emerging Countries
Learning goals:
123
The following learning goals are key in the course:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1. Summarize and classify historical facts VI.6: Learning and self-development 2
2. Understand developments in Latin America in a broad
context
V.5: Planning and organising 2
3. Relate contemporary situations to historical facts II.3: International strategic vision
development
3
4. Interpret consequences of historical facts in present times I.1: International business awareness 3
5. Summarize and understand cultural factors influencing
behaviour
VI.6:Learning and self-development 3
6 Justify developments to the proper cultural context from
the past
V.4: Business research methods 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Methods of work: Every week the student will read previous to class prescribed material and write a summary or
prepare a presentation about the topic assigned. In class, he/she will either give a presentation or participate
actively in the question-and-answer round, in which the topics will be analyzed, related to different historic or
current situations and put in the right context.
The student will prepare all reading assignments or presentations, hand in at the requested time all writing
assignments, and contribute to the weekly exchange of information.
Every summary will be graded and participation in class will be assessed individually.
The written assignments need to be handed in at the requested time; the average of the assignments will provide
the course grade.
Time allocated: This module will be offered every semester during 14 weeks, with weekly lectures of 3 hours, 42
hours in total. In addition to this, assignments, self study and weekly tasks amount to roughly 100 hours.
Compulsory attendance: participating in class is necessary to put in perspective, analyze and complete the
information acquired through homework tasks. Students can miss a maximum of two sessions, but will still need
to hand in the work corresponding to the missed sessions. If they miss more without a valid, demonstrable
reason, they will be expelled from the course and will need to re-do it in a next semester.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Understanding
Contemporary Latin
America
Richard S. Hillman /
Thomas J. D'Agostino
Lynne Rienner
Publishers, Inc.
2011 last 978-1-
58826-341-
4
Yes
124
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test Description form of test Learning goals Material covered
1 continuous assessment reports (written and/or presentation) 1,2,3,4,5,6 prescribed book
If an assignment is delivered late, the maximum grade will be 5.5
Active participation: relevant contributions to information or interpretation (or lack of them) can improve or reduce
the grade from 0.5 to 1.0 point in the final grade.
Extra information:
This topic is open to exchange students and interested students of the IBS programs.
Back to course overview
125
Marketing in Action
Name Educational unit of the minor Marketing in Action
SIS code 5000MIA_10
Teacher(s) Mr. Kohnstamm ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2
Objective(s) Learn to develop effective solutions to solve marketing problems
by the usage of online and offline marketing instruments.
Learning goals
Student is able:
? to apply the relevant theoretical concepts to solve a
marketing related ‘real life’ problem
? to understand a marketing briefing
? to analyse the briefing in depth by studying the ‘reasons
behind’ the problem mentioned in the briefing
? propose creative solutions to solve the problem as
described in the briefing
? to present the solutions in a convincing way
Content
Students should use all the relevant theory from other (marketing)
courses
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
No extra literature. Usage of relevant marketing literature is
needed to solve the marketing problem mentioned above (under
8)
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, guest lectures, briefing by companies, working in teams
to solve a marketing problem. Coaching during group work.
Testing method(s)
Students receive a briefing from a company X: we have problem Y
on market Z. Goal is to solve the problem and present the solution
to company X.
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
2 project assignments: 2,5 EC’s per assignment
Specialities Each term two companies will brief the students about a specific
marketing problem the company is facing on a specific market.
Problems are always based on ‘real life situation’ in a specific
market. Representatives of the company will form the jury to judge
the proposed solutions of the best teams in a class.
Back to course overview
126
Marketing Communication
Course code: 3000MKC_12
Course
Description:
Marketing Communication
Module area: EM-IBS – I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s):
Ms. Rusthoven ([email protected]), Ms. Petkova ([email protected]), Mr. Cabral
([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2012
Applied Ac.Year: 2014 - 2015
Study year: 3
Examination:
Description Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Min. Form of
Test
Type* Type
resit*
Period Duration Weight
1 Written test 3012MKC_TS D NA Test
(written)
C C S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
2 Marketing
Communications
Plan
3012MKC_PJ D NA Project D D S1, S2 0 40
3 Assignments
International
Advertising
3012MKC_OP D NA Assignment D D S1, S2 0 10
* C=Central; D=Decentral; E=External; N=Not
Contents and topics in the course:
In this course students will learn the essence of marketing communications and its role within the marketing
function for an organization. They will also learn how to set up an international marketing communications plan for
an international product or service in a country or region.
Special attention is given to cross cultural marketing communications and international advertising specifically.
National culture poses a challenge for global marketing companies and agencies in the choice between
standardized and localized approach in marketing communications, which would be examined in more detail
throughout the course.
Coherence with other units of education:
Marketing Communications is a follow up of the courses attended in year 1 and 2 Marketing Management and
127
Market Research. In international advertising part, there is a big relevance to Cross Cultural Analysis course that
students completed in year 1. There is also a direct relationship between Strategic Marketing course that students
also follow in year 3, as the company’s marketing communications reflect and support the company’s overall
marketing strategy.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals IBL Competencies Level
1. Explain various aspects of integrated marketing communications such as
communication objectives, strategy and communication mix
1.1, 1.2,6.1, 9.1, 11.3 1
2. Summarise different elements of successful branding and global branding 1.1, 1.2, 6.1, 6.2, 11.3 1
3. Discuss the influence of culture on international communication 10.1, 10.4, 10.5, 11.3 1
4. Put together a sound SWOT analysis of the company and decide which
outcomes of the SWOT give direction to a new Marketing Communications
Plan
1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1,
4.2, 6.1
3
5. Develop a Marketing Communications Plan 1.2, 4.3,4.4, 5.2, 5.4,
6.1
3
6. Review existing international advertising campaigns and programs 5.1, 5.4, 9.2, 10.1 3
7. Produce a briefing for a marketing communications agency 1.2, 4.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.6 3
8. Demonstrate ability to work well in a team on the assignments related to the
subject (deadlines, individual contribution and cooperation)
8.1-8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 10.5,
11.1, 11.2
3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 56
Project 33
Self-study 28
Guest lectures/working visits 2
Assignment(s) 7
Presentations 7
Exams 2
Feedback sessions 5
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
128
Yes
Integrated Advertising, Promotion and
Marketing Communications Global
Edition, 6/E
Kenneth Clow and
Donald Baack
Pearson
Education
2013 6 9780273786986 Yes
Lecture slides, relevant articles provided by the
teacher
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
1. Written exam covering theory of both Marketing Communications and International Advertising. The test
will consist of multiple choice and case questions.
2. A practical MKC part (test 2 Decentral) Setting up a marketing communication plan in a project group
of min.3 and max 5 people as well as a presentation of the plan for feedback.
3. International advertising assignment (test 3 Decentral) to be made in project groups of min. 3 max 5
people
Test Test format Weight Description
1 Test (Central) 50 % 1) Kenneth E. Clow, Donald E. Baack, Integrated Advertising, Promotion and
Marketing Communications Global Edition, 6/E, ISBN: ISBN-10: 0273786989
2) Lecture Slides and any in class material
2. MKC Plan 40% Marketing Communications Plan (report) (35%)+ Presentation of the MKC plan
during the semester for feedback prior to the MKC plan deadline (5%)
3. Advertising
Assignment
10 % An assignment on the comparison of two advertisements
Rules:
The written exam can be retaken during B2, B4 and H1 and H2 while project part (Test 2 and 3) can only be
retaken during the following (new) semester. Therefore, cannot be resit during the same semester.
If a student failed the MKC plan, he/she may not choose the same company to write an MKC plan about in the
new semester. The list of the companies that are not allowed for the MKC plan will be provided by the lecturer.
The subject of the MKC plan has to be approved by the lecturer prior to commencing the MKC plan.
Students, who previously failed separate exams of IAD or MKC, have to take one written test instead which
combines theory of both.
Students who fail to show up to class within the first two weeks of the course start date will not be allowed to be
placed into groups and complete the MKC plan and the International Advertising Assignment.
Students who failed an MKC plan or the International Advertising assignment previously must contact the teacher
within 2 weeks of the course start date in order to make arrangement of re-sitting those assignments and in
order to be placed in groups. Failure to do so would mean that it will not be possible to resit the assignments that
semester.
Students with less than 80% attendance will be not be allowed to submit the MKC plan, do the presentation or
submit the International Advertising Assignment.
Attendance of the presentation is mandatory for all group members. Failure to attend the presentation will result in
no grade for the presentation.
In order to pass the course, students have to achieve a 5,5 average of the central and decentral exams, given
that the written test grade has a minimum of a 5,0
Back to course overview
129
Marketing in Latin America
Name Educational unit of the minor Project Marketing in Latin America
SIS code 6100MLA_13
Teacher(s) Ms. Andersen ([email protected]
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s)
Learning goals
This is a marketing course intended for students, interested in a
project approach to marketing which will address urban Latin
American areas. The course aims at showing students
the marketing approach of companies operating in the region.
Students will be given opportunities to confront with real
challenges of Latin America companies to selling their goods and
services within the region.
Content
The course focuses on a project approach and uses analytical
tools to understand how Latin American companies market their
goods and services within Latin America. Industries that are of
particular interest include, but are not restricted to: Retail,
Consumer Goods, Services, Technology, Financial services, Oil
and Gas, Agriculture, Travel, and Life Sciences – companies will
be selected within these industries.
Due to the size of the region, a restricted number of Latin
American countries will be used as case studies.
Literature and other The study material will be provided by the lecturer during the
course.
Teaching method(s)
The class approach includes cases that require analysis and
group discussions. Due to the fact that in many Latin American
countries, culture and social class divisions affect consumer
demand for products and services, the informal economy is one of
the areas of attention of the course, from a marketing mix
standpoint. The use of social media and other are technological
advances is also implemented in the cases.
Testing method(s)
Continuous assessment
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 ECs
Specialities Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the
entire minor
Back to course overview
130
Dutch for Exchange Students 1
Course code: 5000N01_05
Study Program IBMS
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Ms. Schuitemaker ([email protected])
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1
writing and
reading
5005N01_T1
D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
90 50
2
listening and
speaking
5005N01_T2
D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
15 50
Contents and topics in the course:
To interact with somebody is crucial to understand what he or she is saying. This course will help to communicate
in practical, everyday situations. It covers different themes spread over 9 lessons, with examples over everyday
language use, mainly in the form of dialogues, notes on language use, vocabulary lists and brief grammar notes.
Two CD's are included with exercises to train listening comprehension and pronunciation.
Topics in the course are
1. How are you?/ A party /Three years ago
2. Making a call and writing an e-mail/ Letters and sounds/Home/ Fill in a form
3. Which tram?/At the Central station/One more question/Time
4. In de trein/ Met de fiets/Een fiets huren
5. In het café/In de supermarkt/op de borrel
6. In de keuken/In een restaurant/Aan tafel
7. Een concert/Een quiz/Televisie kijken
8. Wat doe jij aan?/Een interview/ Naar de bioscoop
Coherence with other units of education:
This module makes a contribution towards learning the communication skills required for international work. The
student learns how to establish and maintain international business relationships. This skill is especially geared to
a Dutch-speaking environment and culture.
Learning goals:
The student can: Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of
most immediate personal relevance, catch the main point in short, clear, simple
messages and announcements.
Understanding -
listening
A1
2 Understand familiar names, words and very simple sentences, for example on
notices and posters
Understanding-
reading
A1
3 Interact in a simple way provided the other person is prepared to repeat or
rephrase things at a slower rate of speech.
Speaking - interaction A1
4 Can ask and answer simple questions in areas of immediate need or on very
familiar topics
Speaking - spoken
interaction
A1
5 Use simple phrases and sentences to describe where he lives and people he Speaking - spoken A1
131
knows. production
6 Fill in forms with personal details. Understanding- writing A1
Methods of work and study hours:
The method follows the communicative approach.
Students must train their listening comprehension and pronunciation by individual self-study and class activities
like listening exercises, reading practices, role-plays, interviews and working in pairs.
On the 84 hours that the student should spent on this subject, the distribution is as follows: 2 contact hours a
week with active participation in listening, reading, writing and speaking activities. The classes will involve active
participation of students and preparation at home of exercises.
The language of instruction will be Dutch. English will only be used if needed for explanation
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test no. Type of test Subject matter
1 knowledge /skills test, written test chapter 1 - 8 at maximum
2 knowledge/skills test, oral test chapter 1 - 8 at maximum
Furthermore students can only sit an oral or written test of the N01 program if and only if, in addition to the above
condition, they actively participated in 80% of the given classes during the semester. They must participate in 3
out of 4 preparatory tests. If this requirements is not met, then the first possibility to sit the above mentioned
exams is in the resit period.
Back to course overview
132
Political Economy of Latin America
Name
Education
al unit of
the minor
Political Economy of Latin America
SIS code 5000PEL_13
Teacher(
s)
Mr. Chavez Miños ([email protected])
Language English
Number
of ECTS
5
Number
of contact
hours per
week
distribute
d over 20
teaching
weeks
3
Objective
(s)
To provide students with useful knowledge about social and business practices of trade
and commerce in Latin America;
To help students reflect about skills, attitudes and behaviours needed to achieve success
while working/living in Latin America.
Learning
goals
# The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1
Recognize the trajectories and drivers of economic, social and
political development in Latin America
I.1. International business
awareness
1
2
Recognize the relationship between region-wide processes
and trends and specific national public policies.
I.1. International business
awareness
2
3
Identify Latin America's development strategies and modes of
insertion into the world economy.
I.1. International business
awareness
2
4
Explain Latin America's responses to current economic
challenges for economic growth and democratic governance.
I.1. International business
awareness
2
5
Participate in the implementation of a collective research
project, reasoning and negotiating individual perspectives and
cooperating with other team members
IV.2. Cooperation
IV.3. Business
communication
V. Business research
methods
6
Debate research findings, being able to give and receive
feedbacks
IV.3. Business
communication
Contents
This course focuses on the interaction between markets, state, and society in the context of Latin
America. In the past three decades, the region has experienced a double transition: (1) from
authoritarian to democratic rule, and (2) from a state-led and inward-focused development strategy to
an outward-oriented and market-led model of insertion into the world economy. These parallel trends
have resulted in diverse outcomes throughout the region, including the expansion of left-of-centre
governments in recent years.
The course addresses the core social, economic and political transformations that have taken place
in contemporary Latin America. It discusses the main policy changes and development challenges
faced by the countries of the region, focusing on the patterns of dissemination of market-oriented
policies, the transition to democratic governance, the reactions to change from diverse social and
economic groups, the impacts of reforms implemented since the mid-1980s, and the “post-reform”
policy agenda.
The course provides a platform for students of international business to understand and analyse the
great transformations that have reshaped the region, including the historical background and
133
theoretical rationale of national policies. By means of specific case-studies, similarities and
differences between and within countries are placed into a comparative perspective. As such, the
course intends to give a more critical counterweight to the dominant analytical approach, by drawing
attention to social and political factors and impacts beyond pure economics and the current search
for alternatives.
Literature
and other
There is no textbook that covers all the subjects of this course. The lecturer will assemble a reader
that will supplement what will be taught in class. The contents of the reader will be updated at the
beginning of each semester.
Teaching
method(s
)
The course begins with a review of the development strategies implemented in Latin America
between the 1950s and the 1980s, followed by a deeper analysis of the politics of market-led reforms
of the 1990s and 2000s. The course then moves to a more focused examination of the diversity of
governance models and economic and social policies currently evolving in the region.
During the second part of the course, students will engage in team research projects. Course
participants will be divided into groups to work on a common research project focused on a specific
Latin American country and a relevant research problem involving economic, political and social
variables. The group research findings will be the focus of both written and oral presentations at the
end of the course.
Attending classes is compulsory. The course relies on ample use of audiovisual resources, and
active student participation is expected in class discussions; therefore attendance is critical. Students
with excessive unjustified absences may be asked to leave the course.
Testing
method(s
)
Test
#
Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
1 Research report Report
1,2,3,4,5 Chapters 1 – 5
2 Research presentation Presentation
1,2,3,4,5,6 -------
3 Written exam Test (written)
1,2,3,4,6 Chapters 1 – 5
Number
of tests
and the
connecte
d number
of ECs
5 ECs
Specialiti
es
Guest lectures, films, visits to embassies, etc., organized for the entire minor
Back to course overview
134
Personal Leadership
Course code: 5000PRL_12
Course Description: Personal Leadership
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 3
Lecturer(s): Ms. Van Woudenberg-Swicegood ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2012
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1 Personal
Leadership -
Essay
5012PRL_PA D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 50
2 Personal
Leadership -
Portfolio
5012PRL_PO D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 50
Contents and topics in the course:
The Personal Leadership course consists of seven training sessions and a feedback session.
The objective of the course is that students learn how to develop themselves into leaders. A natural first step for
that to happen is through personal leadership.
Each training session focuses on a particular topic that embraces different aspects of personal leadership. These
topics are introduced by the lecturer, and are expected to be further researched and analyzed by the student.
The basis for this course in Covey's book "The 7 habits of highly effective people".
“Every human has four endowments- self awareness, conscience, independent will and creative imagination.
These give us the ultimate human freedom... The power to choose, to respond, to change.” Stephen R.Covey
This course focuses on developing inter- and intra-personal competencies, fundamental in the development of an
effective and ethically responsible professional.
Coherence with other units of education:
There is a close link to the modules of Personal Development that are taught in year 1.
135
Learning goals:
Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile competencies Level
1 Explain how taking responsibility can affect
his/her ability to handle personal and
professional challenges in an effective manner.
Understand pro-activity and the circle of
influence.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
1,2
2 Develop a personal vision of the professional
he/she aspires to be, and articulates it by
means of an action plan.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
3
3 Become aware of new time management
techniques and how to incorporate those into
daily life.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
3
4 Learn more about his/her personality
preferences and how they influence behaviour
and choices.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
3
5 Explain the importance of self-discipline and
how it impacts his/her overall success.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
2,3
6 Understand the importance of listening and
win/win situations.
IV.1 Interpersonal competencies leadership, IV.2 Co-
operation, IV.3 Business Communication, VI.1 Intra-
personal Competencies learning and self-development,
VI.7 Ethical and Corporate Responsibility
2,3
Methods of work and study hours:
Credit load and study burden
Total study load comprising: 84 hours
Seven training sessions and a final feedback session 16 hours
Independent study (reading and homework assignments) 50 hours
Individual vision paper on the business professional 20 hours
Course overview
Week Sessions Topics and assignments
136
1 Session 1 Introduction, overview of the programme
2
Session 2 Responsibility and pro-activity
3 Session 3 Personality preferences
4
Session 4 Ambition, personal mission statement
Workbook assignments
5 Session 5 Time management
Workbook assignments
6
Session 6 Interpersonal leadership and communication
Workbook assignments
7 Session 7 Interpersonal leadership and communication
Workbook assignments
8
Session 8 Final presentations, Wrap up.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective
People
Stephen R.
Covey
Free
Press
latest 0-7432-6951-
9
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
This course comprises five portfolio assignments, each worth 10% of the final grade as well as one final
assignment worth 50% of the final grade. Students are expected to work individually on the assignments
throughout the semester and hand them in on time.
Students are expected to come to class prepared by reading “The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People”.
Students need to read between 50-100 pages per week.
This is an interactive class so class attendance is mandatory. Missing more than two lessons leads to failure of
the course.
The student passes the course if the average of the graded assignments is 5.5 or higher.
Back to course overview
137
Sales Negotiation & Culture
Course code: 5000SAN_09
Course Description: Sales Negotiation & Culture
Module area: EM-IBM-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Zwarthoed ([email protected]), Ms. Van Buschbach ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2009
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3/4
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Grading
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period Duration Weight
1 continuous
assessment
5009SAN_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Not S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 40
2 assignments 5009SAN_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Decentral S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
0 30
3 negotiation
exam
5009SAN_T3 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral Decentral S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 30
Contents and topics in the course:
In business life one frequently faces situations that require negotiating. To do business successfully the
professional business man or woman must possess communication skills inherent to negotiation processes; they
must also have acquired the ability to deal with cultural differences. A professional business education must
provide students with the knowledge of, and especially tools for, cross-cultural negotiations. This is true,
regardless of whether one starts a company of his own, or chooses employ in an other company.
This training module enables the student to train and develop their negotiating skills, and adopt a flexible
approach to cultural differences.
During the first part of the course the emphasis is on basic techniques and skills for negotiators. Students receive
negotiation roles for each week, which they have to prepare for in writing, describing the outcomes they wish to
achieve. In class these negotiations are acted out by students, and the trainer comments on their negotiating style
and approach.
In the second part of the course the intercultural aspects become part of the negotiating simulations students
must do. Negotiating students now see themselves confronted by communications styles they were not expecting.
Dealing with them adequately, and incorporating a so-called "culture-neutral" attitude in one's negotiating style,
are the main objectives of the second part of the training course.
Besides the training activities students must complete several assignments. They hand in preparations for
negotiations; they must observe other students while negotiating and write an observation report -including advice
for improvement-; and they must analyse and discuss an intercultural negotiation case study.
During the various parts of the course links will be made, when possible, with activities students need to perform
for other parts of the minor Entrepreneurship and LABS. Mainly, these links will be found in the negotiating
138
simulations.
Coherence with other units of education:
Prerequisites
This course is mandatory course in the minors Entrepreneurship and Latin American Business Studies. To
participate students need to have completed 40 credits or more in the second year of the IBMS programme.
Coherence of this course with other courses
In the course theories discussed in Cross cultural awareness (CCA) are applied to negotiating situations and
topics.
The negotiation exercises present business situations and problems related to financial and general management
areas, as well as situations that young entrepreneurs may face. In the second part of the course cultural
influences on negotiating processes and styles are included, and attention is paid to specific features of Latin
American cultures.
The skills that students develop during the course may be to their advantage when looking for a placement.
As far as applicable, the criteria for the various reports that students write during the course are similar to those
for the thesis.
All study activities are also assessed on the quality of business English.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Sum up the basic concepts of negotiation
theory;
Business Communication 1
2 Describe the strategies and tactics for
negotiations.
Business Communication 1,2
3 Recognise strategies and tactics used by himself and
others;
Learning and self development 3
4 Point out the effect of cultural variables on
communication
Intercultural competency 2,3
5 Identify common ground in a conflict
situation;
Ethical responsibility 3
6 Discriminate between process and result focussed
negotiations
Leadership 3
7 Identify negotiating styles
Business communication 3
8 Discriminate between wants and needs
Planning and organising 2
9 Construct a plan to negotiate;
Planning and Organising 3
10 Use various styles and tactics in a negotiation;
Business communication 3
11 Demonstrate a professional approach during the negotiating
process
Learning and self development 3
12 Use fluent and correct business English (oral and written)
Business communication 3
139
13 Give arguments for specific strategic choices;
Business research 2
14 Compare negotiating styles in different
settings;
Business communication 2
15 Paraphrase arguments, opinions and feelings Business communication 3
16 Interrelate cultural determinators and negotiation approach
Intercultural competency;
Business communication
3
17 Interpret the effectives of negotiating
styles
Learning and self development 2
Methods of work and study hours:
During the first part of the course the emphasis is on basic techniques and skills for negotiators. Students receive
negotiation roles for each week, which they have to prepare for in writing, describing the outcomes they wish to
achieve. In class these negotiations are acted out by students, and the trainer comments on their negotiating style
and approach.
In the second part of the course the intercultural aspects become part of the negotiating simulations students
must do. Negotiating students now see themselves confronted by communications styles they were not expecting.
Dealing with them adequately, and incorporating a so-called "culture-neutral" attitude in one's negotiating style,
are the main objectives of the second part of the training course.
Besides the training activities students must complete several assignments. They hand in preparations for
negotiations; they must observe other students while negotiating and write an observation report -including advice
for improvement-; and they must analyse and discuss an intercultural negotiation case study.
Compulsory attendance
Each class is devoted to the training and development of specific skills. Attendance is mandatory for 80 %.
Attending classes:36 hours
Preparing for class:5 hours per class* 12=60 (reading and preparing negotiation case)
Assignments: research and writing: 42 hours
Exam: 2 hours
Total workload=140 hours.
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Edition ISBN Required
Intercultural Sales Negotiations Various HvA 2012 n.a. Reader number 073 Yes
Hand-outs Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test
Description Form of Test Learning goal # Material covered
140
#
1 cont.
assessment
assessment 1,2,4,5,8,12,13 Reader Intercultural sales Negotiations: all
chapters
2. Assignments written
reports
3,4,6,7,8,9,12,14,16,17 Chapters 1,2,3 Reader Intercultural
Negotiations
3. Oral exam oral 5,10,11,15 Exam Case
# Description Catalogue
Nbr.
Grading
basis
Minimum Form of
Test
Type Type
resit
Period Duration Weigh
1 continuous
assessment
D n.a. assessment decentral n.a. B2;B4 n.a. 40%
2 Assignments D n.a. Assignment decentral decentral B2;B4;H1;H2 n.a 30%
3 oral
negotiation
exam
D n.a. Oral decentral decentral B2;B4;H1;H2 2 hour 30%
1. Continuous assessment
a. attendance: 80%=6
b. scores pop quizzes: 3 positive scores=6. The quizzes assess the degree to which the student has read the
literature.
c. adequate preparation plans : 3=6. preparations are based on negotiation role plays.
The average of a,b,c is the grade for test 1.
2. Assignments
a. Observation report
b. Intercultural case study
c. Exam preparation
The average of a,b,c is the grade for test 2
3. Oral exam
Students are given the negotiation exam case two weeks in advance. During the negotiation they are individually
assessed.
Back to course overview
141
Supply Chain Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Supply Chain Management
SIS code 6100SCME13
Teacher(s) Mr. Draijer ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2,5
Objective(s) ? create insight into logistic and financial processes, the
management of this processes and integration of these
processes with the supply chains.
? integration, inter relationship, cooperation and chain
optimalization are in the textbooks considered to be the
key of successful Supply Chain Management.
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-
do’-statements
The student can apply MRP-1 and MRP-2 schemes.
The student can explain the concepts of materials
management and apply this.
The student can describe the main concepts of procurement
The student can explain the different relationships with
suppliers and related logistics concepts
supply chain strategies to describe and identify in practice
supply chain stages and can describe and apply in practice
supply chain stages and can describe and apply in practice
identify best practices in the above fields Compile and
execute quick scan research within an enterprise.
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with
(like table of contents in a study book)
Logistics theory versus Supply chain management
Apply practical knowledge of logistics within the supply chain.
Supply Chain Council Operations Reference Model.
Use of Advanced Planning and Optimizer, SAP SCM.
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
logistics and supply chain management Martin Christopher
Printence Hall 2011 latest 0273731122
Teaching method(s)
lectures, tutorials, training
Testing method(s)
Portfolio
Number of tests and the connected
number of ECs
1. 5 ECs
Specialities SAP ERP and guest lecture University of Economics and Law
studies Berlin.
Back to course overview
142
Strategic Enterprise Management
Name Educational unit of the minor Strategic Enterprise Management
SIS code 6100SEME13
Teacher(s) Mr. Knippenburg ([email protected]), Mr. Van Roosmalen
([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
2,5
Objective(s)
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
? The student must be able, with the financials ratios, to
judge about the financial situation of a company and
understand that he, as a manager, can help to increase
the liquidity by using JIT f.i.
? The student must be able to make a planning for one or
more divisions (on an operational level), within the area
of the economic situation of a country.
? The student must within the framework of responsibility
accounting be able to explain and defend the differences
between the desired and actual goals
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Searching for literature and other study stuff
Some stuff will be delivered by the lecturer
Teaching method(s)
Lectures and project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Portfolio
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
1. 5 ECs
Specialities
Back to course overview
143
Strategic Marketing/Strategic Market Management
Course code: 3000SMK_10/5000STM_09
Course
Description:
Strategic Marketing
Module area: EM-IBL-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s):
Mr. Molenaars ([email protected]), Ms. Andersen ([email protected]), Mr.
Janssen ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2010
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 3
Examination:
# Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weight
1 Theory
Examination
3010SMK_T1 D NVT Test
(written)
Central Central S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
2 Strategic
Plan (Group
Assignment)
3010SMK_T2 D NVT Test
(written)
Decentral
Decentral
S1, S2,
S1H,
S2H
120 50
Contents and topics in the course:
This unit of education provides students with a complete overview of the core concepts of strategic market
management.
Topics are:
- Definition of a business strategy
- Role of strategic market management
- External analysis and customer analysis
- Competitor analysis
- Market/submarket analysis
- Environmental analysis and strategic uncertainty
- Internal analysis
- Creating, adapting & implementing strategy (i.e. alternative value propositions; building and managing brand
equity; energizing the business; leveraging the business; creating new businesses; global strategies; setting right
investment strategy and harnessing the organization).
Coherence with other units of education:
Prior knowledge of the basics of Marketing Management is essential. Also, all prior courses in Market Research
(needed for strategic analysis); Management & Organization and Management Accounting/Financial Accounting
have brought important knowledge and skills to students that will be needed in this course.
144
Learning goals:
No. Learning goal IBL-Programme’s profile
competencies
Level
1 Choosing appropriate research methods to carry out relevant market
research
I-2 3
2 Analyzing and understanding a business in depth both internally and
externally
I-3 3
3 Interpret outcomes of external and internal analysis aiming at
development of best possible business strategy/-ies
I-4 3
4 Understanding the organizational consequences when implementing
the best possible business strategy/-ies (ad 3)
I-4 3
5 Work together in a (mostly multi-national) group with others in a
constructive and business-like way
II-8;III-10; III-11 3
6 Informing and convincing others through business-like presentations II-9 3
Methods of work and study hours:
Work methods Total study hours per semester
Lecture 33
Self-study 30
Working on group assignment (strategic market plan) 57
Supervision/Q&A hour 20
Total study hours (1 credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
Strategic Market Management
(Global Perspectives)
D. Aaker & D.
McLoughlin
John Wiley &
Sons
2010 978-0-470-
68975-2
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
Test no. Test form Material
1 Theory examination (multiple Chapters 1 to 15
145
choice questions plus open questions)
2 Strategic market plan (group assignment)
Test 1:
Lecturers can make a mock exam available on request so students have an idea of what to expect for the theory
exam.
Test 2:
Students will be formed in groups of 4-6 students. Job: analyzing the external environment (I), analyzing the
internal environment (II) and developing a suitable business strategy (III) for an existing company/business unit.
Students will have to deliver group presentations on part I, II and III which will all be graded. Final grade for test 2:
average grade for part I, II and III of test 2.
Extra information:
A minimum attendance of 80% is required.
Group presentations, part of the group assignment, are to be considered as official exams. In other words, no
show=no grade.
Back to course overview
146
Stock Valuation (Investment Analysis)
Name Educational unit of the minor Stock Valuation/Investment Analysis
SIS code 5000STV_12
Teacher(s) Mr. Jacobs ([email protected])
Language English
Number of ECTS 5
Number of contact hours per week
distributed over 20 teaching weeks
3
Objective(s) Stock valuation (asset management) is a course offered to 3rd
and 4th year students. It is a course which explains at an
advanced level the determinants of stock prices
Learning goals
Learning goals are formulated in ‘can-do’-
statements
# Learning goals
The student can:
Programme’s
profile
competencies
Level
1 Point out how different indexes are
being composed and interpret
changes in index values.
III.8 Int. Fin.
Accounting
I.1 Int. Business
Awareness
2,3
1,2,3
2 Calculate the return on various
forms of investments
III.8 2,3
3 Sum up the recurrence of the most
important bubbles and bursts in our
financial history and indicate the
common denominators of these.
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
4 Decipher and compare the two
main branches of analysis,
technical and fundamental.
III.8
2,3
5 Use the Gordon Growth Model in
calculating the intrinsic value of a
common stock and interpret the
outcome
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
6 Calculate bond values. III.8
2,3
7 Reproduce the capital asset pricing
model.
III.8
2,3
8 Summarize the role of behavioural
finance in financial markets
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
9 Explain what kind of asset
allocation strategies are feasible to
investors and judge their
implications.
III.8
I.1
2,3
1,2,3
10 Write an investment report for a
stock listed company and come up
with a recommendation to buy, hold
III.8
I.1
IV.2
2,3
1,2,3
1,2
147
or sell the stock. V.4 1,2,3
Content
Mention the subjects that are dealt with (like
table of contents in a study book)
The module stock valuation/investment analysis focuses on
financial markets and financial instruments from an investor's
perspective (as opposed to corporate finance where the
company's perspective prevails).Different investment opportunities
available to investors will be discussed, including bonds, mutual
funds, trackers and of course common stocks. Special attention
will be paid to the two branches of analysis, technical and
fundamental. A special feature of the course is the analysis of the
history of markets, with the recurrence of bubbles and bursts. We
will further touch upon behavioural finance, modern portfolio
theory, the capital asset pricing model and asset allocation.
Throughout the course, students will be required to analyze and
interpret financial data from different sources and to participate
actively in classroom discussion.
Finally students will work in teams on an investment report,
thereby putting theory into practice
Literature and other Study material
Mandatory and/or advised
Burton G. Malkiel, A Random Walk down Wall Street
Teaching method(s)
Lectures, class, , project group meetings
Testing method(s)
Written exam and Investment Report
Number of tests and the connected number
of ECs
5 EC’s
Specialities n/a
Back to course overview
148
Treasury Management Project
Course code: 4000TMP_11/6100TMPE13
Course Description: Treasury Management Project
Module area: EM-IF-I
ECTS: 5
Lecturer(s): Mr. Boumans ([email protected]), Mr. Koster ([email protected])
Language: English
1st Ac.Year: 2011
Applied Ac.Year: 2014
Study year: 4
Examination:
#
Description
Catalogue
number
Gradin
g
Basis
Minimum
Form of
Test
Type
Type
resit
Period
Duration
Weigh
1
Treasury
Management
Project
4011TMP_AS
G NVT Assessment
Decentral
Decentral
S1T, ,
S1H,
S2T
S2H
0 100
Contents and topics in the course:
The management of money flows is a hot item for many companies. Good treasury management saves money.
Great savings in management and bank costs can be achieved by centralising money flows - millions of Euros a
year for large multinationals.
In the TMP module the students use an ERP system (in this case SAP ERP) to work in the field of Treasury
Management. In this module the ERP system used, SAP, is not a goal in itself, but provides a means of
experiencing the many aspects of treasury management. The emphasis lies on anything to do with the
management of money flows. Tendering, winning orders, purchasing, invoicing, payments and receipts, and
reacting to liquidity shortages / surpluses – all in different currencies – generate the problems that every treasurer
has to deal with.
In groups of four, students are responsible for the cash/forex/treasury management of a (virtual) consultancy
company.
In relation to the final objectives of the IFM program, in the Treasury Management Project students obtain
operational knowledge of and skills in financial accounting, financial markets, the use of instruments and
derivatives in treasury management, and in the application of SAP.
Specific learning objectives are that at the end of the TMP, students will have applied the following competences:
-analysis, pro forma balance sheets and income statements,
-analysis
exchange rate exposure of imports from and exports to non-euro-countries
fore exposure using currency forwards, swaps and options
149
payable management
-of-capital of exceeding credit terms;
Prerequisites
At least 2nd year IFM level knowledge of Corporate Finance , Financial Accounting and Macroeconomics
Coherence of this course with other courses
In this unit of education the knowledge and competencies of the 4th year's courses Financial Accounting and
International Financial Management (MFX and MFI) are applied to "real life" treasury problems. Students do the
job of cash/forex manager / treasurer in a virtual company using SAP ERP.
Learning goals:
No. Learning goals Program profile
competences
level
1 Knowledge of financial markets and financial
instruments
PT7 (financial mgt) 3
2 Management of money flows PT7 (financial mgt) 3
3 Management of information
of these money flows (here using SAP ERP)
PT7 (financial mgt) 3
4 Report (written and orally) adequately CD4 Social and communicative
performance
2
5 Understand that in real life financial
management you always deal with uncertainty
PT7 (financial mgt) 3
6 Work and solve problems within a team CD4 Social and communicative
performance
2
7 Learn to take criticism and use it
to your advantage
CD4 Social and communicative
performance
2
8 Take initiative CD3 Business performance 2
Methods of work and study hours:
Attendance is compulsory. In groups of four, students in their role of cash/forex manager or treasurer solve
financial problems that a small company encounters. The teacher acts as consultant. Besides, the teacher plays
the roles of the owner of the company, of banker, forex and option dealer, and more if necessary. Material is
handed out sketching problems. Missing but necessary information students have to find out themselves, from
outside sources and/or from their teacher/consultant. Asking the right questions is as important as coming up with
solutions.
A number of short memos have to be written
150
Work method Total study hours per semester
Tutorials 20
teamwork on assignments 120
total study hours ( 1credit = 28 study hours) 140
Literature:
Title Author(s) Publisher Year Print ISBN Comp.
International Financial Management J. Madura & R.
Fox
Thomson 2011 2 9781408032299 No
TMP syllabus and handouts available on
line and via SAP-mail
Yes
Test forms and material covered in each test:
There is no central test.
For the assessment of the work performed, it is the whole process that counts and takes place during and at end
of the project. The assessment is based on
The resulting grade is for the whole group, although individual adjustments can be made.
A subject is only tested in the semester in which it is taught.
Back to course overview
doc_462438199.pdf